CS1530 2030ENSMr1

CS-1530/2030
SERVICE
MANUAL
Published in Feb.01
2AV70951
Revision 1
CAUTION
DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH
THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. DISPOSE OF
USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS.
ATTENTION
IL Y A DANGER DEXPLOSION SIL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE.
REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU MME TYPE OU DUN TYPE RECOMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR. METTRE AU RBUT LES BATTERIES USAGES
CONFORMMENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT.
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of
their customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel
are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions
described here before engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions

Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and
to prevent damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING:Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point
of attention is shown inside the symbol.
General warning.
Warning of risk of electric shock.
Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action.
Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required.
Remove the power plug from the wall outlet.
Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to
one outlet: they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check
that it is adequate for the rated current. ............................................................................................
Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or
electric shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause
explosion or electric shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes,
lightning rods, ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the
proper authorities. .............................................................................................................................
CAUTION:
Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury. .....
Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock. ..............
Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material.
This may cause fire. ..........................................................................................................................
Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool
as possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance. ..........
Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it. ..............................................
Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may
cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury. .................................................
Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is
accidentally ingested, drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention
immediately. If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain
medical attention. ..............................................................................................................................
Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copiers
instruction handbook. ........................................................................................................................
2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING
Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly. ..............
Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related
brochures. .........................................................................................................................................
Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

mechanisms and protective circuits. .................................................................................................
Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related
brochure when replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other
serious accident. ...............................................................................................................................
When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a
part, always use the correct scale and measure carefully. ...............................................................
Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection. ............
Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If
it is dirty, clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock. ............................................................
Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may
damage eyesight. ..............................................................................................................................
Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause
electric shock if handled improperly. .................................................................................................
CAUTION
Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are
safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections...........................................................
Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts. .......
Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot. .................................
Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause
abnormally high temperatures. ..........................................................................................................
Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement. ...................
Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing
them; always hold the plug itself. ......................................................................................................
Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a
cable cover or other appropriate item. ..............................................................................................
Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks........
Remove toner completely from electronic components. ...................................................................
Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged. ...................................
After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were
removed, have been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten
connector, trapped wire and missing screws. ..................................................................................
Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the
instruction handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary. ...................
Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below: ....................................
Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the main
switch on.
Always wash hands afterwards.
Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to
fire in a furnace, etc. ..........................................................................................................................
Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet
immediately. ......................................................................................................................................
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than
the specified refiner; it may generate toxic gas. ................................................................................
2AV/X
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1-1
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions ........................................................................................................... 1-1-5
(1) Copier ............................................................................................................................................. 1-1-5
(2) Operation panel .............................................................................................................................. 1-1-6
1-1-3 Machine cross section .......................................................................................................................... 1-1-8
1-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................ 1-1-9
(1) Drive system 1 (optical section) ...................................................................................................... 1-1-9
(2) Drive system 2 (drive motor drive train) ........................................................................................ 1-1-10
1-2 Handling Precautions

1-2-1 Drum .................................................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-2-2 Developer and toner ............................................................................................................................. 1-2-1
1-2-3 Installation environment ....................................................................................................................... 1-2-1
1-3 Installation
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation ................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Installation procedure ..................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes .................................................................................................................. 1-3-13
1-3-3 Copier management ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-14
(1) Using the copier management mode (15 cpm copier) .................................................................. 1-3-14
(2) Setting department management items ........................................................................................ 1-3-15
(3) Copy default ................................................................................................................................. 1-3-15
(4) Using the copier management mode (20 cpm copier) .................................................................. 1-3-18
(5) Setting department management items ........................................................................................ 1-3-19
(6) Copy default ................................................................................................................................. 1-3-19
(7) Machine default ............................................................................................................................ 1-3-20
(8) Language ...................................................................................................................................... 1-3-21
1-3-4 Installing the key counter (option) ...................................................................................................... 1-3-22
1-3-5 Installing the original size detection sensor
(option for the metric specifications of the 15 cpm copier only) .......................................................... 1-3-24
1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option) ................................................................................................... 1-3-25
1-4 Maintenance Mode

1-4-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Executing a maintenance item ....................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Maintenance mode item list (for 20 cpm copier) ............................................................................. 1-4-2
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items (for 20 cpm copier) ............................................................. 1-4-5
(4) Maintenance mode item list (for 15 cpm copier) ........................................................................... 1-4-53
(5) Contents of maintenance mode items (for 15 cpm copier) ........................................................... 1-4-56
1-5 Troubleshooting
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ................................................................................................ 1-5-3
(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................... 1-5-8
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis ..................................................................................................................................... 1-5-12
(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................ 1-5-12
(2) Self-diagnostic codes ...................................................................................................................
1-5-12
1-1-1
1-5-3 Image formation problems ................................................................................................................. 1-5-17
(1) No image appears (entirely white). ............................................................................................... 1-5-18
(2) No image appears (entirely black). ............................................................................................... 1-5-18
(3) Image is too light. ......................................................................................................................... 1-5-19
(4) Background is visible. ................................................................................................................... 1-5-19
(5) A white line appears longitudinally. .............................................................................................. 1-5-19
2AV/X
(6) A black line appears longitudinally. ..............................................................................................
(7) A black line appears laterally. .......................................................................................................
(8) One side of the copy image is darker than the other. ...................................................................
(9) Black dots appear on the image. ..................................................................................................
(10) Image is blurred. ...........................................................................................................................
(11) The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original. ................................
(12) The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original. ................................
(13) Paper creases. .............................................................................................................................
(14) Offset occurs. ...............................................................................................................................
(15) Image is partly missing. ................................................................................................................
(16) Fixing is poor. ...............................................................................................................................
(17) Image is out of focus. ...................................................................................................................
(18) Image center does not align with the original center. ...................................................................
(19) Image is not square. .....................................................................................................................
(20) Image contrast is low (carrier scattering) ......................................................................................
1-5-4 Electrical problems .............................................................................................................................
(1) The machine does not operate when the main switch is turned on. .............................................
(2) The drive motor does not operate (C200). ...................................................................................
(3) The scanner motor does not operate. ..........................................................................................
(4) The toner feed motor does not operate. .......................................................................................
(5) Cooling fan motor 1 does not operate. .........................................................................................
(8) The drawer drive motor does not operate. ...................................................................................
(9) The registration clutch does not operate. .....................................................................................
(10) The upper paper feed clutch does not operate. ............................................................................
(11) The lower paper feed clutch does not operate. ............................................................................
(12) Paper feed clutch (ST)1 does not operate. ...................................................................................
(13) Paper feed clutch (ST)2 does not operate. ...................................................................................
(14) The bypass paper feed clutch does not operate. .........................................................................
(15) The cleaning lamp does not turn on. ............................................................................................
(16) The exposure lamp does not turn on. ...........................................................................................
(17) The exposure lamp does not turn off. ...........................................................................................
(18) The fixing heater does not turn on (C610). ...................................................................................
(19) The fixing heater does not turn off. ...............................................................................................
(20) Main charging is not performed (C510). .......................................................................................
(21) Transfer charging is not performed. .............................................................................................
(22) No developing bias is output. .......................................................................................................
(23) The original size is not detected. ..................................................................................................
(24) The original size is not detected correctly. ...................................................................................
(25) The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present
in the upper drawer. ......................................................................................................................
in the lower drawer. ......................................................................................................................
on the bypass tray. .......................................................................................................................
(28) The size of paper in the upper drawer is not displayed correctly. ................................................
(29) The size of paper in the lower drawer is not displayed correctly. .................................................
(30) The printing width of the paper on the bypass tray is not detected correctly. ...............................
(31) A paper jam in the paper feed, paper conveying or fixing section is indicated
when the main switch is turned on. ..............................................................................................
(32) The message requesting covers to be closed is displayed when the front cover,
1-1-2
paper conveying unit and lower drawer left cover are closed. ......................................................
(33) Others. ..........................................................................................................................................
1-5-5 Mechanical problems .........................................................................................................................
(1) No primary paper feed. .................................................................................................................
(2) No secondary paper feed. ............................................................................................................
(3) Skewed paper feed. ......................................................................................................................
1-5-20
1-5-20
1-5-20
1-5-21
1-5-21
1-5-21
1-5-22
1-5-22
1-5-22
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-23
1-5-24
1-5-24
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-25
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-26
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-27
1-5-28
1-5-28
1-5-28
1-5-28
1-5-28
1-5-29
1-5-29
1-5-29
1-5-29
1-5-29
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-5-30
2AV/X
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................

Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time. .................................................................................
Paper jams. ..................................................................................................................................
Toner drops on the paper conveying path. ...................................................................................
Abnormal noise is heard. ..............................................................................................................
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-5-30
1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Precautions ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(2) Running a maintenance item .......................................................................................................... 1-6-2
1-6-2 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 1-6-3
(1) Detaching and refitting the upper and lower paper feed pulleys .................................................... 1-6-3
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley ..................................................................... 1-6-6
(3) Detaching and refitting the left registration cleaner assembly ........................................................ 1-6-8
(4) Detaching and refitting the right registration cleaner assembly ...................................................... 1-6-8
(5) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper width switch ................................................................... 1-6-9
(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement ............................................................................ 1-6-10
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing .................................................... 1-6-10
(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing ..................................... 1-6-12
(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ........................................................................... 1-6-13
(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printing ........................................................................................ 1-6-15
(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper .......................................................................... 1-6-17
1-6-3 Optical section .................................................................................................................................... 1-6-19
(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ................................................................................... 1-6-19
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires .................................................................................... 1-6-20
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires ............................................................................................... 1-6-20
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires ...................................................................................................... 1-6-21
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit .............................................................................. 1-6-24
(4) Adjusting the skew and vertical shifting of the laser scanner unit ................................................ 1-6-26
(4-1) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit ....................................................................... 1-6-26
(4-2) Adjusting the vertical shifting of the laser scanner unit ........................................................ 1-6-27
(5) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference) .................................................................................. 1-6-28
(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference) ................................................................................ 1-6-30
(7) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference) ....................................................................... 1-6-31
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction ........................................ 1-6-32
(9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction ................................... 1-6-34
(10) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration ........................................................................... 1-6-36
(11) Adjusting the scanner center line ................................................................................................. 1-6-37
(12) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass ............................................ 1-6-38
1-6-4 Main charging section ........................................................................................................................ 1-6-40
(1) Detaching and refitting the charger assembly .............................................................................. 1-6-40
(2) Replacing the tungsten wire (reference) ....................................................................................... 1-6-41
1-6-5 Drum section ...................................................................................................................................... 1-6-43
(1) Detaching and refitting the drum .................................................................................................. 1-6-43
1-6-6 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 1-6-44
(1) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference) .................................................................. 1-6-44
1-6-7 Transfer section ................................................................................................................................. 1-6-45
(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly ..................................................................... 1-6-45
1-6-8 Cleaning section ................................................................................................................................. 1-6-46
(1) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade ................................................................................... 1-6-46
(2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies ..................................................... 1-6-47
(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning lower seal assembly ............................................................ 1-6-47
1-1-3
1-6-9 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 1-6-48
(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit ........................................................................................... 1-6-48
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor .......................................................................... 1-6-49
(3) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws ............................................................... 1-6-49
(4) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater ....................................................................................... 1-6-50
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller ........................................................................................... 1-6-51
(6) Detaching and refitting the press roller ......................................................................................... 1-6-53
2AV/X
1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-7-1
1-7-2
1-7-3
1-7-4
Replacing the main PCB ......................................................................................................................

Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB ............................................................................................
Upgrading the firmware on the operation unit PCB (20 cpm copier only) ............................................
Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR) ...............................................................................................
1-7-1
1-7-3
1-7-5
1-7-6
2-1 Mechanical construction

2-1-1 Paper feed section ............................................................................................................................... 2-1-1
2-1-2 Main charging section .......................................................................................................................... 2-1-4
2-1-3 Optical section ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1-6
(1) Original scanning ............................................................................................................................ 2-1-7
(2) Image printing ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-8
2-1-4 Developing section ............................................................................................................................. 2-1-10
(1) Formation of magnetic brush ........................................................................................................ 2-1-11
(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensor ................................................................................ 2-1-12
(3) Toner density control .................................................................................................................... 2-1-12
(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltage .................................................................................. 2-1-13
(5) Correcting toner output voltage .................................................................................................... 2-1-14
2-1-5 Transfer and separation section ......................................................................................................... 2-1-15
2-1-6 Cleaning section ................................................................................................................................. 2-1-17
2-1-7 Charge erasing section ...................................................................................................................... 2-1-18
2-1-8 Fixing section ..................................................................................................................................... 2-1-19
2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-2-1 Electrical parts layout ...........................................................................................................................
(1) PCBs ..............................................................................................................................................
(2) Switches and sensors .....................................................................................................................
(3) Motors .............................................................................................................................................
(4) Other electrical components ...........................................................................................................
2-2-1
2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-4
2-2-5
2-3 Operation of the PCBs

2-3-1
2-3-2
2-3-3
2-3-4
Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-4
CCD PCB ........................................................................................................................................... 2-3-14
Laser diode PCB ................................................................................................................................ 2-3-15
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-1
Timing chart No. 2 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-2
Timing chart No. 3 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-3
Timing chart No. 4 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-4
Timing chart No. 5 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-5
Timing chart No. 6 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-6
Timing chart No. 7 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-7
Timing chart No. 8 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-8
Timing chart No. 9 .......................................................................................................................................... 2-4-9
Timing chart No. 10 ...................................................................................................................................... 2-4-10
Maintenance parts list ................................................................................................................................... 2-4-11
Periodic maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................ 2-4-12
General connection diagram (1) ................................................................................................................... 2-4-15
General connection diagram (2) ................................................................................................................... 2-4-16
1-1-4
2AV/X
1-1-1 Specifications
15 cpm copier
Type ............................................... Desktop
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" 17"
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper ..................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 80 g/m2)
Bypass table: Plain paper (60 160 g/m2)
Special paper: Transparencies, tracing paper, colored paper, letterhead
and envelopes (when using the printer function only)
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" 17"
Minimum: A6R /51/2" 81/2"/Folio (When the bypass table is used)
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 50 200%, 1% increments
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in copy mode:
A4: 15 copies/min.
A4R: 10 copies/min.
A3: 8 copies/min.
B5: 15 copies/min.
B5R: 10 copies/min.
B4 (257 364 mm): 8 copies/min.
11" 81/2": 15 copies/min.
81/2" 11": 10 copies/min.
11" 17": 8 copies/min.
81/2" 14": 8 copies/min.
At 100% magnification when the optional memory board is installed:
A4: 18 copies/min.
A4R: 12 copies/min.
A3: 9 copies/min.
B5: 18 copies/min.
B5R: 12 copies/min.
B4 (257 364 mm): 10 copies/min.
11" 81/2": 18 copies/min.
81/2" 11": 12 copies/min.
11" 17": 9 copies/min.
81/2" 14": 10 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ From 5 to 6 s (A4/11" 81/2", 100% magnification, upper drawer, ejection to the eject
tray)
Warm-up time ................................. 30 s or less (room temperature 20C/68F, 65% RH)
In preheat/energy saver mode: 30 s or less (room temperature 20C/68F, 65% RH)
[priorty to power save]
[priorty to recovery]
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Drawers: 250 sheets
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 50 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, 11" 81/2", 81/2" 11", 51/2"
8 1/2")
25 sheets (A3, B4, Folio, 11" 17", 81/2" 14")
Continuous copying ........................ 1 250 sheets
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Exposure light source ..................... Semiconductor laser
Exposure scanning system ............ Polygon mirror
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and N29T black toner
Toner density control: toner sensor
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner cartridge
1-1-1
2AV/X
Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters (850 W for 120 V specifications/910 W for 220-240 V
specifications)
Control temperature: 180C/356F (at normal ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection device: 140C/284F thermostat
Fixing pressure: 49 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Resolution ...................................... 600 600 dpi
Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp
Dimensions .................................... 550 (W) 560 (D) 455 (H) mm
215/8" (W) 221/16" (D) 1715/16" (H)
550 (W) 560 (D) 498 (H) mm (for Asia and Oceania specifications)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 38 kg/83.6 lbs
41 kg/90.2lbs (for Asia and Oceania specifications)
Floor requirements ......................... 891 (W) 560 (D) mm
351/16" (W) 221/16" (D)
Functions ........................................ Self-diagnostics, preheat, automatic copy density control, original size detection*,
automatic paper selection, automatic magnification selection, enlargement/reduction
copy, photo mode and department control
*Optional original size detection sensor is needed for 220-240 V specifications.
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9 A
220 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 2.8 A
Power consumption ........................ 1080 W (120V)
1080W (220 240V)
Options ........................................... STDF, drawer, job separator, original cover*, key counter, memory board,
printer network board
*Standard for Asia and Oceania specifications.
**Optional for 120 V specifications only.
1-1-2
2AV/X
20 cpm copier
Type ............................................... Desktop
Copying system .............................. Indirect electrostatic system
Originals ......................................... Sheets and books
Maximum size: A3/11" 17"
Original feed system ...................... Fixed
Copy paper ..................................... Drawer: Plain paper (64 80 g/m2)
Bypass table: Plain paper (60 160 g/m2)
Special paper: Transparencies, tracing paper, colored paper, letterhead
and envelopes (when using the printer function only)
Note: Use the bypass table for special paper.
Copying sizes ................................. Maximum: A3/11" 17"
Minimum: A6R /51/2" 81/2"/Folio (When the bypass table is used)
Magnification ratios ........................ Manual mode: 50 200%, 1% increments
Auto copy mode: fixed ratios
Metric
1:1 1.0%, 1:2.00/1:1.41/1:1.27/1:1.06/1:0.90/1:0.75/1:0.70/1:0.50
Inch
1:1 1.0%, 1:2.00/1:1.54/1:1.29/1:1.21/1:0.78/1:0.77/1:0.64/1:0.50
Copy speed .................................... At 100% magnification in memory copy mode:
A4: 20 copies/min.
A4R: 13 copies/min.
A3: 10 copies/min.
B5: 20 copies/min.
B5R: 13 copies/min.
B4 (257 364 mm): 11 copies/min.
11" 81/2": 20 copies/min.
81/2" 11": 13 copies/min.
11" 17": 10 copies/min.
81/2" 14": 11 copies/min.
First copy time ................................ From 5 to 6 s (A4/11" 81/2", 100% magnification, upper drawer, ejection to the eject
tray)
Warm-up time ................................. 30 s or less (room temperature 20C/68F, 65% RH)
[priorty to power save]
[priorty to recovery]
Paper feed system ......................... Automatic feed
Capacity:
Drawers: 250 sheets
Manual feed
Capacity:
Bypass: 50 sheets (A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B6R, A6R, 11" 81/2", 81/2" 11", 51/2"
8 1/2")
25 sheets (A3, B4, Folio, 11" 17", 81/2" 14")
Continuous copying ........................ 1 250 sheets
Photoconductor .............................. OPC (drum diameter 30 mm)
Charging system ............................ Single positive corona charging
Exposure light source ..................... Semiconductor laser
Exposure scanning system ............ Polygon mirror
Developing system ......................... Dry, reverse developing (magnetic brush)
Developer: 2-component, ferrite carrier and N29T black toner
Toner density control: toner sensor
Toner replenishing: automatic from a toner cartridge
Transfer system ............................. Transfer roller
Fixing system ................................. Heat roller
Heat source: halogen heaters (850 W for 120 V specifications, 910 W for 230-240 V
specifications)
Control temperature: 180C/356F (at normal ambient temperature)
Abnormally high temperature protection device: 140C/284F thermostat
Fixing pressure: 49 N
Charge erasing system .................. Exposure by cleaning lamp
1-1-3
2AV/X
Cleaning system ............................. Cleaning blade
Scanning system ............................ Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor
Bit map memory ............................. 17.1 MB (standard)
Image storage memory .................. 46.9 MB (standard)
Resolution ...................................... 600 600 dpi
Light source .................................... Inert gas lamp
215/8" (W) 233/4" (D) 2113/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 46.4 kg/102 lbs
Floor requirements ......................... 891 (W) 603 (D) mm
351/6" (W) 233/4" (D)
Functions ........................................ Self-diagnostics, preheat, automatic copy density control, original size detection,
automatic paper selection, automatic magnification selection, enlargement/reduction
copy, fixed ratio selection, photo mode, margin copy, split copy, border erasing,
combine copy, sort copy, department control and language selection
Power source ................................. 120 V AC, 60 Hz, 9 A
220 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 2.8 A
Power consumption ........................ 1080 W (120V)
1080W (220 240V)
Options ........................................... STDF, SRDF, drawer, duplex unit, job separator, original cover, finisher, key counter,
printer network board, fax unit, network scanner
*Optional for 120 V specifications only.
1-1-4
2AV/X
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

(1) Copier
&
Figure 1-1-1
1 Original cover (optional)*1

2 Operation panel
3 Paper conveying unit
4 Multi-Bypass
5 Insert guides
6 Support tray
7 Toner cartridge
8 Toner cartridge release lever
9 Waste toner tank
0 Waste toner tank release lever
! Cleaning shaft
@ Front cover
# Main switch
$ Copy store section
% Ejection section
^ Upper drawer
& Lower drawer*2
* Platen
( Original size scales
) Length adjustment plate
Width adjustment lever
Drawer lift
Handles for transport
Lower drawer left cover*2
*1: Standard for Asia and Oceania specifications
for the 15 cpm copier.
*2: Optional for 15 cpm copier.
1-1-5
2AV/X
(2) Operation panel
15 cpm copier
Metric
)( %
* &
^ $%
$# !0
6 54
Inch
)( %
^ $%
$# !0
6 54
* &
Figure 1-1-2
1 Start key (Indicator)
2 Stop/Clear key
3 Numeric keys
4 Reset key
5 Interrupt key (Indicator)
6 Energy Saver (preheat) key (Indicator)
7 Manual/Enter key
8 Copy quantity/magnification display
9 Zoom (+) key
0 Zoom (-) key
! Auto mode selection key/APS/AMS indicators
@ Recall key
# Paper Select key
$ Drawer select indicators
% Misfeed location indicators
^ Paper size indicators
& Original key
* Original size indicators
( Misfeed indicator
) Add Paper indicator
1-1-6
Add Toner indicator

Toner Disposal indicator
Maintenance indicator
Memory Overflow/Data Error indicator
Copy exposure adjustment keys
Copy exposure indicators
Image mode selection key/Auto Exposure/Text
& Photo/Photo/Text indicators
Auto Selection key (Indicator)
Layout key/2 in 1 indicator/4 in 1 indicator
Margin key (Indicator)
Border Erase key (Indicator)
Transparency key (Indicator)
Book Erase key (Indicator)
Sort key (Indicator)
Printer key
Data On-line indicator
2AV/X
20 cpm copier
Metric
* %
( $
^&
4 3 2
Inch
* %
( $
^&
4 3 2
Figure 1-1-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
Start key (Indicator)

Reset key
Interrupt key (Indicator)
Energy Saver (preheat) key (Indicator)
Stop/Clear key
Numeric keys
Message display
Enter key
Paper Select/Cursor up key
Original/Cursor down key
Manual/Cursor right key
Cursor left key
Machine Error indicator
Data indicator
Zoom (+) key
Zoom () key
Preset R/E key
* On-line/Printer key (Indicator)

( Layout key (Indicator)
) Copy exposure adjustment keys/Copy
exposure indicators
Scanner key (Indicator)
Duplex/Split Page key (Indicator)
*/Language key
Margin/Border Erase/Book Erase key
(Indicator)
Copy quality selection key/Auto Exposure/Text
& Photo/Photo/Text indicators
Sort mode key/Staple Sort/Sort/Group
indicators
Auto Selection key (Indicator)
1-1-7
2AV/X
1-1-3 Machine cross section
2
1
Light path
Paper path
Figure 1-1-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1-1-8
Machine cross section
Paper feed section

Main charging section
Optical section
Developing section
Transfer and paper conveying section
Cleaning section
Charge erasing section
Fixing section
2AV/X
1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system 1 (optical section)
3
4
6
1
2
As viewed from machine front

Figure 1-1-5
1
2
3
4
Scanner motor gear

Gear 44/16
Gear 26
Scanner wire drum
5
6
7
8
Scanner wire
Scanner wire pulley
Scanner wire pulley
Scanner wire pulley
1-1-9
2AV/X
(2) Drive system 2 (drive motor drive train)
&
1
7
6
*
(
)
9
^
!
#
As viewed from machine rear
Figure 1-1-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
Drive motor gear

Gear 58/30
Gear 48/27
Gear 60
Drum gear
Transfer roller gear
Gear 52/30
Gear 32/16
Gear 32/16
Gear 20
Gear 20
Gear 20
Idle gear 16
Bypass paper feed clutch gear
Gear 16
^
&
*
(
)
Upper paper feed clutch gear

Gear 30
Gear 26/14
Gear 20
Registration clutch gear
Gear 15
Gear 18
Gear 20
Gear 34/23
Gear 24
Gear 15
Spiral gear 17
Blade thrust gear 21
Gear 16
Idle gear
Gear 19
Gear 23
Gear 23
Gear 29
Fixing gear 19
Heat roller gear 35
Idle gear
Gear 21
Drawer drive motor gear*
Gear 16/52*
Gear 18*
Gear 18*
Lower paper feed clutch gear*
* Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 20 cpm copier.
1-1-10
2AV/X
1-2-1 Drum
Note the following when handling or storing the drum.
When removing the image formation unit, never expose the drum surface to strong direct light.
Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 20C/4F and 40C/104F and at a relative humidity not higher
than 85% RH. Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object. Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
If the machine is left open for more than 5 minutes for maintenance, remove the drum and store it in the drum storage
bag (Part No. 78369020).
1-2-2 Developer and toner

Store the developer and toner in a cool, dark place. Avoid direct light and high humidity.
1-2-3 Installation environment

1. Temperature: 10 - 35C/50 - 95F
2. Humidity: 15 - 85%RH
3. Power supply: 120 V AC, 9 A
220 - 240 V AC, 2.8 A
4. Power source frequency: 50 Hz 0.3%/60 Hz 0.3%
5. Installation location
Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting. Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other
strong light when removing paper jams.
Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity, abrupt ambient temperature changes, and hot or cold air directed onto
the machine.
Avoid dust and vibration.
Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine.
Place the machine on a level surface (maximum allowance inclination: 1 ).
Avoid air-borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor, such as
mercury, acidic of alkaline vapors, inorganic gasses, NOx, SOx gases and chlorine-based organic solvents.
Select a room with good ventilation.
6. Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine.
Machine front: 1000 mm/393/8" Machine rear: 100 mm/4"
Machine right: 700 mm/275/8" Machine left: 600 mm/235/8"
15 cpm copier
a: 576 mm/2211/16"
b: 873 mm/343/8"
c: 555 mm/21"
d: 718 mm/281/4"
e: 560 mm/221/16"
f: 1183 mm/469/16"
g: 418 mm/77/16"
d
c
f
Figure 1-2-1a Installation dimensions
1-2-1
1-2
2AV/X
20 cpm copier
a: 675 mm/269/16"
b: 873 mm/343/8"
c: 555 mm/21"
d: 718 mm/281/4"
e: 603 mm/233/4"
f: 1218 mm/469/16"
g: 418 mm/167/16"
h: 951 mm/377/16"
1-2
e
h
d
c
f
Figure 1-2-1b Installation dimensions
1-2-2
2AV/X
1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

(1) Installation procedure
Start
1-3
Unpack.
Remove the tapes.

Adjust the fixing pressure.
Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
Connect the power cord.
Install the optional devices.
Carry out initial developer setting
(maintenance item U130).
Remove the image formation unit.
Load paper.
Load developer.
Output an own-status report
(maintenance item U000).
Release the cleaning blade.
Exit maintenance mode.
Install a waste toner tank.
Install a toner cartridge.
Make test copies.
Completion of the machine installation.
1-3-1
2AV/X
Light source unit 1 pins
Light source unit 2 pin
1-3
*The diagram shows the 20 cpm copier.

*The original cover is standard for Asia and Oceania specifications for the 15 cpm copier only.
Figure 1-3-1
1-3-2
2AV/X
Unpack.
15 cpm copier
9
4
1-3
%&
0
#
^
8
*(
$
Figure 1-3-2a Unpacking
1 Copier
2 Outer case
3 Inner frame
4 Upper pads
5 Bottom pads
6 Bottom case
7 Skid
8 Bottom plate
9 Spacer*1
0 Machine cover
! Original cover*2
@ Plastic bag*2
# Bar code labels

$ Hinge joint
% Instruction handbook
^ Plastic bag
& Business reply mail*3
* Drawer spacers
( Drawer claw spacers
) Power cord
*1: 230 V specifications only.
*2: Asia and Oceania specifications
only.
1-3-3
2AV/X
20 cpm copier
8
@$
1-3
9
1
*
0
#
&
%^
7
5
Figure 1-3-2b Unpacking

1 Copier
2 Outer case
3 Inner frame
4 Upper pads
5 Bottom pads
6 Bottom case
7 Skid
8 Spacer*1
9 Machine cover
0 Bar code labels
! Hinge joint
1-3-4
@ Instruction handbook
# Plastic bag
$ Business reply mail*2
% Drawer spacers
^ Drawer claw spacers
& Rear cover spacer
* Power cord
2AV/X
Remove the tapes.
1. Remove the tape holding the front cover and the
power cord, and remove the tape binding the
power cord.
2. Remove the tape holding the drawer.
3. Remove the two tapes holding the paper
conveying unit and bypass tray.
4. Remove the three tapes holding the pins for light
source units 1 and 2.
5. Remove the tape holding the rear cover spacer
and then the spacer.*
*20 cpm copier only.
1-3
Power cord
Front cover
Light source
Rear cover spacer* unit 2 pin
Bypass tray
Drawer
Paper conveying unit
Figure 1-3-3
6. Remove the tape covering the original detection

switch.
Original detection switch
Figure 1-3-4
1-3-5
2AV/X
7. Pull the drawer out and remove the tape holding
each of the drawer spacers and then the spacers.
8. Remove the tape holding the fulcrum of the
drawer lift inside the drawer.
Fulcrum of the drawer lift
1-3
Drawer spacers
Figure 1-3-5
Rear cursor
9. Remove the tape holding each of the front and

rear cursors.
Front cursor
Figure 1-3-6
10. Remove the tape holding each of the drawer claw

spacers and then the spacers.
Drawer claw spacers
Figure 1-3-7
11. Refit the drawer.
1-3-6
2AV/X
Remove the pins holding light source units 1 and 2.
1. Remove the two pins for light source unit 1 and
the pin for light source unit 2.
1-3
Light source unit 2 pin
Figure 1-3-8
Install optional devices.

1. Install the optional devices (STDF, SRDF*1,
drawer/s, job separator, duplex unit*1, finisher*1
and/or original cover*2) as necessary (see the
respective installation manuals or service
manuals).
*1: Optional for 20 cpm copier only.
*2: Standard for Asia and Oceania specifications
of the 15 cpm copier.
Remove the image formation unit.
1. Open the front cover, bypass tray and the paper
conveying unit.
2. Remove the two screws. While pressing the hook
on the front image formation cover, pull the image
formation unit out.
Hook
Screws
Image formation unit
Figure 1-3-9
1-3-7
2AV/X
Load developer.
1. Remove the developing unit upper cover by
pushing and lifting it in the direction of the arrow
in the diagram.
Caution: Be sure to place the image formation
unit on a level surface when loading developer.
Developing unit
upper cover
1-3
Figure 1-3-10
2. Shake the developer bottle well to agitate the
developer.
3. While turning the magnet roller gear in the
direction of the arrow in the diagram, uniformly
pour developer into the image formation unit.
Caution: Never turn the magnet roller gear in the
reverse direction.
Magnet roller gear
Developer
Figure 1-3-11
4. Refit the developing unit upper cover.
Tapes
Release the cleaning blade.

1. Remove the tape holding each of the two
cleaning blade release levers. Apply the cleaning
blade to the drum by gently pushing the cleaning
blade release levers in the direction of the arrows
in the diagram using a screwdriver.
The cleaning blade comes into contact with the
drum.
Screwdriver
Cleaning blade
release lever
Figure 1-3-12
1-3-8
2AV/X
2. Check that the cleaning shaft is inserted as far as
it will go.
3. Refit the image formation unit using the two
screws.
4. Connect the 12-pin connector.
12-pin connector
1-3
Figure 1-3-13
Install a waste toner tank.
Waste toner tank

release lever
1.While holding the waste toner tank release lever

up, fit the waste toner tank in the copier.
Waste toner tank
2. Close the front cover.
Figure 1-3-14
Adjust the fixing pressure.
1. Remove the two blue screws.

2. Close the paper conveying unit and the bypass
tray.
Blue screws
Figure 1-3-15
1-3-9
2AV/X
Connect the power cord.
1. Connect the power cord to the connector on the copier.
2. Insert the power plug into the wall outlet.
Carry out initial developer setting (maintenance item U130).
1-3
1. Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys.
2. Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
3. Press the start key to execute the maintenance item.
The drive stops within approximately 4 minutes and the toner feed start level and toner sensor control voltage are
automatically set.
On the 20 cpm copier, the settings are displayed on the message display.
Display example
INPUT: 135 (Toner sensor output value)
CONTROL: 181 (Toner sensor control voltage)
TARGET: 138 (Toner feed start level)
HUMID: 57 (Absolute humidity)
On the 15 cpm copier, each time the copy exposure adjustment keys are pressed, the settings for INPUT,
CONTROL, TARGET and HUMID are displayed on the copy quantity/magnification display in the order presented.
4. Press the stop/clear key.
Load paper.
1. Load paper in the drawer.
Caution: Loading paper before turning the main switch on may cause paper jams.
Output an own-status report (maintenance item U000).

1. Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key.
2. Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items
(20 cpm copier).
Select d-L and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items (15 cpm
copier).
3. Press the stop/clear key.
1. Enter "001" using the numeric keys and press the start key.
The machine exits the maintenance mode.
1-3-10
2AV/X
Install a toner cartridge.
1. Open the front cover.
2. Shift the toner cartridge release lever to the right
until it stops.
Toner cartridge release lever
1-3
Figure 1-3-16
3. Tap the toner cartridge on the top five or six times
and shake it horizontally eight to ten times to
agitate the toner.
Figure 1-3-17
4. Align the arrows on the top of the toner cartridge
with the cutouts in the eject tray and then insert
the cartridge into the copier.
5. Secure the toner cartridge by shifting the toner
cartridge release lever to the left until it stops.
Cutouts
Toner cartridge
6. Close the front cover.

Figure 1-3-18
1-3-11
2AV/X
Make test copies.
1. Place an original and make test copies.
Check if the center lines of the bypass tray and
drawer are correct. If not, adjust the center lines.
Completion of machine installation.
1-3
1-3-12
2AV/X
1-3-2 Setting initial copy modes

Factory settings are as follows:
Maintenance item
No.
U253
U254
U255
U256
U258
U260
U343
U342
U344
U348
Factory setting
Contents
Switching between double and single counts
Turning auto start function on/off
Setting auto clear time
Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
Switching copy operation at toner empty
detection
Changing the copy count timing
Switching between duplex/simplex copy mode
(20 cpm copier only)
Setting the ejection restriction
Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Setting the copy density adjustment range
Metric
Inch
Double count
On
90 s
On
Single mode,
70 sheets
After ejection
Simplex copy
Double count
On
90 s
On
Single mode,
70 sheets
After ejection
Simplex copy
On
Energy star
Special area
On
Energy star
Special area
1-3
1-3-13
2AV/X
1-3-3 Copier management

In addition to a maintenance function for service, the copier is equipped with a management function which can be operated
by users (mainly by the copier administrator). In this copier management mode, settings such as default settings can be
changed.
(1) Using the copier management mode (15 cpm copier)
1-3
Executing a department management item
Executing a default setting item
Start
Start
Press both of the copy

exposure adjustment keys
and numeric key * for 3 s.
Press both of the copy exposure adjustment keys for 3 s.
Select an item using the zoom

+/ keys or numeric keys.
Select an item using the zoom

+/ keys or numeric keys.
Press the enter key.
Press the enter key.
Execute the department

management item
(page 1-3-15).
Execute the default

setting item (page 1-3-15).
Select d00 and

press the enter key.
Select F00 and

End
1-3-14
2AV/X
(2) Setting department management items
Turning department management on/off
Clearing copy counts
1. Select d01 and press the enter key.

2. Select copy management on or copy
management off and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 (copy management on)/
2 (copy management off)

2. Select clear or do not clear and press the
enter key.
Setting range: 1 (clear)/2 (do not clear)
Printing management list
Registering a new department code

2. Enter a department code* using the numeric
keys and press the enter key.
* 4 digits for metric specifications and 7 digits
for inch specifications.
Deleting a department code
2. Enter the department code to be deleted using
the numeric keys and press the enter key.

If A4/11" 81/2" paper is present, the list is
automatically printed out. Otherwise, select
the paper source and press the start key.
Printer department management setting
Note: This setting item will only be displayed when
the optional printer board is installed and the
department management is turned on.
(3) Copy default

User status report
Text original exposure adjustment
Prints the details of the default settings.

1. Select F01 and press the enter key.
Adjusts the exposure to be used when text original

is selected for the image mode.
2. Select the setting and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 to 7
Exposure mode
Photo original exposure adjustment
Selects the image mode at power-on.

2. Select the exposure mode and press the enter
key.
Exposure mode: 1 (auto exposure)/
2 (text & photo)/3 (photo)/4 (text)
Adjusts the exposure to be used when photo

original is selected for the image mode.
Paper selection
Exposure steps
Sets the number of exposure steps for the manual
exposure mode.
2. Select 5 steps or 9 steps and press the
enter key.
Setting range: 1 (5 steps)/2 (9 steps)
Sets whether the same sized paper as the original

to be copied is automatically selected.
2. Select auto or manual and press the enter
key.
Setting range: 1 (auto)/2 (manual)
AMS mode
Auto exposure adjustment

Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.
Text and photo original exposure adjustment
Adjusts the exposure to be used when text and
photo original is selected for the image mode.
Selects whether auto magnification selection or

100% magnification is to be given priority when the
sizes of the original and copy paper are different.
2. Select auto magnification selection or same
size and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 (auto magnification selection)/
2 (same size)
1-3-15
1-3
2AV/X
Default drawer
Copy limit
Sets the drawer to be selected in cases such as

after the reset key is pressed.
2. Select the default drawer and press the enter
key.
Default drawer: 1 (drawer 1)/2 (drawer 2)/
3 (drawer 3)/4 (drawer 4)
Note: This setting item will not be displayed if
no optional drawer is installed.
Sets the number of copies limit for multiple copying.

2. Enter the setting and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 to 250 copies
Automatic drawer switching
1-3
Sets whether the automatic drawer switching

function is available.
2. Select on or off and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 (on)/2 (off)
no optional drawer is installed.
Margin width
Sets the default setting of the margin width for the
margin copying.
Setting range: Metric
1 to 18 mm
Inch
1 (1/4")/2 (3/8")/3 (1/2")/4 (5/8")/5 (3/4")
the optional memory board is not installed.
Border erase width
Bypass tray paper size

Sets the paper size for the bypass tray so that it will
be automatically selected.
2. Select the paper size for the bypass tray and
Paper size: 1 (A3/11" 17")/2 (A4 vertical/
81/2" 14")/3 (A4/81/2" 11")/
4 (B4/51/2" 81/2")/5 (B5 vertical/11" 81/2")/
6 (B5/no size setting*)/7 (folio/)/
8 (no size setting*/)
* Setting of non-standard size paper width for
bypass tray
Non-standard size paper width setting for bypass tray
Sets the paper width for the bypass tray to use
non-standard size paper.
Setting range: 100 to 297 mm
Output form
Selects whether or not to perform sort copying
automatically when the DF is used.
2. Select sort on or sort off and press the enter
key.
Setting range: 1 (sort on)/2 (sort off)
Rotate sort
Sets whether or not to perform rotate sorting when
the sort mode is selected.
1-3-16
Sets the default setting of the border erase width

for the border erase mode.
Setting range: 1 (6 mm/1/4")/2 (12 mm/1/2")/
3 (18 mm/3/4")
Layout (4 in 1)
Sets whether to place the originals vertically or
horizontally for 4 in 1 layout copying.
2. Select vertical (Z) or horizontal (N) and
Setting range: 1 (vertical [Z])/2 (horizontal [N])
Layout (borderline)
Selects the type of borderline for layout copying.
Setting range: 1 (none)/2 (solid line)/3 (dotted
line)
Transparency mode
Selects the paper type for copying onto transparencies or thick paper using the bypass tray.
2. Select transparencies or thick paper and
Setting range: 1 (transparencies)/
2 (thick paper)
2AV/X
Silent mode
Auto preheat time
Selects whether or not to enter silent mode after

copying.
Sets the auto preheat time.

Setting range: 5 to 45 minutes (in 5-minute
increments)
1 (5 min)/2 (10 min)/3 (15 min)/4 (20 min)/
5 (25 min)/6 (30 min)/7 (35 min)/8 (40 min)/
9 45 min)
Note: Set the auto preheat time to be shorter
than the auto shutoff time.
Copy eject location setting

Selects whether to eject copies to the internal eject
tray or job separator.
2. Select the copy eject location and press the
enter key.
Setting range: 1 (internal eject tray)/
2 (job separator)
the optional job separator is not installed.
Auto shutoff
Sets whether the auto shutoff function is available.
Auto shutoff time

Sets the auto shutoff time.
increments)
1 (15 min)/2 (30 min)/3 (45 min)/4 (60 min)/
5 (75 min)/6 (90 min)/7 (105 min)/8 (120 min)/
9 (135 min)/10 (150 min)/11 (165 min)/
12 (180 min)/13 (195 min)/14 (210 min)/
15 (225 min)/16 (240 min)
Toner counter report
Prints the report on the toner consumption ratio.
1-3-17
1-3
2AV/X
(4) Using the copier management mode (20 cpm copier)
Start
Press
the */language key.
Select Management and
Enter the
management code.
Execute department management items (page 1-3-19).
1-3
Select End and
Select Copy default and
Enter the
management code.
Make copy default settings

(page 1-3-19).
Select End and

Select Machine default and
Enter the
management code.
Make machine default settings

(page 1-3-20).
Select End and
Select Language and

Set the language (page 1-3-21).
End
1-3-18
2AV/X
(5) Setting department management items
Registering a new department code
Clearing copy counts
Sets a department code and the limit of the

number of copies for that department.
1. Select Management Setting (COPY MGMT
SETTING) and press the enter key.
2. Select Register and press the enter key.
3. Enter a department code* using the numeric
keys and press the enter key.
* 4 digits for metric specifications and 7 digits
for inch specifications.
4. Select Copy limit. Enter the number of copies
limit using the numeric keys and press the
enter key.

2. Select Count delete (COUNTS CLEAR)
and press the enter key.
3. Select Yes or No and press the enter key.
Deleting a department code

2. Select Code delete and press the enter key.
3. Select the department code to be deleted and
4. Select Yes or No and press the enter key.
Altering the copy limit
2. Select Copy limit correction and press the
enter key.
3. Select the department code to be altered and
4. Enter the new number of copies limit using the
numeric keys.
Viewing copy counts

1. Select Reference and press the enter key.
2. Select All Department total (TOTAL: ALL IDCODES) and press the enter key.
3. View copy counts using the cursor up/down
keys.
Print management list
1. Select Printer management list (PRINT
MANAGEMENT LIST) and press the enter
key.
Turning department management on/off
1. Select Management on/off (COPY MANAGEMENT ON/OFF) and press the enter key.
2. Select On or Off and press the enter key.
Turning printer department management on/off
Note: This setting item will not be displayed if the
optional printer board is not installed.
Turning printer error report function on/off
Note: This setting item will not be displayed if the
optional printer board is not installed.
(6) Copy default

Exposure mode
Auto exposure adjustment
Selects the image mode at power-on.

1. Select Exposure mode and press the enter
key.
2. Select the exposure mode and press the enter
key.
Exposure mode: Auto mode/Mixed mode/Photo
mode/Text mode
Adjusts the exposure for the auto exposure mode.

1. Select Auto exposure adjustment (AUTO
EXP. LEVEL ADJUST) and press the enter
key.
Mixed original density
Exposure steps
Sets the number of exposure steps for the manual
exposure mode.
1. Select Exposure steps and press the enter
key.
2. Select 5 steps or 9 steps and press the
enter key.
Adjusts the exposure to be used when text and

photo original is selected for the image mode.
1. Select Mixed original density set and press
the enter key.
1-3-19
1-3
2AV/X
Photo original density
Border erase width
Adjusts the exposure to be used when photo

original is selected for the image mode.
1. Select Photo original density set and press
the enter key.
Sets the default setting of the border erase width

for the border erase mode.
1. Select Border Erase Width and press the
enter key.
6/12/18 mm
Inch
1/4"/1/2"/3/4"
Text original exposure adjustment
1-3
Adjusts the exposure to be used when text original

is selected for the image mode.
1. Select Text original density set and press the
enter key.
Paper selection
Sets whether the same sized paper as the original
to be copied is automatically selected.
1. Select Paper selection and press the enter key.
2. Select Auto or Manual and press the enter
key.
AMS mode
Selects whether auto magnification selection or
100% magnification is to be given priority when the
sizes of the original and copy paper are different.
1. Select AMS mode and press the enter key.
2. Select AMS or 100% and press the enter key.
Copy limit
Sets the number of copies limit for multiple copying.
1. Select Copy limit and press the enter key.
Setting range: 1 to 250 copies
Margin width
Sets the default setting of the margin width for the
margin copying.
1. Select Margin width and press the enter key.
1 to 18 mm
Inch
1/4" to 3/4" (in 1/8" increments)
Default drawer
Sets the drawer to be selected in cases such as
after the reset key is pressed.
1. Select Default drawer and press the enter
key.
2. Select the default drawer and press the enter
key.
Default drawer: 1st pap. (SOURCE 1)/2nd
pap. (SOURCE 2)/3rd pap. (SOURCE 3)/4th
pap. (SOURCE 4)
Note: 3rd pap. (SOURCE 3) and 4th pap.
(SOURCE 4) are displayed only when the
optional drawer is installed.
Output form
Selects whether or not to perform sort copying
automatically when the DF is used.
1. Select Output form and press the enter key.
2. Select Sort: ON or Sort: OFF and press the
enter key.
Note: If the DF is not installed, this setting item
will be displayed but ineffective.
Rotate sort
Sets whether or not to perform rotate sort copying
when the sort mode is selected.
1. Select Rotate sort and press the enter key.
the optional finisher is installed.
(7) Machine default

Status report
Special paper
Prints the details of the default settings.

1. Select Status report and press the enter key.
If special paper such as colored paper and

recycled paper is loaded, a sign (*) indicating
special paper can be shown beside the paper size
for the drawer that contains special paper.
1. Select Special paper and press the enter key.
2. Select the paper source and press the enter key.
Paper source: 1st pap. (SOURCE 1)/2nd pap.
(SOURCE 2)/3rd pap. (SOURCE 3)/4th pap.
(SOURCE 4)
Note: 3rd pap. (SOURCE 3) and 4th pap.
(SOURCE 4) are displayed only when the
optional drawer is installed.
Auto shutoff
Sets whether the auto shutoff function is available.
1. Select Auto shut-off and press the enter key.
1-3-20
2AV/X
APS for special paper
Auto shutoff time
Sets whether to use the paper source with the

special paper for auto paper selection and auto
drawer switching.
1. Select APS for special paper and press the
enter key.
Sets the auto shutoff time.

1. Select Auto shut-off time and press the enter
key.
increments)
Paper type (1st to 4th)
Display contrast adjustment
Selects the type of paper to be loaded in the

drawers.
1. Select Paper type (1st to 4th) and press the
enter key.
2. Select the paper type and press the enter key.
Paper type: Plain/Recycled/Letterhead/Color
Note: 3rd and 4th are displayed only when
the optional drawer is installed.
Adjusts the contrast of the LCD.

1. Select Display contrast adjustment (DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUST.) and press the
enter key.
Paper type (bypass)

Selects the type of paper to be loaded in the
bypass tray.
1. Select Paper type (bypass) and press the
enter key.
2. Select the paper type and press the enter key.
Paper type: Plain/Transparency/Labels/Recycled/Rough/Letterhead/Color/Envelope/Cardstock
Copy eject location setting
Selects whether to eject copies to the internal eject
tray, finisher or job separator.
1. Select Select copy eject mode (SELECT
EJECTOR OF COPY) and press the enter
key.
2. Select the eject location and press the enter
key.
Copy eject location: Copier/Finisher/Job separator
neither the optional finisher nor job separator
is installed.
Auto preheat time
Sets the auto preheat time.
1. Select Auto preheat time and press the enter
key.
increments)
Note: Set the auto preheat time to be shorter
than the auto shutoff time.
Management code change

Changes the management code.
1. Select Management code change and press
the enter key.
2. Enter the 4-digit management code using the
numeric keys and press the enter key.
Silent mode
Selects whether or not to enter silent mode after
copying.
1. Select Silent Mode and press the enter key.
Auto drawer switching
Sets whether the auto drawer switching function is
available.
1. Select Automatic drawer switching and press
the enter key.
Counter report
Prints the report on the toner consumption ratio.
1. Select Counter report and press the enter
key.
(8) Language
Switches the language to be displayed on the
touch screen.
1. Select Language and press the enter key.
2. Select the display language and press the
enter key.
1-3-21
1-3
2AV/X
1-3-4 Installing the key counter (option)
1-3
Key counter installation requires the following parts:

Key counter set (P/N 2A369702)
Contents of the set:
Key counter cover (P/N 2A360010)
Key counter retainer (P/N 66060030)
Key counter cover retainer (P/N 66060022)
Key counter mount (P/N 66060040)
Key counter socket assembly (P/N 41529210)
One (1) M3 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080)
Four (4) M4 6 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304060)
Two (2) M4 10 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304100)
One (1) M4 20 bronze TP-A screws (P/N B4304200)
One (1) M4 6 chrome TP-A screw (P/N B4104060)
Two (2) M3 6 bronze flat-head screws (P/N B2303060)
One (1) M3 bronze nut (P/N C2303000)
Procedure
1. Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key
counter retainer using the two screws and nut.
2. Fit the key counter mount to the key counter
cover using the two screws, and attach the key
counter retainer to the mount using the two
screws.
M4 6 screws
(B4304060)
Key counter retainer (66060030)
Key counter mount (66060040)
M3 nut
(C2303000)
Key counter cover

(2A360010)
M4 6 screws
(B4304060)
Key counter socket
assembly (41529210)
M3 6 flat-head screws (B2303060)
Figure 1-3-19

4. Remove the screw on the front of the internal
eject tray.
5. Remove the five screws. While lifting the
internal eject tray, remove the right cover.
6. Cut out the aperture plate on the right cover
using a pair of nippers.
7. Pass the 4-pin connector inside the copier
through the aperture.
Screws
Right cover
Screw
Front cover
Internal eject tray
Screws
Aperture 4-pin connector
plate
Figure 1-3-20
1-3-22
2AV/X
8. Refit the right cover.
9. Pass the 4-pin connector of the key counter
through the aperture in the key counter cover
retainer, and insert into the 4-pin connector of
the copier.
10. Seat the projection of the key counter cover
retainer in the aperture in the right cover, and
fasten them both to the copier using three
screws.
11. Fit the key counter cover with the key counter
socket assembly inserted to the key counter
cover retainer on the copier using the screw.
Key counter cover retainer

(66060022)
M4 10 screw
(B4304100)
M3 8 screw
(B1303080)
Key counter cover
1-3
4-pin connector
4-pin connector
M4 20 screw
(B4304200)
M4 6 screw
(B4104060)
Figure 1-3-21
12. Insert the key counter into the key counter
socket assembly.
13. Turn the main switch on and enter the maintenance mode.
14. Run maintenance item U204 and set as
follows:
15 cpm: C-2
20 cpm: Key counter
15. Exit the maintenance mode.
16. Check that the indication given below is
displayed on the operation panel when the key
counter is pulled out.
15 cpm: U1
20 cpm: Insert key counter.
17. Check that the counter counts up as copies
are made.
1-3-23
2AV/X
1-3-5 Installing the original size detection sensor (option for the metric specifications of
the 15 cpm copier only)
Original size detection sensor installation requires the following parts:
Original size detection sensor (P/N 35927290)
One (1) M3 8 bronze binding screw (P/N B1303080)
Procedure
1. Remove the original cover or the DF.
2. Remove the five screws holding the right
cover. While shifting the right cover in the direction of the arrow in the diagram, remove the
contact glass.
Contact glass
1-3
Right cover
Figure 1-3-22
3. Remove the eight screws holding the ISU
cover and then the cover.
ISU cover
Figure 1-3-23
4. Fit the original size detection sensor using the
screw.
5. Connect the 3-pin connector that was contained inside the ISU cover to the original size
detection sensor.
6. Refit all the removed parts.
7. Turn the main switch on and enter maintenance mode.
8. Run maintenance item U075 and select On.
9. Exit maintenance mode.
10. Check that the automatic original size detection is performed correctly.
Original size
detection sensor
M3 8 screw (B1303080)
3-pin connector
Figure 1-3-24
1-3-24
2AV/X
1-3-6 Installing the drawer heater (option)

Drawer heater installation requires the following parts:
For 120 V specifications
Drawer heater set (P/N 3A569710)
Contents of the set
One (1) BVM4 4 bronze binding screw (P/N B1304040)
Two (2) BVM4 6 bronze binding screws (P/N B1304060)
Clamp (P/N M2105030)
Band (P/N M2607010)
High temperature caution sticker (P/N 20305130)
Drawer heater wire (P/N 3A568010)
Drawer heater (P/N 34860030)
For 220-240 V specifications
Drawer heater set (P/N 3A569720)
Contents of the set
One (1) BVM4 4 bronze binding screw (P/N B1304040)
Two (2) BVM4 6 bronze binding screws (P/N B1304060)
Clamp (P/N M2105030)
Band (P/N M2607010)
High temperature caution sticker (P/N 20305130)
Drawer heater wire (P/N 3A568010)
Drawer heater (P/N 34860020)
1-31-3
BVM4 4 screw
Clamp
Procedure
1. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover of the
optional drawer and then the cover.
2. Pull the drawer out.
3. Pass the connector of the drawer heater through the
cable hole in the rear base and fit the drawer heater
using the two BVM4 06 bronze binding screws.
4. Fasten the drawer heater cable with the clamp using
the BVM4 04 bronze binding screw.
5. Affix the high temperature caution sticker.
BVM4 6 screws
High temperature
caution sticker
Figure 1-3-25
6. Fold the cable that was passed through the cable
hole in three and tidy it up using the band.
Band
Figure 1-3-26
1-3-25
2AV/X
7. Insert one of the 2-pin receptacles on the heater wire
into the opening in the frame and connect the other
2-pin receptacle to the drawer heater cable.
2-pin receptacle
1-3
Opening
2-pin receptacle
Figure 1-3-27
8. Refit the drawer.
9. Install the optional drawer to the copier.
10. Remove the jumper connector from the heater wire
on the copier or the above optional drawer and
connect the 2-pin connector on the heater wire in its
place.
2-pin
connector
Figure 1-3-28
11. Refit the rear cover of the optional drawer.
1-3-26
2AV/X
1-4-1 Maintenance mode

The copier is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing a maintenance item
Start
Enter 10871087.
Enter the number of the maintenance

item to be executed using the cursor
up/down keys (20 cpm), the zoom +/keys (15 cpm) or numeric keys.
Entering the maintenance mode
Selecting a maintenance item
1-4
Press the start key.
The maintenance item is run.
Press the stop/clear key.
Yes
Run the item again?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance

mode?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor up/down keys
(20 cpm), the zoom +/- keys (15 cpm) or Exiting the maintenance mode
numeric keys, and press the print key.
End
1-4-1
2AV/X
(2) Maintenance mode item list (for 20 cpm copier)
Item
Section
Maintenance item contents
No.
U000 Outputting an own-status report
General
Initialization
Drive, paper
feed, paper
conveying and
cooling system
1-4
Exiting the maintenance mode
U003
Setting the service telephone number
U004
Setting the machine number
U005
Copying without paper
U019
Displaying the ROM version
U020
Initializing all data
U021
Initializing memories
U022
Initializing backup data
U030
U031
Checking motor operation

Checking switches for paper conveying
U032
Checking clutch operation
U033
Checking solenoid operation
U034
Adjusting the print start timing

Adjusting leading edge registration
Adjusting the center line
0
0
U051
High voltage
Setting folio size

Length
Width
Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
At the registration roller
At the paper feed roller
***************
0
330
210
0
0
U053
Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

Drive motor/Polygon motor/Feedshift motor
U060
Adjusting the scanner input properties
12
U061
Turning the exposure lamp on
U063
Adjusting the shading position
U065
Adjusting the scanner magnification

Main scannning direction/auxiliary scanning direction
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the

contact glass
U067
Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
0
0
U070
Adjusting the DF magnification
U071
Adjusting the DF scanning timing

Adjusting the DF leading edge registration
Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration
0
0
U072
Adjusting the DF center line
U073
Checking scanner operation
U074
Adjusting the DF input light luminosity
U087
U088
Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off

Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)
On
U091
Checking shading
U092
Adjusting the scanner automatically
U093
Setting the exposure density gradient
U099
Checking the original size detection
U100
Setting the surface potential
184
U101
Setting high voltages

Developing bias control voltage during image formation
Developing bias control voltage during no image formation
Transfer control voltage
Transfer voltage output timing
193
38
115
176
U109
Setting the drum type
U110
Checking/clearing the drum count
* Initial setting for executing maintenance item U020
1-4-2
U001
U035
Optical
Initial
setting*
0/0
Off
H type
2AV/X
High voltage
Item
No.
U111
Checking/clearing the drum drive time
Developing
U130
Initial setting for the developer
U131
U132
Setting the toner sensor control voltage

Replenishing toner forcibly
U135
Checking toner feed motor operation
U155
Displaying the toner sensor output
U156
Changing the toner control level

Toner feed start level
Toner empty level
Section
Fixing and
cleaning
U157
Checking/clearing the developing drive time
U158
Checking/clearing the developing count
U161
Setting the fixing control temperature

Primary stabilization fixing temperature
Secondary stabilization fixing temperature
Control temperature during copying
Temperature to be deducted from the control temperature when copying
onto paper with a width of 220 mm or smaller
155
100
44
135
160
180
0
1-4
Stabilizing fixing forcibly
U163
Resetting the fixing problem data
U196
Turning the fixing heater on
Checking the fixing temperature
Turning all LEDs on
U199
Image
processing
Initial
setting*
U162
Operation panel U200

and support
U203
equipment
U204
Mode setting
Operating DF separately
Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Off
U207
Checking the operation panel keys
U210
U211
Reversing the LCD

Setting DF type
Off
U240
Checking the operation of finisher motors and solenoids
U241
Checking the finisher switches
U243
Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch
U244
Checking the DF switches (when installing the optional SRDF)

Checking the DF switches (when installing the optional STDF)
U245
Checking messages
U250
Setting the maintenance cycle
U251
Checking/clearing the maintenance count
U252
Setting the destination
Japan
U253
Double
U254
U255
90
U256
On
U258
Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Single/70
U260
U265

Setting the destination specifications
Eject
U330
Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation
100
U332
Setting the size conversion factor
U342
U343
On
Off
U344
U345
Setting the value for maintenance due indication
U348
U402
Adjusting margins of image printing
U403
Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
SRDF
100
On
Energy star
0
Special
1-4-3
2AV/X
Image
Item
No.
U404
Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
processing
U407
Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Others
U901
U903
Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations

Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
U904
Checking/clearing the service call counts
U905
Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
U906
Resetting partial operation control
U908
Changing the total counter value
U910
Clearing the black ratio data
U914
Switching between fax and copier modes
Copier mode
U917
Setting the reading/writing of backup data
Read
U990
Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
U992
Checking or clearing the printer/fax count
U993
Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
U998
Outptting the memory list
Section
1-4
1-4-4
Initial
setting*
2AV/X
(3) Contents of maintenance mode items (for 20 cpm copier)
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items
to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
2. Select the item to be output using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
MAINTENANCE
JAM
SERVICE CALL
Output list
1-4
List of the current settings of the maintenance modes

List of the paper jam occurrences
List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed
location.
When output is complete, the screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
U001

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
1-4-5
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U003
Description
Setting the service telephone number
Description
Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected.
Purpose
To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set telephone number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a telephone number (up to 16 digits) using the numeric keys.
Move the cursor using the cursor left/right keys and select a number or symbol using the cursor up/down
keys.
To enter symbols, press the keys shown below as required.
Key
* key
# key
Auto mode selection key
Image mode selection key
Copy exposure adjustment key (lighter)
Copy exposure adjustment key (darker)
1-4
Symbol
*
#
(
)
(Space)
2. Press the start key. The phone number is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U004

Description
Displays and changes the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric key.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.
2. Press the start key. The machine number is set.
Completion
1-4-6
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U005
Description
Copying without paper
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
PPC
PPC + DF
Operation
Only the copier operates.
Both the copier and SRDF operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.

4. Set the operation conditions required on the copy mode screen. Changes in the following settings can be
made.
Paper feed locations
Magnifications
Simplex or duplex copy mode
Number of copies: continuous copying is performed when set to 250.
Copy density
Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper
present, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
6. Press the start key. The operation starts.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
screen for selecting an item is displayed.
7. To stop continuous operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
No. is displayed.
U019
Displaying the ROM version

Description
Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PCB.
Purpose
To check the part number or to decide if the ROM version is new from the last digit of the number.
Method
Press the start key. The last six digits of the part number indicating the ROM version are displayed.
Display
MAIN
MMI
Description
Main ROM IC
Operation 1 ROM IC
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-7
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U020
Description
Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
Purpose
Used when replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for executing is displayed.
2. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys. It is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for Japan
specifications are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
switch is turned on and the display language to the initial setting of English.
Completion
1-4
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
U021
Initializing memories
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines,
i.e., settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM
according to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting.
Completion
U022

Description
Initializes only the data set for the optical section.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method
2. Select SCANNER using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key.
5. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 099, U403, U404 and U990) is initialized.
Completion
1-4-8
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U030
Description
Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse and the operation starts.
Display
MAIN
Tumiki1
Tumiki2
Tumiki3
DUP (F, L)
DUP (F, H)
DUP (R, L)
DUP (R, H)
Operation
Drive motor turns on and developing bias turns on
Drawer drive motor turns on
Drawer drive motor (ST) 1* turns on
Drawer drive motor (ST) 2* turns on
Feedshift motor* rotates forward at low speed
Feedshift motor* rotates forward at high speed
Feedshift motor* rotates in reverse at low speed
Feedshift motor* rotates in reverse at high speed
1-4
* Optional.
4. To stop operation, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U031
Checking switches for paper conveying

Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
1. Press the start key. A list of the switches, the on-off status of which can be checked, are displayed.
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, that switch is displayed in reverse.
Display
T2
T3
T4
RES
EJE
DUP1
DUP2
JOB
DUP SF
Switches
Drawer feed switch (DFSW)
Drawer feed switch (ST) 1* (DFSW (ST) 1)
Drawer feed switch (ST) 2* (DFSW (ST) 2)
Registration switch (RSW)
Eject switch (ESW)
Duplex paper conveying switch 1* (DUPPCSW1)
Duplex paper conveying switch 2* (DUPPCSW2)
Job separator eject switch* (JBESW)
Duplex open/close switch* (DUPOCSW)
*Optional.
Completion
1-4-9
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U032
Description
Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display
PFHON
PFBYP
T1
T2
T3
RES
1-4
Clutches
Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)
Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L)
Paper feed clutch (ST) 1* (PFCL (ST) 1)
Paper feed clutch (ST) 2* (PFCL (ST) 2)
Registration clutch (RCL)
*Optional.
Completion
U033
Checking solenoid operation

Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
2. Select the solenoid to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected item is displayed in reverse, and the solenoid turns on for 1 s.
Display
BRA_ACT
BRA_RET
MAIN SW
DUP_ACT
DUP_RET
DUP_ACT2
DUP_RET2
Solenoids
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)*1 latch-on
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)*1 release
Main switch turns off
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)*2 latch-on
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)*2 release
Duplex feedshift solenoid (DUPFSSOL)*2 latch-on
Duplex feedshift solenoid (DUPFSSOL)*2 release
*1: Optional finisher.

*2: Optional duplex unit.
Completion
U034

Adjustment
See pages 1-6-10 and 13.
1-4-10
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U035
Description
Setting folio size
Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting
the actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
LENGTH DATA
WIDTH DATA
Setting Setting range

Length
Width
Initial setting
330 to 356 mm 330

200 to 220 mm 210
1-4
3. Press the start key. The value is set.

Completion
U051

Adjustment
See page 1-6-17.
U053
Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
MAIN MOTOR
Drive motor speed adjustment

Polygon motor speed
adjustment
Feedshift motor* speed
adjustment
POLYGON
MOTOR
DUP MOTOR
Setting range Initial setting

5 to +5
5 to +5
5 to +5
* Optional.
MAIN MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it
makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
POLYGON MOTOR
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and
longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
1-4-11
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U053
Description
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy
mode.
Correct values for an A3/11" 17" output are:
A = 300 0.75 mm
B = 260 1.3 mm
B
A
Figure 1-4-1
1-4
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-1), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
No. is displayed.
U060
Adjusting the scanner input properties

Description
Adjusts the image scanning density in text, text and photo, or photo mode.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Method
Setting
Display
ADJ
0 to 23
12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy
mode.
Completion
No. is displayed.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:
Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
1-4-12
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U061
Description
Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
U063

Description
Changes the shading position.
1-4
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned.
This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should
be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for adjustment is displayed.
Description
Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step
Shading position 5 to +5
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U065
Adjusting the scanner magnification

Adjustment
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-36.
U067
Adjustment
See page 1-6-37.
1-4-13
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U070
Description
Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning speed.
Purpose
To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the
optional DF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance
mode.
U053
U065
U070
Method
Setting
1-4
Display
Description
CONVEY SPEED Original conveying motor speed
Setting
range
Initial
setting
25 to +25 0
Change in value
per step
0.1%
Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it makes the image shorter.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
U071
Adjusting the DF scanning timing

Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning timing.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy
image when the optional DF is used.
Caution
mode.
U034
U066
U071
Method
Setting
Display
Description
LEAD EDGE ADJ DF leading edge registration

TRAIL EDGE ADJ DF trailing edge registration
Setting
range
Initial
setting
32 to +32 0
32 to +32 0
Change in value
per step
0.17 mm
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image
forward.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
1-4-14
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U071
Description
Adjustment
1. In interrupt copy mode, make a copy using the DF.
2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting of LEAD EDGE ADJ.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-2
Completion
No. is displayed.
U072
Adjusting the DF center line

Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DF original.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the
Caution
mode.
U034
U067
U072
Method
Setting
Description
DF center line

39 to +39
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it moves the image to the left.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
1-4-15
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U072
Description
Adjustment
2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting.
Reference
Original
1-4
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-3
Completion
U073
Checking scanner operation

Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
2. Select the item to be changed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
ZOOM
SIZE
LAMP
Setting range
Operating conditions
50 to 200%
Magnification
See below.
Paper size
On and off of the exposure lamp 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Paper sizes for each setting in SIZE

Setting
8
9
24
36
39
40
41
Paper size
A4
B5
11" 81/2"
A3
B4
A4R
B5R
Setting
42
47
52
53
55
56
58
Paper size
A5R
Folio
11" 17"
11" 15"
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"
51/2" 81/2"
4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
1-4-16
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U074
Description
Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the optional DF.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass
and when scanning an original from the DF.
Method
Setting
Description
DF input light luminosity
0 to 8
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.
1-4

Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
U087
Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off

Description
Turns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF original scanning position is adjusted
automatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference
data for identifying dust.
Reference
In the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by
comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the
DF original scanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is adjusted for the
following originals.
Purpose
Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slit
glass when the DF is used.
Method
2. Select the item to be set using the cursor up/down keys. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
ON/OFF
DATA
Description
Setting the mode on/off
Setting the reference data for identifying dust

1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
DF scanning position adjust mode on
DF scanning position adjust mode off
Initial setting: ON
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
1-4-17
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U087
Description
Available only when the mode is turned on.
Display
DENSITY
Description
Minimum density to be
regarded as dust
Setting
range
10 to 95
Initial
setting
35
Example
DENSITY: The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray
(0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and
data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan data taken when there is no original).
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
1-4
Completion
No. is displayed.
U088
Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)

Description
Turns moir reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off.
Purpose
Used to prevent regular density unevenness (moir) on halftone image areas of the copy image in text
mode and text and photo mode. Such moir is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy
is made in text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.
Method
Setting
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Moir reduction mode
Normal copy mode
Initial setting: OFF

If moir on the copy image is significant, change the setting to ON. Note that when the moir reduction
mode is turned on, the resolution may be slightly reduced.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-18
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U091
Description
Checking shading
Description
Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the
original scanning values at nine points of the contact glass.
Purpose
To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to
decide the causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical
(shading or CCD) or other problems.
Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method
Display
SHD BEFORE
SHD AFTER
Output list
Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.
Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.
1-4
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.
When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightly
different from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there
should be no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front
and rear indicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.
If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) is
caused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).
If a black line appears, the cause may assumed to be based on the results of the scanning operation
before shading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning
operation after shading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it
may not be possible to use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values
obtained from scanning at the limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.
20 mm from the machine left
011
024
015
001
000
000
004
004
000
100 mm from the machine

center toward machine front
Machine center
100 mm from machine
center toward machine rear
Figure 1-4-4
4. Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting an item is displayed.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for entering a maintenance item is displayed.
1-4-19
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U092
Description
Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2AC68240) on the contact glass.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, each adjusted value is
displayed.
1-4
Display
SCAN CENTER
SCAN TIMING
SUB SCAN
Description
Scanner center line
Scanner leading edge registration
Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, DATA: XX (XX is replaced by an error code) is displayed and
operation stops. Should this happen, determine the details of the problem and either repeat the
procedure from the beginning, or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding
maintenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-20
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U093
Description
Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes
(text, text and photo, photo).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also
used to make copy image darker or lighter.
Start
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The screen for the selected item is displayed.
Display
Description
TEXT
MIXED
PHOTO
Density in text mode

Density in text and photo mode
Density in photo mode
1-4
Setting
1. Select the item to be adjusted using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Adjust the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
Description
DARKER
LIGHTER
Change in density when manual density is set dark

Change in density when manual density is set light
0 to 3
0 to 3
0
0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density
Setting: 3
Setting: 0
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Light
Center
Dark
Density adjustment
Density adjustment range: Normal

Density adjustment range: Special area
Figure 1-4-5 Exposure density gradient

4. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-21
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U099
Description
Checking the original size detection
Description
Displays the original width detection data and sets the original width detection threshold.
Purpose
To check the original width detection. Also to change the original size detection threshold if the size of the
original on the contact glass is detected incorrectly.
Start
2. Select the item.
Display
DATA
B/W LEVEL
Description
Checking the original width detection data
Setting or checking the original width detection threshold
Method to display the original width detection data

1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on. The exposure lamp turns
on and the width of the original is detected. The scanner data taken at the nine points from (1) at the
machine rear to (9) at the machine front is displayed on the message display as follows.
1-4
The data is displayed within the range of 000 to 255, 000 indicating white (original present) and 255
indicating black (no original).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
Figure 1-4-6
Method to set or check the original size detection threshold
1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on. The original size
detection starts and detection data is displayed.
Display
Description
Data
range
Remarks
Initial
setting
LEVEL
Scanner data threshold
0 to 255
Adjustable 170
WAIT TIME
Time between original detection switch turning on

and reading-in of scanner data
0 to 100 ms
Adjustable 50
ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width
0 to 350 mm
SIZE
Original size detected by scanner data and original

size sensor detection data
0 to 63*
B_DATA
Black (no original) data at the point on the boundary

between original area and no original area
0 to 255
W_DATA
White (original present) data at the point on the

0 to 255
boundary between original area and no original area
* See Paper size in U073 for the paper size for each setting.
2. To change the original size detection threshold, select LEVEL or WAIT TIME using the cursor up/down
keys and change the setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-22
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U100
Description
Setting the surface potential
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after replacing the
backup RAM or initializing the set data.
Start
Display
MC DATA
MC ON
LASER ON/OFF
Description
Changing the grid control voltage
Turning the main charger on
Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off
Method for main charger output

1. Select either MC ON or LASER ON/OFF using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The selected operation starts.
Setting the grid control voltage
1. Select MC DATA using the cursor up/down keys.
Description
Grid control voltage
Setting range
0 to 255
Initial setting
184
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item when main charger output stops. The screen for
1-4-23
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U101
Description
Setting high voltages
Description
Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage
and transfer control voltage. Also checks the transfer output voltage.
Purpose
To check and change high voltages other than the main charger voltage.
Start
2. Select the item to be set or checked using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
DEV BIAS SET
TC SET
Description
Setting the developing bias
Setting and checking the transfer voltage

Display
DB DATA
DB DATA2
Description
Developing bias control
voltage during image
formation
Developing bias control
voltage during no image
formation

25 to 255
193
25 to 255
38
Increasing the setting makes the developing bias higher and the image darker; decreasing it makes the
bias lower and the image lighter.
Setting the transfer voltage
2. Change the TC DATA setting using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
TC DATA
TC TIMING
Description

0 to 255
250 to +250
115
176
Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage
lower.
Increasing the TC TIMING setting makes the transfer voltage output timing later and improves paper
separation performance.
4. To check the transfer voltage output, select TC ON using the cursor up/down keys and press the start
key. The currently set transfer voltage is output.
5. To stop the transfer voltage output, press the stop/clear key.
6. To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key after the transfer voltage output is
stopped.
Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
1-4-24
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U109
Description
Setting the drum type
Description
Sets or checks the drum type.
Purpose
To prevent variations in halftones due to differences in drum sensitivity.
Method
2. Select the drum type to set or check using the cursor up/down keys.
The selected item is displayed in reverse.
3. Press the start key. The type is set.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selectiong an item. The screen for selectiong a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
U110

Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the main charger potential output.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.
Method
Press the start key. The drum counter count is displayed.
Clearing
1. Select CLEAR using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit count using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
U111

Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
Method
Press the start key. The drum drive time is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-25
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U130
Description
Description
Automatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.
Purpose
To set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.
Caution
Before performing the initial setting for the developer, remove the transfer roller (see page 1-6-45).
Method
2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.
Display
INPUT
CONTROL
TARGET
HUMID
Description
Toner sensor output value
Toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity
Supplement
The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:
Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)
Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)
Clearing the developing drive time (U157)
Clearing the developing count (U158)
Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
Completion
After initial setting is complete, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U131
Setting the toner sensor control voltage

Description
Displays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.
Purpose
To check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is
too dark or light.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting for the toner sensor control voltage is displayed.
Setting
Description
Setting range
0 to 255
Initial setting
155
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.
Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
Completion
1-4-26
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U132
Description
Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Display
INPUT
TARGET
CONTROL
HUMID
Description
Toner sensor output value after start key is pressed
Current toner feed start level
Current toner sensor control voltage
Absolute humidity

Completion
Press the stop/clear key when toner replenishment stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No.
is displayed.
U135

Description
Drives the toner feed motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of the toner feed motor.
Caution
Note that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure
to drive the motor for only a few seconds.
Method
2. Press the start key. The toner feed motor turns on.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U155
Displaying the toner sensor output

Description
Displays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
Purpose
To check the toner sensor output value.
Method
2. Press the start key. The current data is displayed.
Display
INPUT
TARGET
CONTROL
HUMID
Description
Current toner feed level
(value corrected based on humidity and drive time)
Absolute humidity
3.Press the stop/clear key. The sampling operation stops.

Completion
1-4-27
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U156
Description
Description
Changes the toner feed start level set in maintenance item U130 or the toner empty level to be determined
by the difference from the toner feed start level.
Purpose
To check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
Method
Display
TARGET
EMPTY
Description
Difference between the toner feed start level and toner empty level
Setting for the toner feed start level

1. Select TARGET using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right key.
Setting range
Initial setting
Description
0 to 255
100
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.

3.Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting for the toner empty level
1. Select EMPTY using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Change the setting using the cursor left/right key.
Description
Difference between the toner feed start level
and the toner empty level
Setting range
0 to 255
Initial setting
44
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner
empty is detected.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting maintenance item No. is displayed.
U157
Checking/clearing the developing drive time

Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference
when correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developer.
Method
Press the start key. The developing drive time is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a five-digit drive time (in minutes) using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting a
1-4-28
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U158
Description
Description
Displays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developer.
Method
Press the start key. The developing count is displayed.
Clearing
displayed.
Setting
displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U161
Setting the fixing control temperature

Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fixing problem on thick paper.
Method
Setting
Display
1ST TEMP
2ND TEMP
COPY TEMP
A4R TEMP
Description
Setting range

Control temperature during copying
Temperature to be deducted from the control
temperature when copying onto paper with
a width of 220 mm or smaller.
115 to 145 (C)

135 to 190 (C)
145 to 220 (C)
0 to 50 (C)
Initial setting
135
160
180
0
The respective temperatures are to be set such that 2ND TEMP 1ST TEMP.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-29
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U162
Description
Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key.
U163

Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method
2. Select EXECUTE using the cursor up/down keys.
3. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
Completion
U196
Turning the fixing heater on

Description
Turns the fixing heater on.
Purpose
To check fixing heater.
Method
2. Press the start key. The heater turns on for 3 s and then turns off.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when fixing heater is off. The screen for selecting the maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U199

Description
Displays the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Purpose
To check the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Method
Press the start key. The fixing temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade (C).
Completion
1-4-30
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U200
Description
Turning all LEDs on
Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the screen for selecting a maintenance
item No. is displayed.
U203
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional SRDF.
Purpose
To check the SRDF.
Method
2. Place an original in the SRDF if running this simulation with paper.
Display
ADF
RADF
ADF (NON-P)
RADF (NON-P)
Operation
With paper, single-sided original
With paper, double-sided original
Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)
Without paper, double-sided original (continuous operation)

Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
U204
Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter

Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
It is not necessary to run this maintenance item if a key card is installed on a 120 V specification machine. A
key card is not available for 220 240 V specifications.
Method
Setting
1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the cursor up/down keys. The selected counter is
displayed in reverse.
Display
KEY CARD
KEY COUNTER
Description
The key card is installed
The key counter is installed
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4-31
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U207
Description
Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
2. "1" appears on the copy quantity display and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the
bottom, the figure shown on the copy quantity display increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in
that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate
right, the top LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
If an optional fax unit is installed, proceed with checking the fax keys. Opening the rear panel cover
after pressing the last key will light all the LEDs.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for executing. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
After checking numeric key 1, the operation cannot be canceled until all the keys are checked.
U210
Reversing the LCD

Description
Sets whether to reverse the message display (LCD) in the operation panel.
Purpose
To reverse the message display.
Method
Setting
1. Select ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Reverse
Normal

2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U211
Setting DF type
Descrioption
Sets the optional DF type (STDF or SRDF).
Purpose
To set DF type when installing.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for selecting an item is displaued.
2. Select DF type using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
SADF
SRADF
1-4-32
Description
Single-sided (STDF)
Double-sided (SRDF)
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U211
Description
Completion
No. is displayed.
U240
Checking the operation of finisher motors and solenoids

Description
Turns the motors and solenoids in the optional finisher on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the finisher motors and solenoids.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the cursor up/down keys.
The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
INITIAL
FJM
RJM
RETM
STAPLER
PUSOL
Motors and solenoids

Initial operation
Front side registration motor (FSRM)
Rear side registration motor (RSRM)
Trailing edge registration motor (TERM)
Stapler motor (STM)
Pick up solenoid (PUSOL)

Completion
displayed.
U241
Checking the finisher switches

Description
Displayes the status of respective switches and sensors in the optional finisher.
Purpose
To check if respective switches and sensors in the optional finisher.
Method
Display
MSFSW
LSFSW
FTPS
FJHS
RJHS
REHS
STP
Switches and sensors

Tray open/close switch (TOCSW)
Left cover switch (LCSW)
Internal tray sensor (ITS)
Side registration front home position sensor (SRFHPS)
Side registration rear home position sensor (SRRHPS)
Trailing edge registration home position sensor (TERHPS)
Stapler empty sensor (STES)

Completion
displayed.
1-4-33
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U243
Description
Checking the operation of the DF motors, solenoids and clutch
Description
Turns the motors, solenoids or clutch in the optional SRDF on (when SRDF is installed).
Turns the motors in the optional STDF on (when STDF is installed).
Purpose
To check the operation of the SRDF motors, solenoids and clutch (when SRDF is installed).
To check the operation of the STDF motors (when STDF is installed).
Method
Display
F MOT
C MOT
FD CL
EJ SL
RJ SL
FD SL
RP SL
Operation
Motors, solenoids and clutch

Original feed motor (OFM)
Original paper conveying motor (OCM)
Original feed clutch (OFCL)
Eject feedshift solenoid (EFSSOL)
Switchback feedshift solenoid (SBFSSOL)
Original feed solenoid (OFSOL)
Switchback pressure solenoid (SBPSOL)
In operation
In operation
On for 0.5 s
On for 0.5 s
On for 0.5 s
On and off
On and off
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.

Completion
displayed.
U244
Checking the DF switches (when installing the optional SRDF)

Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional SRDF.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the optional SRDF operate correctly.
Start
2. Select the type of switches (SW or VR) to be checked using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
SW
VR
Type of switches
On/off switches
Volume switch
Method for the on/off switches

1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display
SET SW
FEED SW
REV SW
TMG SW
SZ A SW
Switches
Original set switch (OSSW)
Original feed switch (OFSW)
Original switchback switch (OSBSW)
DF timing switch (DFTSW)
Original size length switch (OSLSW)
Method for the volume switch
1. Move the original insertion guides to check the detection status of the original size width switch.
The detected original width is displayed as a numerical value with the decimals omitted.
1-4-34
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
Description
U244
Numerical
value
Original width to be detected
000
51/2" 81/2"
49.664
A5R
50.176
61.440
61.952
B5R
103.936
81/2" 14"/
81/2" 11"
104.448
Folio/A4R
139.264
139.776
146.432
B4/B5
146.994
197.120
197.632
CF (11" 15")
197.720
11" 17"/
11" 15"/
11" 81/2"
223.232
A3/A4
256
For example, if any value between 105 and 139 is displayed when the original insertion guides are
adjusted for A4R paper, it indicates that the original width is detected correctly.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-35
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U244
Description
Checking the DF switches (when installing the optional STDF)
Description
Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional STDF.
Purpose
To check if respective switches in the optional STDF operate correctly.
Start
Method for the on/off switches
1. Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status.
If the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding switch is displayed in reverse.
Display
SET SW
SZ B SW
SZ C SW
SZ D SW
SZ E SW
TMG SW
SZ A SW
SF SW
COV SW
Switches
Original set switch (PI5)
Original size width switch B (PI4)
Original size width switch C (PI3)
Original size width switch D (PI2)
Original size width switch E (PI1)
DF safty switch 2 (DFSSW2)
DF safty switch 1 (DFSSW1)
Completion
No. is displayed.
U245
Checking messages
Description
Displays a list of messages and graphics to be displayed.
Purpose
To check the messages and graphics to be displayed.
Method
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select either messages or graphics using the cursor up/down keys.
Press the start key. The message display screen or graphic display screen is displayed.
Enter the message number or graphic number to be checked using the numeric keys and press the start
key. The selected message or graphic is displayed.
5. To check the messages in the listing order, use the cursor up/down keys.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-36
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U250
Description
Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:
Maintenance cycle (number of copies) = setting 1000
Setting
Description
Maintenance cycle

0 to 600
100
1000 (copies)
For example, when set to 120, the maintenance cycle is set to 120000.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
U251
Checking/clearing the maintenance count

Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Press the start key. The maintenance count is displayed.
Clearing
displayed.
Setting
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for selecting
a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-37
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U252
Description
Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running
maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Setting
1. Select the destination using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
JAPAN METRIC
INCH
EUROPE METRIC
ASIA PACIFIC
1-4
Description
Metric (Japan) specifications
Inch (North America) specifications
Metric (Europe) specifications
Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when
the power is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/clear key. The screen for
Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To
change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the
destination.
Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance
item No.
253
255
348
U253
Title
Japan

Single
120 s
Normal
Inch
Double
90 s
Special area
Europe Metric,
Asia Pacific
Double
90 s
Special area

Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" 17" paper is to be counted as one sheet
(single count) or two sheets (double count).
Method
Setting
1. Select double or single count using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
DOUBLE COUNT
SINGLE COUNT
Description
Double count for A3/11" 17" paper only
Single count for all size paper
Initial setting: DOUBLE COUNT
Completion
1-4-38
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U254
Description
Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the
problem.
Method
Setting
1. Select either ON or OFF using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Auto start function on
Auto start function off
Initial setting: ON
Completion
U255

Description
Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the
same settings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed.
Setting
Description
Auto clear time
Initial setting
Setting range
0 to 270
90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.

When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
Completion
1-4-39
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U256
Description
Description
Selects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/
energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.
Purpose
According to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without the
recovery time from preheat mode.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
ON
OFF
1-4
Auto preheat/energy saver function on

Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: ON
When the setting is changed from OFF to ON, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15
minutes.
Completion
U258
Switching copy operation at toner empty detection

Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that
can be made after the detection.
Method
Setting
1. Select single or continuous copying using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in
reverse.
Display
Description
SINGLE MODE
CONTINUE MODE
Enables only single copying.

Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: SINGLE MODE

2. Set the number of copies that can be made using the cursor left/right keys.
Description
Number of copies after toner empty detection
Initial setting
Setting range
0 to 200 (copies)
70
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.

When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous
copying.
Completion
1-4-40
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U260
Description
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper
ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such
copying. To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is
counted before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To
prevent this, the copy timing should be made later.
Method
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
1-4
Description
COUNT: FEED
COUNT: EJECT
When secondary paper feed starts

When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJECT

Completion
U265

Description
Sets whether or not to print the product name on the reports that users print.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
2. Enter 0 or 2 using the numeric or cursor right/left keys.
Setting
0
2
Description
Product name printed
Product name not printed
3. Press the start key. The setting is set.

Completion
1-4-41
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U330
Description
Setting the number of sheets to enter stacking mode during sort operation
Description
When sort copying is set to perform automatically in the output form setting of the user simulation, sets the
number of sheets at which the eject location is switched to the optional finisher (only when the finisher is
installed).
Purpose
To be set as required according to the number of copies the user makes.
Method
2. Set the number of sheets (o to 100) using the numeric keys or cursor right/left keys.
Completion
U332
Setting the size conversion factor

Description
1-4
Sets the factor for converting each paper size into A4/11" 81/2". The black ratio is converted for the A4/11"
81/2" size using the factor set in this maintenance item. Values set are displayed in the user simulation.
Purpose
To set the factor to convert the black ratio of each paper size for A4/11" 81/2" size.
Method
2. Select the paper size.
3. Change the setting using the cursor up/down keys.
The size conversion factor can be set separately for the copier mode (COPY), the printer mode (PRI)
and the fax mode (FAX) at the screen for setting the size conversion factor.
Metric models
COPY
PRI
2.0
2.0
Size conversion factor for A3
0.0 to 3.0
1.5
1.5
Size conversion factor for B4
0.0 to 3.0
1.0
1.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.7
0.7
0.0 to 3.0
0.5
0.5
0.0 to 3.0
0.5
0.5
0.0 to 3.0
0.5
0.5
0.0 to 3.0
0.5
0.5
Size conversion factor for postcard 0.0 to 3.0
1.5
1.5
Size conversion factor for folio
0.0 to 3.0
Size conversion factor for
1.0
1.0
non-standard sizes
0.0 to 3.0
Display Description
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
POST
FOL
ECT
FAX
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.0
Inch models
COPY
PRI
2.0
2.0
11 17 Size conversion factor for 11" 17" 0.0 to 3.0
1.5
1.5
8.5 14 Size conversion factor for 8.5" 14" 0.0 to 3.0
1.0
1.0
8.5 11 Size conversion factor for 8.5" 11" 0.0 to 3.0
0.5
0.5
8.5 5.5 Size conversion factor for 8.5" 5.5" 0.0 to 3.0
ECT
Size conversion factor for
1.0
1.0
0.0 to 3.0
non-standard sizes
Display
Description
FAX
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.0

Completion
selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
1-4-42
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U342
Description
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject
tray is selected as the eject location.
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Sets restriction on the number of sheets
Cancels restriction on the number of sheets
Details of restriction (number of sheets to be ejected continuously

after the start key is pressed)
Condition
1-4
Number of sheets
When no optional ejection

device is installed
250
When the job separator or

duplex unit is installed
150
When the finisher is installed
100

Completion
No. is displayed.
U343

Description
Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Method
Setting
Display
ON
OFF
Description
Duplex copy
Simplex copy

Completion
1-4-43
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U344
Description
Description
Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
Purpose
According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.
Method
Setting
1. Select control mode using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
Control in preheat mode
INSTANT READY
Without decreasing the fixing control temperature, the display on the operation panel is
turned off.
The fixing control temperature is set at
70C/158F. The copier is forcibly stabilized
30 s after exiting preheat/energy saver mode.
The fixing control temperature is set at
130C/266F.
ENERGY STAR
TIME SERVE
Initial setting: ENERGY STAR

Completion
U345

Description
Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting
the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the message is displayed.
Purpose
To change the time to display the maintenance due indication.
Method
Setting
1. Change the setting using the numeric or cursor left/right keys.
Description
Display period for the next maintenance
(remaining count before the end of the maintenance cycle)
Setting range
0 to 9999
Initial setting: 0
Completion
1-4-44
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U348
Description
Description
Selects the adjustment range for copy density from NORMAL and SPECIAL AREA (for wider range).
Purpose
To change the setting according to user request.
When especially dark or light density is requested, set to SPECIAL AREA.
Method
Setting
1. Select the density range using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
SPECIAL AREA
NORMAL
Description
11/15 steps (enlargement mode)
5/9 steps
Initial setting: SPECIAL AREA

Completion
U402

Adjustment
See page 1-6-15.
U403

Adjustment
See page 1-6-38.
1-4-45
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U404
Description
Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DF.
Purpose
Used if margins are not correct when the optional DF is used.
Caution
mode.
U402
U403
U404
Method
Setting
1-4
Display
A MGN
B MGN
C MGN
D MGN
Description
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 10
Left margin
Leading edge margin
Right margin
Trailing edge margin
2
3
2
2
Change in value
per step
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
DF leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm)
Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(2.5 +1.5
2.0 mm)
DF right margin
(2.5 +1.5
2.0 mm)
DF trailing edge margin

(3 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-4-7 Correct margin amount

Interrupt copy mode
mode.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-46
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U407
Description
Adjustment
See page 1-6-12.
U901
Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations

Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable
parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The counts by paper feed locations are displayed.
2. Change the screen using the cursor left/right keys.
Display
BYPASS
FIRST
SECOND
THIRD
FORTH
DUPLEX
1-4
Bypass tray
Upper drawer
Lower drawer
Optional drawer 1*
Optional drawer 2*
Duplex unit*
*Optional.
When an optional paper feed device is not installed, the corresponding count is not displayed.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
To clear the counts for all paper feed locations, select ALL using the cursor up/down keys.
displayed.
Completion
U903
Checking/clearing the paper jam counts

Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The jam count is displayed by jam codes.
Clearing
1. Select ALL using the cursor up/down keys. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.
displayed.
Completion
1-4-47
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U904
Description
Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Method
1. Press the start key. The service call count is displayed by service call codes.
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The selected count is displayed in reverse.
To clear all counts, select ALL using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared. When all counts are cleared, the screen for selecting a
Completion
1-4
U905
Checking/clearing counts by optional devices

Description
Displays or clears the counts of the optional SRDF/STDF or finisher.
Purpose
To check the use of the SRDF/STDF and finisher. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the device, the count of which is to be checked using the cursor up/down keys. The count of the
selected device is displayed.
SRDF/STDF (DF)
Display
CHANGE
ADF
RADF
Description
Original replacement count
No. of single-sided originals that has
passed through the DF in ADF mode
No. of double-sided originals that has
passed through the DF in RADF mode
Finisher (SORTER)
Display
CP CNT
STAPLE
Description
No. of copies that has passed
Frequency the stapler has been activated
Clearing
1. Select the item to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-48
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U906
Description
Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.
Method
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine
returns to the same status as when the main switch is turned on.
U908
Changing the total counter value

Description
Displays, clears and changes the total counter value.
Purpose
1-4
To check the total counter value.

Method
1. Press the start key. The total counter value is displayed.
Clear
1. Select CANCEL using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit value using the numeric keys.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current total counter value, press the stop/clear key. The
screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U910
Clearing the black ratio data

Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheets.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
Display
CANCEL
EXECUTE
Description
Do not clear the black ratio data
Clears the black ratio data
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared, and the screen for selecting a
maintenance item is displayed.
Completion
selecting a maintenance item is displayed.
1-4-49
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U914
Description
Switching between fax and copier modes
Description
Selects whether the fax or copier mode is given priority when the optional facsimile kit is installed to use the
copier as a fax.
Purpose
To select the mode that is used more frequently by the user.
Method
Setting
1. Select the priority mode (fax mode or copier mode) using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Press the start key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
1-4
U917

Description
Selects whether to read out the backup data on the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB or to
write backup data on the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB to the main PCB.
When the memory is initialized (maintenance items U020, U021, U022 and U252), this is set to read out the
backup data from the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB. To write the backup data to the
main PCB from the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB, change the setting before starting writing.
Purpose
Used when replacing the main PCB.
Method
2. Select READ or WRITE using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
READ
WRITE
Description
Reading out the backup data
Writing backup data

Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key when operation
stops. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U990
Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light

Description
Displays, clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after
replacement.
Method
Press the start key. The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes.
Clearing
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item
No. is displayed.
Setting
1. Enter a six-digit accumulated time using the numeric keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The screen
for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-50
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U992
Description
Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the optional printer board or fax unit is
installed.
Purpose
To check the frequency of use of the printer or fax.
Method
Press the start key. The print count of the printer and fax are displayed.
Setting
1. Select the count to be cleared using the cursor up/down keys.
To clear the counts for both printer and fax, press the reset key.
Completion
U993
1-4
Outputting a VTC-PG pattern

Description
Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that
of the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
PG pattern to be output
Purpose
VTC-PG1
Center line adjustment
VTC-PG2
Lateral squareness adjustment

Magnification adjustment
VTC-PG3
3. Press the interrupt key. The copy mode screen is displayed.

4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.
Completion
No. is displayed.
1-4-51
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U998
Description
Outptting the memory list
Description
Outputs the list of memory.
Purpose
To output the list as required.
Method
2. Enter the six digits of address using the numeric keys.
To enter alphabets, press the keys shown below as required.
Key
*/Language key
Scanner key
On-line/Printer key
Margin/Border Erase/Book Erase key
Duplex/Split Page key
Layout key
1-4
Symbol
A
B
C
D
E
F
3. Press the interrupt key to output the list.

Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The screen for selectiong a maintenance item No. is displayed.
1-4-52
2AV/X
(4) Maintenance mode item list (for 15 cpm copier)
Section
General
Item
No.
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode
Initialization
Drive, paper
feed, paper
conveying and
cooling system
U004 Setting the machine number
U005 Copying without paper
U020 Initializing all data
U021 Initializing memories
U022 Initializing backup data
U030 Checking motor operation
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
U032 Checking clutch operation
U033 Checking solenoid operation
U034 Adjusting the print start timing

Adjusting the leading edge registration
Adjusting the center line
0
0
U035 Setting folio size

Length
Width
Optical
Initial
setting*
330
210
U051 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper

Regist data
Feed data
0
0
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed

Drive motor
Polygon motor
0
0
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
12
U061 Turning the exposure lamp on
U063 Adjusting the shading position
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification

Main scanning direction/auxiliary scanning direction
U066 Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the
contact glass
U067 Adjusting the center line for scanning an original on the contact glass
U070 Adjusting the DF magnification
U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing
U072 Adjusting the DF center line
U073 Checking scanner operation
U074 Adjusting the DF input light luminosity

U075 Setting the original size detection
1-4
1
On
U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off
On
U088 Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)
Off
U091 Checking shading
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient

Text/text and photo/photo mode
U099 Checking the original size detection
1-4-53
2AV/X
Section
High voltage
Item
No.
U100 Setting the surface potential
U101 Setting high voltages
Developing bias
Transfer voltage
U109 Setting the drum type
Developing
U130 Initial setting for the developer
Mode setting
U135 Checking toner feed motor operation
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
100
44
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
U158 Checking/clearing the developing count
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature

Regular stabilization control temperature
Temperature to be deducted from the regular control temperature
when copying onto small-sized paper
135
160
180
0
U163 Resetting the fixing problem data
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
U199 Checking the fixing temperature
U200 Turning all LEDs on
U203 Operating DF separately
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
U207 Checking the operation panel keys
U243 Checking the operation of the DF motors
U244 Checking the DF switches
U250 Setting the maintenance cycle

U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
U252 Setting the destination
U253 Switching between double and single counts
100
Japan
Double count
U254 Turning auto start function on/off
On
U255 Setting auto clear time
120
U256 Turning auto preheat/energy saver function on/off
On
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Single mode,
70
U260 Changing the copy count timing
After ejection
U265 Setting the destination specifications
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
U342 Setting the ejection restriction

U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode
U345 Setting the value for maintenance due indication
U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range
1-4-54
155
U132 Replenishing toner forcibly
U162 Stabilizing fixing forcibly
Operation
panel and
support
equipment
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive time
U156 Changing the toner control level

Toner empty level
Fixing and
cleaning
193/38
115
176
U110 Checking/clearing the drum count
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
1-4
Initial
setting*
184
On
Energy star
0
Normal
2AV/X
Section
Image
processing
Others
Item
No.
U402 Adjusting margins of image printing
Initial
setting*
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DF
U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
U904 Checking/clearing the service call counts
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
U906 Resetting partial operation control
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
U917 Setting the reading/writing of backup data

U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Read
U992 Checking or clearing the printer count
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
U998 Outputting the memory list
1-4
1-4-55
2AV/X
(5) Contents of maintenance mode items (for 15 cpm copier)
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items, and paper jam and service call occurrences.
Purpose
To check the current setting of the maintenance items, or paper jam or service call occurrences.
Before initializing the backup RAM, output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the
settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1. Press the start key. A selection item appears.
2. Select the item to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
1-4
Display
Output list
d-L
J-L
C-L
List of the current settings of the maintenance modes

List of the paper jam occurrences
List of the service call occurrences
3. Press the start key. The interrupt copy mode is entered and a list is output.
When A4/11" 81/2" paper is available, a report of this size is output. If not, specify the paper feed location.
When output is complete, the selected item appears.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key while a selection item is displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U001

Description
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
To exit the maintenance mode.
Method
Press the start key. The normal copy mode is entered.
U004

Description
Displays and changes the machine number.
Purpose
To check or set the machine number.
Method
Press the start key. The currently set machine number is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
2. Enter the last six digits of the machine number using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
Do not enter the first two digits, 3 and 7.
Copy exposure indicator
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
3. Press the start key. The machine number is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current setting, press the stop/clear key. The indication for
selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-56
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U005 Copying without paper
Description
Description
Simulates the copy operation without paper feed.
Purpose
To check the overall operation of the machine.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Operation
P
P-d
Only the copier operates.

Both the copier and DF operate (continuous operation).
3. Press the interrupt key.

4. Set the operation conditions required. Changes in the following settings can be made.
Magnifications
Number of copies: continuous copying is performed when set to 250.
Copy density
Keys on the operation panel other than the energy saver (preheat) key
5. To control the paper feed pulley, remove all the paper in the drawers, or the drawers. With the paper
present, the paper feed pulley does not operate.
Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions. When operation is complete, the
selected item appears.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U020

Description
Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PCB to return to the original settings.
Purpose
Method
2. Select on using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Operation
on
Canceling initialization
Executing initialization
3. Press the start key. All data in the backup RAM is initialized, and the original settings for Japan specifications are set.
When initialization is complete, the machine automatically returns to the same status as when the main
switch is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing initialization, press the stop/clear key. The indication for
1-4-57
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U021 Initializing memories
Description
Description
Initializes the setting data other than that for adjustments due to variations between respective machines, i.e.,
settings for counters, service call history and mode settings. As a result, initializes the backup RAM according
to the specifications depending on the destination selected in U252.
Purpose
Used to return the machine settings to the factory settings.
Method
Display
Operation
on
3. Press the start key. All data other than that for adjustments due to variations between machines is
initialized based on the destination setting. When initialization is complete, the machine automatically
1-4
Completion
Press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U022

Description
Initializes only the data set for the optical section.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the scanner unit.
Method
1. Press the start key. A appears.
Display
Operation
on
4. Press the start key. The data for the optical section (U060 to 099, U403, U404 and U990) is initialized.
Completion
U030

Description
Drives each motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of each motor.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected motor operates.
Display
Motor
A
F1
F2
F3
Drive motor (DM)

Drawer drive motor (DDM)*
Drawer drive motor (ST) 1 (DDM(ST)1)*
Drawer drive motor (ST) 2 (DDM(ST)2)*
* Optional
Completion
Press the stop key after operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-58
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U031 Checking switches for paper conveying
Description
Description
Displays the on-off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path.
Purpose
To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly.
Method
2. Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status.
When the on-status of a switch is detected, the corresponding original size indicator lights.
Original size indicator
Switch
A3/11" 17"
A4R/81/2" 14"
A4/81/2" 11"
B4/LED below 81/2" 11"
B5R/51/2" 81/2"
Eject switch (ESW)

Job separator eject switch (JBESW)*
Drawer feed switch (DFSW)*
Drawer feed switch (ST) (DFSW(ST))*
* Optional.
1-4
Completion
U032

Description
Turns each clutch on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each clutch.
Method
2. Select the clutch to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The selected clutch turns on for 1 s.
Display
Clutch
P1
Pb
F1
F2
F3
2F
Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)

Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
Lower paper feed clutch (PFCL-L)*
Paper feed clutch (ST) 1 (PFCL(ST)1)*
Paper feed clutch (ST) 2 (PFCL(ST)2)*
Registration clutch (RCL)
* Optional.
Completion
1-4-59
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U033 Checking solenoid operation
Description
Description
Turns each solenoid on.
Purpose
To check the operation of each solenoid.
Method
2. Select the desired operation using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
Operation
b1
b2
A
Turning the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)* on

Turning the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL)* off
Turning the main switch off
* Optional.
1-4
Completion
U034

Adjustment
U035
Setting folio size

Description
Changes the image area for copying onto folio size paper.
Purpose
To prevent the image at the trailing edge, or right or left side of the paper from not being copied by setting the
actual size of the folio paper used.
Method
Setting
2. Change the setting using the zoom +/ keys.
Setting
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Length
Width
330 to 356 mm
200 to 220 mm
330
210

Completion
U051

Adjustment
See page 1-6-17.
1-4-60
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U053 Performing fine adjustment of the motor speed
Description
Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors.
Purpose
Used to adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not correct.
Method
Setting
Copy exposure indicator Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
5.0 to +5.0
5.0 to +5.0
0
0
Drive motor speed adjustment

Polygon motor speed adjustment
Drive motor speed adjustment (unit: %)

Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction, and decreasing it makes
the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Polygon motor speed adjustment (unit: %)
Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary
scanning direction; decreasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and
longer in the auxiliary scanning direction.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, a VTC pattern shown below is output in interrupt copy mode.
Correct values for an A3/11" 17" output are:
A = 300 0.75 mm
B = 260 1.3 mm
B
A
Figure 1-4-8
Adjustment
1. Output an A3/11" 17" VTC pattern in interrupt mode.
2. Measure A and B on the VTC pattern (Figure 1-4-8), and perform the following adjustments if they are
different from the correct sizes:
A: Drive motor speed adjustment
B: Polygon motor speed adjustment
Completion
appears.
1-4-61
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U060 Adjusting the scanner input properties
Description
Description
Adjusts the image scanning density.
Purpose
Used when the entire image appears too dark or light.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Image scanning density
0 to 23
12
Increasing the setting makes the density lower, and decreasing it makes the density higher.
Interrupt copy mode
While this maintenance item is being performed, copying from an original can be made in interrupt copy mode.
1-4
Completion
appears.
Caution
The following settings are also reset to the initial values by performing this maintenance item:
Exposure density gradient set in maintenance mode (U093)
Exposure set in the copy default item of the copier management mode
U061

Description
Turns the exposure lamp on.
Purpose
To check the exposure lamp.
Method
1. Press the start key. on appears.
2. Press the start key. The exposure lamp lights.
3. To turn the exposure lamp off, press the stop/clear key.
Completion
U063

Description
Changes the shading position.
Purpose
Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned. This is
due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate. To prevent this problem, the shading position should be changed
so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Change in value per step
Shading position
5 to +5
0.17 mm
Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right, and decreasing it moves the
position toward the machine left.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for adjustment. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-62
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification
Description
Adjustment
U066
Adjusting the leading edge registration for scanning an original on the contact glass
Adjustment
See page 1-6-36.
U067
Adjustment
See page 1-6-37.
U070

Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning speed.
Purpose
To be executed if the correct magnification is not obtained in the auxiliary scanning direction when the optional
SRDF is used.
Caution
Before making this adjustment, ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
U053
U065
U070
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Original conveying
motor speed
25 to +25
0.1%
Increasing the setting makes the image longer, and decreasing it makes the image shorter.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-63
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U071 Adjusting the DF scanning timing
Description
Description
Adjusts the DF original scanning timing.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy
image when the optional DF is used.
Caution
U034
U066
U071
Method
Setting
1-4
Copy exposure
Description
indicator
Setting range
Initial setting
Change in value
per step
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
32 to +32
32 to +32
0
0
0.19 mm
0.19 mm
DF leading edge registration

DF trailing edge registration
Increasing the setting moves the copy image backward, and decreasing it moves the copy image forward.
Interrupt copy mode
Adjustment
2. Check the copy image and adjust the registration as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting of exp. 1.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting of exp. 1.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-9
Completion
appears.
1-4-64
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U072 Adjusting the DF center line
Description
Description
Adjusts the scanning start position for the DF original.
Purpose
To be executed if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the
Caution
U034
U067
U072
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
DF center line
39 to +39
0.17 mm
1-4
Increasing the setting moves the image to the right, and decreasing it moves the image to the left.
Interrupt copy mode
Adjustment
2. Check the copy image and adjust the center line as follows.
For copy example 1, increase the setting.
For copy example 2, decrease the setting.
Reference
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-10
Completion
1-4-65
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U073 Checking scanner operation
Description
Description
Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions.
Purpose
To check scanner operation.
Method
2. Select the item to be changed by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Operating conditions
Setting range
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Magnification
Paper size
On and off of the exposure lamp
50 to 200%
See below.
on or off
Paper size for each setting
1-4
Setting
Paper size
Setting
Paper size
8
9
24
36
39
40
41
A4
B5
11" 81/2"
A3
B4
A4R
B5R
42
47
52
53
55
56
58
A5R
Folio
11" 17"
11" 15"
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"
51/2" 81/2"
4. Press the start key. Scanning starts under the selected conditions.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when scanning stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U074

Description
Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the optional DF.
Purpose
Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and
when scanning an original from the DF.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
DF input light luminosity
0 to 8
Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher, and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
1-4-66
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U075 Setting the original size detection
Description
Description
Sets whether or not to detect the original size automatically using the original size detection sensor (OSDS).
Purpose
On the metric specifications of the European models, set to on when an optional original size detection
sensor is installed.
Method
Setting
1. Select on or oFF using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
on
oFF
Original size detected

Original size not detected
Initial setting: on
2. Press the start key. The setting is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-67
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U087 Turning the DF scanning position adjust mode on/off
Description
Turns on or off the DF scanning position adjust mode, in which the DF original scanning position is adjusted
automatically by determining the presence or absence of dust on the slit glass. Also changes the reference
data for identifying dust.
Reference
In the DF original scanning position adjust mode, the presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing
the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DF original
scanning position. If dust is identified, the DF original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals.
Purpose
Used to prevent appearance of black lines due to dust adhering in the original scanning position on the slit
glass when the DF is used.
Method
2. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
1-4
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2


Display
Description
on
oFF
DF scanning position adjust mode on

DF scanning position adjust mode off
Initial setting: on
Available only when the mode is turned on.
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Minimum density to be regarded as dust
10 to 95
35
Example
The figure indicates the density in 256 levels of gray (0: white, 255: black). When the setting is 35, data of
the level of 35 or higher is regarded as dust and data of lower level is regarded as the background (scan
data taken when there is no original).
Completion
1-4-68
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U088 Setting the input filter (moir reduction mode)
Description
Turns moir reduction mode on and off by switching the input filter on and off.
Purpose
Used to prevent regular density unevenness (moir) on halftone image areas of the copy image in text mode
and text and photo mode. Such moir is more likely to appear when an enlargement or reduction copy is made
in text mode from an original containing large halftone image areas.
Method
Setting
1. Select on or oFF using the zoom +/ keys. The selected item is displayed in reverse.
Display
Description
on
oFF
Moir reduction mode

Normal copy mode
Initial setting: oFF

If moir on the copy image is significant, change the setting to on. Note that when the moir reduction
mode is turned on, the resolution may be slightly reduced.
2. Press the start key. The value is set. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U091
Checking shading
Description
Performs scanning under the same conditions as before and after shading is performed, displaying the original
scanning values at nine points of the contact glass.
Purpose
To check the change in original scanning values before and after shading. The results may be used to decide
the causes for fixing unevenness (uneven density) of the gray area of an image: either due to optical (shading
or CCD) or other problems.
Also to check the causes for a white or black line appearing longitudinally.
Method
2. Select the item to be operated using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Output list
on
oFF
Performs scanning before shading and displays the result.

Performs scanning after shading and displays the result.
1-4-69
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U091
(cont.)
Description
3. Press the start key. Scanning is performed under the selected conditions and the result is displayed.
4. Change the measurement point by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy
exposure adjustment keys. For the correspondence between the measurement points and the copy
exposure indicators, see Figure 1-4-11.
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
100 mm from the machine Machine center

center toward machine front
100 mm from machine
center toward machine rear
Point
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-4

Exp. 1 lights.
Exp. 2 lights.
Exp. 3 lights.
Exp. 4 lights.
Exp. 5 lights.
Exp. 1 flashes.
Exp. 2 flashes.
Exp. 3 flashes.
Exp. 4 flashes.
Figure 1-4-11
When scanning is performed before shading, the scan value at the machine center should be slightly
different from those at the machine front and rear. When scanning is performed after shading, there should
be no difference between respective values. Any differences between the values at machine front and rear
indicates that scanner problem causes the fixing unevenness.
If the displayed results indicate no shading problems, the fixing unevenness (uneven copy density) is
caused by factors other than in the scanner section (shading or CCD).
If a black line appears, the cause may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation before
shading: if a white line appears, they may be assumed based on the results of the scanning operation after
shading. Note that depending on the thickness and location of the black or white line, it may not be possible
to use this method to determine the cause. This is because the displayed values obtained from scanning at
the limit of nine points are insufficient to provide significant information.
5. Press the stop/clear key. The selected item appears.
Completion
appears.
1-4-70
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U092 Adjusting the scanner automatically
Description
Description
Makes auto scanner adjustments in the order below using the specified original.
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067)
Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration (U066)
Adjusting scanner magnification in the auxiliary direction (U065)
When this maintenance item is performed, the settings in U065, U066 and U067 are also changed.
Purpose
Used to make respective auto adjustments for the scanner.
Method
1. Place the specified original (P/N: 2AC68240) on the contact glass.
3. Press the start key. Auto adjustment starts. When adjustment is complete, Gd appears.
4. Display each setting value after adjustment by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.
Setting value
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Exp. 4
Scanner center line

Scanner magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction
1-4
If a problem occurs during auto adjustment, nG is displayed and operation stops. Lighting the copy
exposure indicator exp. 2 and then exp. 3 using the copy exposure adjustment keys will display the error
code. Determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning, or adjust
the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key after auto adjustment is complete. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
If the stop/clear key is pressed during auto adjustment, adjustment stops and no settings are changed.
1-4-71
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U093 Setting the exposure density gradient
Description
Description
Changes the exposure density gradient in manual density mode, depending on respective image modes (text,
text and photo, photo).
Purpose
To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment. Also used to
make copy image darker or lighter.
Start
2. Select the image mode to be adjusted by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Press the start key. The machine enters the setting mode.
Image mode LEDs
Auto Exposure
Description
Density in text mode
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
1-4
Auto Exposure
Density in text and photo mode
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Photo
Text
: Off,
1-4-72
: On
Density in photo mode
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U093 Setting
(cont.)
1. Select the item to be adjusted by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
2. Adjust the setting using the zoom +/ keys.
Copy exposure
indicator
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3

Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3
Setting range
Initial setting
0
0
Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger, and decreasing it makes the change smaller.
Image density
Setting: 3
Setting: 0
Dark
Set to LIGHTER
Set to DARKER
Light
Light
Center
Dark
1-4
Density adjustment
Density adjustment range: Normal

Density adjustment range: Special area
Figure 1-4-12
Exposure density gradient

Interrupt copy mode
Completion
appears.
1-4-73
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U099 Checking the original size detection
Description
Description
Displays the original width detection data and sets the original width detection threshold.
Purpose
To check the original width detection. Also to change the original size detection threshold if the size of the
original on the contact glass is detected incorrectly.
Start
2. Select the item using the image mode selection key.
3. Press the start key. The machine enters the execution mode.
Display
Description
dA
LE
Checking the original width detection data

Setting or checking the original width detection threshold
Method to display the original width detection data

1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on. The exposure lamp turns on
and the width of the original is detected. The scanner data taken at the nine points from (1) at the machine
rear to (9) at the machine front is displayed.
The data is displayed within the range of 000 to 255, 000 indicating white (original present) and 255
indicating black (no original).
2. Change the point to display the detection data by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash
using the copy exposure adjustment keys. For the correspondence between the detection point and the
copy exposure indicators, see Figure 1-4-13.
1-4
1
4
7
Point
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
5
8
3
6
9

Exp. 1 lights.
Exp. 2 lights.
Exp. 3 lights.
Exp. 4 lights.
Exp. 5 lights.
Exp. 1 flashes.
Exp. 2 flashes.
Exp. 3 flashes.
Exp. 4 flashes.
Figure 1-4-13
1-4-74
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U099 Method to set or check the original size detection threshold
(cont.)
1. Place an original on the contact glass and turn the original detection switch on. The original size detection
starts and detection data is displayed.
2. Change the detection item by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Copy exposure
indicator
Description
Data range
Remarks
Initial
setting
Exp. 1
Scanner data threshold
0 to 255
Adjustable
170
Exp. 2
Time between original detection switch turning

on and reading-in of scanner data
0 to 100 ms
Adjustable
50
Exp. 3
Detected original width
0 to 350 mm
Exp. 4
Original size detected by scanner data and

original size sensor detection data
0 to 63*
* See Paper size in U073 for the paper size for each setting.
3. To change the original size detection threshold, light exp. 1 or 2 and change the setting using the zoom +/
keys.
Completion
appears.
1-4-75
1-4
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U100 Setting the surface potential
Description
Description
Changes the surface potential by changing the grid control voltage. Also performs main charging.
Purpose
To set the surface potential or check main charging. Also used when reentering data after initializing the set
data.
Start
2. Select the item using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display (copy exposure indicator)
Description
(exp. 1)
on1 (exp. 2)
on2 (exp. 3)
Changing the grid control voltage

Turning the main charger on
Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit
on and off
Method for main charger output

Setting the grid control voltage
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Grid control voltage
0 to 255
184
Increasing the setting makes the surface potential higher, and decreasing it makes the potential lower.
Change in value per step: approximately 3.6 V
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when main charger output stops while a selection item is displayed. The indication for
1-4-76
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U101 Setting high voltages
Description
Description
Changes the developing bias voltage and transfer voltage by changing the developing bias control voltage and
transfer control voltage. Also checks the transfer output voltage.
Purpose
To check and change high voltages other than the main charger voltage.
Start
2. Select the item to be set or checked by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
Image mode LEDs
Auto Exposure
Description
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
Auto Exposure
Setting and checking the transfer voltage
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On

keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Developing bias control voltage

during image formation
Developing bias control voltage
during no image formation
25 to 255
193
25 to 255
38
Exp. 2
Increasing the setting makes the developing bias higher and the image darker; decreasing it makes the
bias lower and the image lighter.
3.Press the start key. The value is set.
Setting the transfer voltage
keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2

0 to 255
250 to +250
115
176
Increasing the exp. 1 setting makes the transfer voltage higher, and decreasing it makes the voltage lower.
Increasing the exp. 2 setting makes the transfer voltage output timing later and improves paper separation
performance.
4. To check the transfer voltage output, light the copy exposure indicator exp. 3 using the copy exposure
adjustment keys and press the start key. The currently set transfer voltage is output.
5. To stop the transfer voltage output, press the stop/clear key.
Interrupt copy mode
Completion
Press the stop/clear key while a selection item is displayed. The indication for selecting a maintenance item
No. appears.
1-4-77
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U109 Setting the drum type
Description
Description
Sets the type of the drum installed in the copier.
Purpose
To prevent variations in halftone due to differences in drum sensitivity.
Method
Setting
1. Select the drum type using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
G
H
J
Type G
Type H
Type J
Initial setting: H
Completion
U110

Description
Displays the drum counts for checking, clearing or changing the figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the main charger potential output.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the count after replacing the drum during regular maintenance.
Since the count was cleared before shipping, do not clear it when installing.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
2. Press the start key. The count is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the count using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit the maintenance mode without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting
a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-78
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U111
Description
Description
Displays the drum drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the high voltage based on time.
Purpose
To check the drum status. Also used to clear the drive time after replacing the drum.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 2 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the drive time
00 to 59 (min)
00
000 to 999 (min) 000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a
maintenance item No. appears.
U130

Description
Automatically sets the toner sensor control voltage and toner feed start level for the installed developer.
Purpose
To set the initial settings for the developer when installing the machine or replacing the developer.
Method
2. Press the start key. The initial settings for the developer is set, and the result is displayed.
3. Display the setting value for each item by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy
exposure adjustment keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Exp. 4
Toner sensor output value

Absolute humidity
Supplement
The following data is also renewed or cleared by performing this maintenance item:
Renewing the toner sensor control voltage (U131)
Renewing the toner feed start level (U156)
Clearing the developing drive time (U157)
Clearing the developing count (U158)
Resetting the toner feed start level and toner empty detection
Completion
After initial setting is complete, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-79
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U131 Setting the toner sensor control voltage
Description
Description
Displays or changes the toner sensor control voltage automatically set in maintenance item U130.
Purpose
To check the automatically set toner sensor control voltage. Also to change the toner density if an image is too
dark or light.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting for the toner sensor control voltage is displayed.
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
0 to 255
155
Increasing the setting makes the density higher, and decreasing it makes the density lower.
Increasing the setting too high may result in toner scattering.
Completion
U132

Description
Replenishes toner forcibly until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
Purpose
Used when the toner empty is detected frequently.
Method
2. Press the start key. Operation starts, and the current data is displayed.
Toner is replenished until the toner sensor output value reaches the toner feed start level.
3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Exp. 4

Current toner feed start level
Absolute humidity

Completion
Press the stop/clear key when toner replenishment stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
U135

Description
Drives the toner feed motor.
Purpose
To check the operation of the toner feed motor.
Caution
Note that driving the motor unnecessarily long may cause a toner jam, resulting in machine lockup. Be sure to
drive the motor for only a few seconds.
Method
2. Press the start key. The toner feed motor turns on.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-80
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U155 Displaying the toner sensor output
Description
Description
Displays the toner sensor output value, and related data.
Purpose
To check the toner sensor output value.
Method
2. Press the start key. Sampling starts.
3. Display each data by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment
keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2

Current toner feed level (value corrected based on humidity
and drive time)
Absolute humidity
Exp. 3
Exp. 4
4. Press the stop/clear key. The sampling operation stops.

Completion
U156

Description
Changes the toner feed start level set in maintenance item U130 or the toner empty level to be determined by
the difference from the toner feed start level.
Purpose
To check the toner feed start level and toner empty level.
Method
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2

Difference between the toner feed start level and toner empty
level
Setting for the toner feed start level

Description
Setting range
0 to 255
Increasing the setting makes the toner density lower.

Setting for the toner empty level
Description
Setting range
Difference between the toner feed start level and the toner empty level
0 to 255
Increasing the setting makes the toner empty level higher: the toner density is lower when the toner empty
is detected.
Completion
1-4-81
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U157 Checking/clearing the developing drive time
Description
Displays the developing drive time for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference
Purpose
To check the developing drive time after replacing the developer.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 2 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the drive time
00 to 59 (min)
00
000 to 999 (min) 000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
2. Press the start key. The time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
1. Change the drive time (in minutes) using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
2. Press the start key. The time is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the time, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a
U158

Description
Displays the developing count for checking, clearing or changing a figure, which is used as a reference when
correcting the toner control. It is automatically cleared when U130 is executed.
Purpose
To check the developing count after replacing the developer.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
Setting
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting
1-4-82
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U161 Setting the fixing control temperature
Description
Description
Changes the fixing control temperature.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. However, can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper, or solve a
fixing problem on thick paper.
Method
Setting
1. Select the item to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Copy exposure
indicator
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Exp. 4
Description
Setting range
Initial setting

Regular stabilization control temperature
Temperature to be deducted from the
regular control temperature when copying
onto small-sized paper.
115 to 145 (C)

135 to 190 (C)
145 to 220 (C)
0 to 50 (C)
135
160
180
0
The temperatures are to be set such that exp. 2 exp. 1.

Completion
U162

Description
Stops the stabilization fixing drive forcibly, regardless of fixing temperature.
Purpose
To forcibly stabilize the machine before the fixing section reaches stabilization temperature.
Method
2. Press the start key. The forced stabilization mode is entered, and stabilization operation stops regardless
of fixing temperature. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
To exit the forced stabilization mode, turn the power off and on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without executing forced fixing stabilization, press the stop/clear key. The
indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U163

Description
Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fixing section.
Purpose
To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fixing temperature.
Method
1. Press the start key. CLE appears.
2. Press the start key. The fixing problem data is initialized.
Completion
1-4-83
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U196 Turning the fixing heater on
Description
Description
Turns the fixing heater on.
Purpose
To check fixing heater.
Method
2. Press the start key. The fixing heater turns on for 1 s and then turns off.
Completion
Press the stop/clear key when fixing heater is off. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U199

Description
Displays the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Purpose
To check the fixing temperature and the ambient temperature.
Method
2. Display each temperature by lighting the respective copy exposure indicator using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.
Description
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Fixing temperature (C)

Ambient temperature (C)
Completion
U200
Turning all LEDs on

Description
Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on.
Purpose
To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Method
Press the start key. All the LEDs on the operation panel light.
Press the stop/clear key or wait for 10 s. The LEDs turns off, and the indication for selecting a maintenance
item No. appears.
U203
Description
Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DF.
Purpose
To check the DF.
Method
2. Place an original in the DF if running this simulation with paper.
3. Select the item to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Operation
d-P (exp. 1)
d-n (exp. 2)
With paper, single-sided original

Without paper, single-sided original (continuous operation)

Completion
Press the stop/clear key when the operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No.
appears.
1-4-84
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U204 Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter
Description
Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter.
Purpose
It is not necessary to run this maintenance item if a key card is installed on a 120 V specification machine. A key
card is not available for 220 240 V specifications.
Method
Setting
1. Select the optional counter to be installed using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
C-1
C-2
None
The key card is installed
The key counter is installed
2. Press the start key. The setting is set and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U207

Description
Checks operation of the operation panel keys.
Purpose
To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel.
Method
2. 1 appears on the copy quantity display and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights.
3. As the keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bottom,
the figure shown on the copy quantity display increases in increments of 1. When all the keys in that line
are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right, the top
LED in that line will light.
4. When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed, all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds.
5. When the LEDs go off, press the start key. All the LEDs light for 10 seconds again.
Completion
After checking numeric key 1, the operation cannot be canceled until all the keys are checked.
U243
Checking the operation of the DF motors

Description
Turns the motors in the optional DF on.
Purpose
To check the operation of the DF motors.
Method
2. Select the motor to be operated using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Motor
F-0 (exp. 1)
C-0 (exp. 2)
Original feed motor (OFM)

Original paper conveying motor (OCM)
4. To turn each motor off, press the stop/clear key.

Completion
Press the stop/clear key when operation stops. The indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
1-4-85
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U244 Checking the DF switches
Description
Description
Displays the status of the switches in the optional DF.
Purpose
To check if switches in the optional DF operate correctly.
Method
2. Manually turn on and off each switch to check the status. When the on-status of a switch is detected, the
original size indicator or other LED corresponding to the operated switch on the operation panel lights.
LED
Switch
A3/11" 17"
A4R/81/2" 14"
A4/81/2" 11"
B4/LED below 81/2" 11"
B5R/51/2" 81/2"
B5/11" 81/2"
Folio/11" 15"
Maintenance indicator
Memory overflow indicator
Original set switch (PI5)

Original size width switch B (PI4)
Original size width switch C (PI3)
Original size width switch D (PI2)
Original size width switch E (PI1)
DF safety switch 2 (DFSSW2)
DF safety switch 1 (DFSSW1)
Completion
U250

Description
Displays and changes the maintenance cycle.
Purpose
To check and change the maintenance cycle.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting is displayed as follows:
Maintenance cycle (number of copies) = setting 1000
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Maintenance cycle
0 to 600
100
1000 (copies)
For example, when set to 120, the maintenance cycle is set to 120000.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-86
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U251 Checking/clearing the maintenance count
Description
Description
Displays, clears and changes the maintenance count.
Purpose
To check the maintenance count. Also to clear the count during maintenance service.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
Setting
2. Press the start key. The count is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the count, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting
U252

Description
Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination.
Purpose
To be executed after replacing the backup RAM on the main PCB or initializing the backup RAM by running
maintenance item U020, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or initialization.
Method
Setting
1. Select the destination using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
JPn
Inc
EUP
ASA
Metric (Japan) specifications

Inch (North America) specifications
Metric (Europe) specifications
Metric (Asia Pacific) specifications
2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the machine automatically returns to the same status as when
the power is turned on.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the current count, press the stop/clear key. The indication for
Supplement
The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below. To
change the initial settings in those items, be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destination.
Initial setting according to the destinations
Maintenance
Title
item No.
Japan
Inch
Europe Metric,
Asia Pacific
253
Single
Double
Double
120 s
Normal
90 s
Special area
90 s
Special area
255
348
Switching between double and

single counts
Setting the copy density
adjustment range
1-4-87
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U253 Switching between double and single counts
Description
Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
According to user (copy service provider) request, select if A3/11" 17" paper is to be counted as one sheet
(single count) or two sheets (double count).
Method
Setting
1. Select double or single count using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
d-C
S-C
Double count for A3/11" 17" paper only

Single count for all size paper
Initial setting: Double count

2. Press the start key. The setting is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U254

Description
Selects if the auto start function is turned on.
Purpose
Normally no change is necessary. If incorrect operation occurs, turn the function off: this may solve the
problem.
Method
Setting
1. Select either on or oFF using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
on
oFF
Auto start function on

Auto start function off
Initial setting: on
Completion
1-4-88
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U255 Setting auto clear time
Description
Description
Sets the time to return to initial settings after copying is complete.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use. Set to a comparatively long time for continuous copying at the same
settings, and a comparatively short time for frequent copying at various settings.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Auto clear time
0 to 270
90
The setting can be changed by 30 s per step.

When set to 0, the auto clear function is cancelled.
2. Press the start key. The value is set, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
U256

Description
Selects if the auto preheat/energy saver function is turned on. When set to ON, the time to enter preheat/
energy saver mode can be changed in copy management mode.
Purpose
According to user request, to set the preheat time to save energy, or enable copying promptly without the
recovery time from preheat mode.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
on
oFF
Auto preheat/energy saver function on

Auto preheat/energy saver function off
Initial setting: on
When the setting is changed from oFF to on, the auto preheat time is set to the initial setting of 15
minutes.
Completion
1-4-89
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U258 Switching copy operation at toner empty detection
Description
Selects if continuous copying is enabled after toner empty is detected, and sets the number of copies that can
be made after the detection.
Method
Start
2. Select the item by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
Image mode LEDs
Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Description
Switching copy operation at toner empty detection between
single or continuous copying
Photo
Text
Auto Exposure
Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off,
: On
Setting copy operation at toner empty detection between single and continuous copying
1. Select single or continuous copying using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
Sin
Con
Enables only single copying.

Enables single and continuous copying.
Initial setting: Sin

Setting the number of copies after toner empty detection
1. Set the number of copies that can be made using the zoom +/ keys.
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Number of copies after toner empty detection
0 to 200 (copies)
70
The setting can be changed by 5 copies per step.

When set to 0, the number of copies is not limited regardless of the setting for single or continuous copying.
Completion
No. appears.
1-4-90
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U260 Changing the copy count timing
Description
Description
Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters.
Purpose
To be set according to user (copy service provider) request.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the eject section when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper
ejection, copies are provided without copy counts. The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying.
To prevent this, the copy timing should be made earlier.
If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fixing sections when the number of copies is counted
before the paper reaches those sections, copying is charged without a copy being made. To prevent this, the
copy timing should be made later.
Method
Setting
1. Select the copy count timing using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
FEd
EJE
When secondary paper feed starts

When the paper is ejected
Initial setting: EJE

Completion
U265

Description
Sets whether or not to print the product name on the reports that users print.
Purpose
To be set according to user request.
Method
Press the start key. The current setting appears.
Setting
1. Enter 0 or 2 using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.
Setting
Description
0
2
Product name printed

Product name not printed
Initial setting: 0
Completion
1-4-91
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U332 Setting the size conversion factor
Description
Description
Sets the factor for converting each paper size into A4/11" 81/2". The black ratio is converted for the A4/
11" 81/2" size using the factor set in this maintenance item. Values set are displayed in the user simulation.
Purpose
To set the factor to convert the black ratio of each paper size for A4/11" 81/2" size.
Method
2. Select copier or printer mode by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Select the paper size to be set by lighting a copy exposure indicator or making one flash using the copy
Metric specifications
Copy exposure
indicator
Paper size
Setting range
Initial
setting
Setting for the copier mode
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 2 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 4 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 2 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
Exp. 4 (flashing)
Exp. 5 (flashing)
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
Postcard
Folio
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.0
Setting for the printer mode
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 2 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 4 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
Exp. 1 (flashing)
Exp. 2 (flashing)
Exp. 3 (flashing)
Exp. 4 (flashing)
Exp. 5 (flashing)
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
B6
A6
Postcard
Folio
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.7
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.5
1.0
Copy exposure
indicator
Paper size
Setting range
Initial
setting
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 2 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 4 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
11" 17"
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"
51/2" 81/2"
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Exp. 1 (lit)
Exp. 2 (lit)
Exp. 3 (lit)
Exp. 4 (lit)
Exp. 5 (lit)
11" 17"
81/2" 14"
81/2" 11"
51/2" 81/2"
Non-standard
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
0.0 to 3.0
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
1.0
Image mode LEDs
: Off,
: On
Inch specifications
Image mode LEDs
Setting for the copier mode
Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Photo
Text
Setting for the printer mode

Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Photo
Text
: Off, : On
Completion
1-4-92
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U342 Setting the ejection restriction
Description
Description
Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray
is selected as the eject location.
When the restriction is set, the number of sheets that can be ejected continuously to the internal eject tray will
be limited as shown below.
No. of sheets to be ejected
to the internal eject tray
When the job separator is not installed
When the job separator is installed
250
150
Purpose
According to user request, sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
on
oFF
The number of sheets restricted.

The number of sheets not restricted.
Initial setting: on
Completion
1-4-93
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U344 Setting preheat/energy saver mode
Description
Description
Changes the control for preheat/energy saver mode.
Purpose
According to user request, selects which has priority, the recovery time from preheat or energy saver.
Method
Setting
1. Select control mode using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Control in preheat mode
InS (instant ready)
Without decreasing the fixing control temperature, the display

on the operation panel is turned off.
The fixing control temperature is set at 70C/158F. The
copier is forcibly stabilized 30 s after exiting preheat/energy
saver mode.
The fixing control temperature is set at 130C/266F.
ESr (energy star)
Prh (priority to recovery time)
Initial setting: Energy star

Completion
U345

Description
Sets when to indicate that the time for maintenance is about to be reached, by setting the number of copies that
can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends.
When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance
count reaches the set value, the maintenance indicator flashes.
Purpose
To change the time to display the maintenance due indication.
Method
Setting
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
First digit
Last 3 digits
0 to 9
000 to 999
0
000
2. Change the setting value using the numeric or zoom +/ keys.

Completion
1-4-94
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U348 Setting the copy density adjustment range
Description
Description
Selects the adjustment range for copy density from NORMAL and SPECIAL AREA (for wider range).
Purpose
To change the setting according to user request.
When especially dark or light density is requested, set to SPECIAL AREA.
Method
Setting
1. Select the density range using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
SPC (special area)

nrL (normal)
11/15 steps (enlargement mode)

5/9 steps
Initial setting: Normal

Completion
U402

Adjustment
See page 1-6-15.
U403

Adjustment
See page 1-6-38.
U404

Description
Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DF.
Purpose
Used if margins are not correct when the optional DF is used.
Caution
U402
U403
U404
Method
Setting
Copy exposure
indicator
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Change in value
per step
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Exp. 4
Left margin
Leading edge margin
Right margin
Trailing edge margin
0.0 to +10.0
0.0 to +10.0
0.0 to +10.0
0.0 to +10.0
2
3
2
2
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
0.5 mm
Increasing the setting makes the margin wider, and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
1-4-95
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U404
(cont.)
Description
Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(2.5 +1.5
2.0 mm)
DF right margin
(2.5 +1.5
2.0 mm)

(3 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-4-14
Correct margin amount

Interrupt copy mode
Completion
No. appears.
U407

Adjustment
See page 1-6-12.
1-4-96
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U901 Checking/clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
Description
Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations.
Purpose
To check the time to replace consumable parts. Also to clear the counts after replacing the consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the paper feed location (group No.) for which the count is to be checked or cleared by lighting image
mode LEDs using the image mode selection key.
3. Change the indication of the copy quantity display by lighting a copy exposure indicator using the copy
Image mode LED (group No.)
Copy exposure
indicator
Copy quantity display (count value)
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of bypass copy count
Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Exp. 2
Last 3 digits of bypass copy count
Text
Exp. 3
Clearing the count (CLE)
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of paper source 1 copy count
Photo
Text & Photo
Exp. 2
Last 3 digits of paper source 1 copy count
Text
Exp. 3
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
First 3 digits of paper source 2* copy count
Exp. 2
Last 3 digits of paper source 2* copy count
Text
Exp. 3
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
Photo
Text & Photo

Photo
Text & Photo
Exp. 2
Text
Exp. 3
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Text
Exp. 3
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
Clearing all counts (CLE)
Photo
Text & Photo

Photo
Text & Photo

Photo
Text
: Off, : On, : Flashing

* Optional
Note: When no optional paper feed device is installed, the counts corresponding to optional paper feed
devices will not appear.
Clearing copy counts by paper feed locations
1. Select the paper feed location to clear the count.
2. Light exp. 3 using the copy exposure adjustment key.
Clearing copy counts for all paper feed locations
1. Select group 6.
2. Press the start key. The counts are cleared.
Completion
1-4-97
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U903 Checking/clearing the paper jam counts
Description
Description
Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations.
Purpose
To check the paper jam status. Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Display the jam code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The jam count appears. If the jam count is a 4-digit value, the first digit and the last 3
digits are displayed alternately.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The jam code appears again.
J10
Stop/
clear key
10
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
J11
Start key
Stop/
Copy exposure clear key
adjustment keys
CLE
Start key
100
Figure 1-4-15
Clearing all jam counts
1. Display CLE using the copy exposure adjustment keys. Jam counts cannot be cleared individually.
Completion
U904

Description
Displays or clears the service call code counts by types.
Purpose
To check the service call code status by types. Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing
consumable parts.
Method
2. Display the service call code to check the count using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
3. Press the start key. The service call count appears. If the service call count is a 4-digit value, the first digit
and the last 3 digits are displayed alternately.
4. Press the stop/clear key. The service call code appears again.
010
Stop/
clear key
10
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
011
Start key
Stop/
Copy exposure clear key
adjustment keys
Start key
100
Figure 1-4-16
Clearing counts by service call codes
1. Display the service call code to clear the count.
2. Press the reset key. The count is cleared.
Clearing all service call counts
1. Display CLE using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Completion
1-4-98
CLE
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U905 Checking/clearing counts by optional devices
Description
Displays or clears the counts of the optional DF.
Purpose
To check the use of the DF. Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts.
Method
2. Select the count (group No.) to be checked or cleared by lighting image mode LEDs using the image mode
selection key.
Image mode LED (group No.)
Copy exposure
indicator
Exp. 1
Auto Exposure
Text & Photo
Photo
Exp. 2
Text
Exp. 3
2
Auto Exposure
Exp. 1
Text & Photo

Photo
Exp. 2
Text
Exp. 3
: Off,
Copy quantity display (count value)

First 3 digits of the number of original
replacement
Last 3 digits of the number of original
replacement
First 3 digits of the single-sided original feed
count
Last 3 digits of the single-sided original feed
count
: On
Clearing
1. Select the count to be cleared.
2. Light exp. 3 using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Completion
U906

Description
Resets the service call code for partial operation control.
Purpose
To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the drawers or other sections, and the
related parts are serviced.
Method
Display
Operation
on
Canceling the resetting

Executing the resetting
3. Press the start key to reset partial operation control. The maintenance mode is exited, and the machine
1-4-99
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U910 Clearing the black ratio data
Description
Description
Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4/11" 81/2" sheets.
Purpose
To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service.
Method
Display
Operation
on
Canceling the clearing

Executing the clearing
3. Press the start key. The accumulated black ratio data is cleared.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without clearing the data, press the stop/clear key. The indication for selecting a
U917

Description
Selects whether to read out the backup data on the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB or to
write backup data on the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB to the main PCB.
When the memory is initialized (maintenance items U020, U021, U022 and U252), this is set to read out the
backup data from the main PCB to the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB. To write the backup data to the main
PCB from the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB, change the setting before starting writing.
Purpose
Method
2. Select rd or rE using the zoom +/ keys.
Display
Description
rd
rE
Reading out the backup data

Writing the backup data

Completion
1-4-100
2AV/X
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U990 Checking/clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light
Description
Displays or clears the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light.
Purpose
To check duration of use of the exposure lamp. Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after
replacement.
Method
Copy quantity display
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)

Last 3 digits of the lamp-on time (minutes)
Clearing the lamp-on time (CLE)
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
2. Press the start key. The accumulated time is cleared, and the indication for selecting a maintenance item
No. appears.
Completion
To exit this maintenance item without changing the accumulated time, press the stop/clear key. The indication
for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
U992
Checking or clearing the printer count

Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer function when the optional printer board is installed.
Purpose
To check the use of the printer function.
Method
Description
Setting range
Initial setting
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
First 3 digits
Last 3 digits
Clearing the count
000 to 999
000 to 999
000
000
Clearing
1. Light exp. 3.
2. Press the start key. The value is cleared and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Setting
2. Press the start key. The value is set and the indication for selecting a maintenance item No. appears.
Completion
1-4-101
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U993 Outputting a VTC-PG pattern
Description
Description
Selects and outputs a VTC-PG pattern created in the copier.
Purpose
When performing respective image printing adjustments, used to check the machine status apart from that of
the scanner with a non-scanned output VTC-PG pattern.
Method
2. Select the VTC-PG pattern to be output using the copy exposure adjustment keys.
Display
PG pattern to be output
Purpose
Center line adjustment
Lateral squareness adjustment

Magnification adjustment
Checking the fixing performance (fixing pressure)
3. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the PG pattern output mode.
4. Press the start key. A VTC-PG pattern is output.
Completion
1-4-102
2AV/X
Maintenance
item No.
U998 Outputting the memory list
Description
Description
Outputs the list of memory.
Purpose
To output the list as required.
Method
Entering the address
Description
Setting range
Exp. 1
Exp. 2
Exp. 3
Bit 16 to bit 23 of the address

00 to FF
00 to FF
00 to FF
2. Enter the address in hexadecimal using the keys listed below.

Key
Character
Numeric keys
Printer key
Transparency key
Margin key
Book erase key
Border erase key
Layout key
0 to 9
A
B
C
D
E
F
3. Press the start key. The address is set.

Printing the list
1. Press the interrupt key. The machine enters the list output mode.
2. Press the start key. The list is printed.
Completion
1-4-103
2AV/X
1-5-1 Paper misfeed detection

(1) Paper misfeed indication
When a paper misfeed occurs, the copier immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel.
Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903.
To remove paper jammed in the copier, open the front cover, paper conveying unit or drawer.
Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch 1, 2 or 3* off and
on.
*Standard for 20 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.
20 cpm copier
1 Upper drawer
2 Lower drawer
3 Optional drawer 1*
5 Bypass tray
6 Paper conveying section
7 Feedshift section
8 Duplex unit*
9 Inner tray
0 STDF*/SRDF*
1-5
*Optional.
Figure 1-5-1
15 cpm copier
1 Upper drawer
2 Lower drawer*
5 Paper conveying section
6 STDF*
*Optional.
Figure 1-5-2
1-5-1
2AV/X
Jam code
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20
21
22
30
40
50
51
51
60
61
70
71
72
73
73
74
75
76
80
81
82
83
1-5
1-5-2
Contents
No paper feed from copier upper drawer
No paper feed from copier lower drawer
No paper feed from first optional drawer
No paper feed from second optional drawer
No paper feed from bypass
Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section
Misfeed in drawer vertical paper conveying section
Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section
Multiple sheets in copier vertical paper conveying section
Multiple sheets in bypass tray
Misfeed in registration/transfer section
Misfeed in fixing section
Misfeed in eject section
Jam in job separator eject section (job separator)
Jam in feedshift section (duplex unit/finisher)
Jam in duplex paper conveying section 1 (duplex unit/finisher)
Jam in duplex paper conveying section 2 (duplex unit/finisher)
No original feed (STDF/SRDF)
An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 1 (SRDF)
An original jam in the original feed and conveying section 2 (SRDF)
An original jam in the original feed and conveying section (STDF)
An original jam in the original conveying section (SRDF)
An original jam remaining after retries (SRDF)
An original jam in the switchback section 1 (SRDF)
An original jam in the switchback section 2 (SRDF)
Jam between the finisher and copier (finisher)
Jam during batch ejection stanby (finisher)
Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1 (finisher)
Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2 (finisher)
See pape
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-4
P.1-5-5
P.1-5-5
P.1-5-5
P.1-5-6
P.1-5-6
P.1-5-6
P.1-5-6
P.1-5-7
2AV/X
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
ESW
RSW
1-5
DFSW
DFSW (ST) 1
Figure 1-5-3
1-5-3
2AV/X
1. Jam at power-on
One or more of the switches in the paper feed conveying system is on when the main switch is turned on (jam code 00).
2. Paper feed section

No paper feed from copier upper drawer (jam code 10)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 980 ms of the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turning on.
PFCL-U
OFF
ON
RSW
OFF
980 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-1

No paper feed from copier lower drawer*1 (jam code 11)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 3300 ms of the lower paper feed clutch*1 (PFCL-L) turning on.
PFCL-L*1
OFF
ON
RSW
3300 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-2
1-5
No paper feed from first optional drawer (jam code 12)

Drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) does not turn on within 2160 ms of paper feed clutch (ST) 1*2 (PFCL (ST) 1) turning on.
PFCL (ST) 1*2
OFF
ON
DFSW*1
2160 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-3

No paper feed from second optional drawer (jam code 13)
Drawer feed switch (ST) 1*2 (DFSW (ST) 1) does not turn on within 2160 ms of paper feed clutch (ST) 2*2 (PFCL (ST) 2) turning
on.
PFCL (ST) 2*2
OFF
ON
DFSW (ST) 1*2
2160 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-4

No paper feed from bypass (jam code 14)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 1400 ms of the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turning on.
BYPPFCL
OFF
ON
RSW
1400 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-5
*1: Standard for 20 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier. *2: Optional for both 20 cpm and 15 cpm copiers.
1-5-4
2AV/X
Misfeed in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 15)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn on within 3200 ms of the drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) turning on (when paper
is fed from optional drawer 1).
DFSW*1
OFF
ON
RSW
3200 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-6

Misfeed in drawer vertical paper conveying section (jam code 16)
Drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) does not turn on within 2240 ms of drawer feed switch (ST) 1*2 (DFSW (ST) 1) turning on (when
paper is fed from optional drawer 2).
DFSW (ST) 1*2
OFF
ON
DFSW*1
2240 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-7

Multiple sheets in copier paper feed section (jam code 20)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2000
ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the upper drawer).
RSW
OFF
Paper size + 2000 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-8

The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2000
ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the lower drawer*1).
RSW
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-9

Drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper size plus 2000
ms of turning on (when paper is fed from optional drawer 1).
DFSW*1
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-10
1-5-5
1-5
2AV/X
Drawer feed switch (ST) 1*2 (DFSW (ST) 1) does not turn off within the time required to convey the length of the used paper
size plus 2000 ms of turning on (when paper is fed from optional drawer 2).
DFSW (ST) 1*2
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-11

Multiple sheets in copier vertical paper conveying section (jam code 21)
Drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) does not turn off within 2240 ms of drawer feed switch (ST) 1*2 (DFSW (ST) 1) turning off (when
paper is fed from optional drawer 2).
OFF
ON
DFSW (ST) 1*
OFF
2240 ms
ON
DFSW*
Timing chart 1-5-12

Multiple sheets in bypass tray (jam code 22)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 6320 ms of turning on (when paper is fed from the bypass tray).
1-5
RSW
OFF
6320 ms
ON
Timing chart 1-5-13
3. Paper conveying section

Misfeed in registration/transfer section (jam code 30)
The registration switch (RSW) does not turn off within 1740 ms of drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW) turning off (when paper is
fed from optional drawer 1 or 2).
OFF
ON
DFSW*
1740 ms
OFF
ON
RSW
Timing chart 1-5-14
4. Fixing section
Misfeed in fixing section
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2475 ms of the registration clutch (RCL) turning on.
RCL
OFF
ON
ESW
2475 ms
OFF
ON
Timing chart 1-5-15
1-5-6
2AV/X
5. Eject section
Misfeed in eject section
The eject switch (ESW) does not turn off within 2475 ms of the registration switch (RSW) turning off.
OFF
ON
RSW
2475 ms
OFF
ON
ESW
Timing chart 1-5-16
1-5
1-5-7
2AV/X
(3) Paper misfeeds
1-5
Problem
Causes/check procedures
(1)
A paper jam in the
paper feed,
conveying, fixing or
eject section is
indicated as soon as
the main switch is
turned on.
A piece of paper torn from

copy paper is caught
around the registration
switch, the drawer feed
switch*1, drawer feed switch
(ST) 1*2 or the eject switch.
Check visually and remove any found.
Defective registration
switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN3-6 on the main PCB, check if CN3-7

on the main PCB remains low when the registration switch is
turned on and off. If it does, replace the registration switch.
Defective drawer feed

switch*1.
With 5 V DC present at CN8-21 on the main PCB, check if CN823 on the main PCB remains low when the drawer feed switch*1
is turned on and off. If it does, replace the drawer feed switch*1.

switch (ST) 1*2.
With 5 V DC present at CN8-21 on the main PCB, check if CN824 on the main PCB remains low when drawer feed switch (ST)
1*2 is turned on and off. If it does, replace drawer feed switch
(ST) 1*2.
Defective eject switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN12-7 on the main PCB, check if

CN12-6 on the main PCB remains low when the eject switch is
turned on and off. If it does, replace the eject switch.
Paper in the upper drawer

is extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the upper paper

feed pulleys are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed. (see page 16-3).
Broken registration switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the registration switch if its actuator

is broken.
switch.

Check if the upper paper

feed clutch malfunctions.
Check and remedy if necessary.
Electrical problem with the

upper paper feed clutch.
Check (see page 1-5-26).
Paper in the lower

drawer*1 is extremely
curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the lower paper

feed pulleys*1 are
deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 16-5).

actuator.

is broken.
switch.

Check if the lower paper

feed clutch*1 malfunctions.

lower paper feed clutch*1.
(2)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from copier
upper drawer).
(3)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from copier
lower drawer*1).
Corrective measures
1-5-8
2AV/X
Problem
(4)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from optional
drawer 1*2).
(5)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from optional
drawer 2*2).
(6)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (no paper
feed from bypass).
Corrective measures
Paper in optional drawer

1*2 is extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed

pulleys of optional drawer
1*2 are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed.
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.
Check visually and replace the drawer feed switch*1 if its

actuator is broken.

switch*1.
Check if paper feed clutch

(ST) 1*2 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with

paper feed clutch (ST) 1*2.
Paper in optional drawer

2*2 is extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the paper feed

pulleys of optional drawer
2*2 are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed.
Broken drawer feed switch

(ST) 1*2 actuator.
Check visually and replace drawer feed switch (ST) 1*2 if its
actuator is broken.

switch (ST) 1*2.
(ST) 1*2.
Check if paper feed clutch

(ST) 2*2 malfunctions.
Electrical problem with

paper feed clutch (ST) 2*2.
Paper in the bypass tray is

extremely curled.
Change the paper.
Check if the bypass paper

feed pulleys are deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulleys if deformed (see page 16-6).

actuator.

is broken.
switch.

turned on and off. If not, replace the registration switch.
Check if the bypass paper

feed clutch malfunctions.

bypass paper feed clutch.
1-5
1-5-9
2AV/X
Problem
(7)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (jam in
copier vertical paper
conveying section).
(8)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (jam in
drawer vertical
paper conveying
section).
1-5
(9)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in paper feed
section).
(10)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in vertical
paper conveying
section).
Corrective measures
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.

actuator is broken.

switch*1.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.


(ST) 1*2 actuator.
actuator is broken.

switch (ST) 1*2.
(ST) 1*2.
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.

actuator is broken.

switch*1.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.

Check if the right and left

registration rollers contact
each other.
Check visually and remedy if necessary.
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.

actuator is broken.

switch*1.

(ST) 1*2 actuator.
actuator is broken.

switch (ST) 1*2.
(ST) 1*2.

(ST) 1*2 actuator.
actuator is broken.

switch (ST) 1*2.
(ST) 1*2.
1-5-10
2AV/X
Problem
(10)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in vertical
paper conveying
section).
(11)
A paper jam in the
paper feed section
is indicated during
copying (multiple
sheets in bypass).
(12)
A paper jam in the
paper conveying
section is indicated
during copying (jam
in registration/
transfer section).
(13)
A paper jam in the
fixing section is
indicated during
copying (jam in
fixing section).
(14)
A paper jam in the
eject section is
indicated during
copying (jam in eject
section).
Corrective measures
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.

actuator is broken.

switch*1.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.

Check if the right and left

registration rollers contact
each other.
Broken drawer feed

switch*1 actuator.

actuator is broken.

switch*1.

actuator.

is broken.
switch.

Check if the registration

clutch malfunctions.

registration clutch.
Broken eject switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is

broken.


actuator.

is broken.
switch.

Broken eject switch

actuator.
Check visually and replace the eject switch if its actuator is

broken.

1-5-11
1-5
2AV/X
1-5-2 Self-diagnosis
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled. On the 20 cpm copier,
the problem is displayed as a code consisting of "C" followed by a number between 011 and 821, indicating the nature of the
problem. A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
On the 15 cpm copier, "C" and a number between 011 and 821 altenates, indicating the nature of the problem.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switch 1, 2 or 3* off and back on.
*Optional for the 15 cpm copier.
(2) Self diagnostic codes
Code
1-5
Remarks
Contents
Causes
Check procedures/corrective measures
C011
Backup memory data problem

Data in the specified area of the
backup memory does not match the
specified values.
Defective main
PCB.
Replace the main PCB and check for

correct operation.
C021
Operation unit PCB communication

problem (20 cpm copier only)
There is no reply after 20 retries at
communication.
Defective main
PCB.

correct operation.
C034
Finisher* communication problem

Communication errors from the
communication microcomputer on the
main PCB:
No communication: there is no reply
after 3 retries.
Abnormal communication: a
communication error (parity or
checksum error) is detected five times
in succession.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN17

and CN18 on the main PCB and the
finisher main PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals. Repair or
replace if necessary.
Defective copier
main PCB.

correct operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.
Replace the finisher main PCB and check

for correct operation.
C040
DIMM* problem
Information on DIMM cannot be read
out correctly at power-on.
Poor contact of
the memory
board**.
Check the insertion of the memory board**.
C041
Bitmap problem
There is a problem with the data or
address bus of the bitmap DRAM.
Poor contact of
the DIMM.
Check the insertion of the DIMM into

connector CN2 on the memory board (for
the 15 cpm copier).
Check the insertion of the DIMM into
connector CN34 on the main PCB (for the
20 cpm copier).
C043
*: Optional
1-5-12
DMA problem
DMA transmission of compressed,
decompressed, rotated, relocated or
blanked-out image data does not
complete within the specified period
of time.
Defective main
PCB.
**: Optional for the 15 cpm copier only.

correct operation.
2AV/X
Code
Contents
C100
Exposure lamp problem

Check the CCD input value for the
lighting status of the exposure lamp
100 ms after the exposure lamp is lit
and the carriage is moved to the
shading position. If the exposure lamp
does not light, turn off the lamp. After
500 ms, light the lamp again and, a
further 500 ms later, check the CCD
input.
The exposure lamp does not light
after 5 retries.
C104
C200
C310
C400
Optical system problem

After AGC, correct input is not
obtained at CCD.
Drive motor problem

LOCK ALM signal remains high for 1
s, 1 s after the drive motor has turned
on.
Scanner carriage problem

The home position is not correct
when the power is turned on or at the
start of copying using the contact
glass.
Polygon motor synchronization

problem
The polygon motor does not reach a
stable speed within 19 s of the polygon
motor remote signal turning on.
Remarks
Causes
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN24,

CN23, CN22 and CN3 on the main PCB,
and the continuity across the connector
terminals. Repair or replace if necessary.
Defective
exposure lamp.
Replace the exposure lamp or inverter

PCB.
Defective main
PCB.

correct operation.
Incorrect shading
position.
Adjust the position of the contact glass

(shading plate). If the problem still occurs,
replace the scanner home position switch.
CCD PCB output

problem.
Replace the ISU.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN23,

CN22 and CN3 on the main PCB, and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Repair or replace if necessary.
CCD PCB output

problem.
Replace the ISU.
Defective main
PCB.

correct operation.
Poor contact of
the drive motor
connector
terminals.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for

continuity within the connector cable. If
none, repair or replace the cable.
Defective drive
motor rotation
control circuit.
Replace the drive motor.
Defective drive
transmission
system.
Check if the rollers and gears rotate

smoothly. If not, grease the bushings and
gears. Check for broken gears and replace
if any.
Poor contact of
the connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connectors CN28

and CN25 on the main PCB and the
continuity across the connector terminals.
Remedy or replace if necessary.
Defective scanner
home position
switch.
Replace the scanner home position switch.
Defective main
PCB.

correct operation.
Defective scanner
motor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Poor contact of
the polygon motor
connector
terminals.

1-5
1-5-13
2AV/X
Code
Contents
C401
Polygon motor steady-state problem

The polygon motor rotation is not
stable for 400 ms after the polygon
motor rotation has been stabilized.
C420
C510
BD steady-state problem
The VTC detects a BD error for 800
ms after the polygon motor rotation
has been stabilizad.
Main charger problem

MC ALM signal is detected
continuously for 800 ms when MC
REM signal is turned on.
1-5
C610
1-5-14
Broken fixing heater wire

Warm-up does not end within 90 s.
The secondary stabilization fixing
temperature drops to 100C/212F or
below.
The fixing temperature remains below
40C/104F for 7 s or longer after the
fixing heaters have been turned on.
Remarks
Causes
Poor contact of
the polygon motor
connector
terminals.

Defective power
source PCB.
Check if 24 V DC is present at CN3-1 and

CN3-2 on the power source PCB. If not,
replace the power source PCB.
Poor contact of
the laser scanner
unit connector
terminals.

Defective LSU.
Replace the LSU.
Defective main
PCB.

correct operation.
Poor contact of
the high-voltage
transformer PCB
connector
terminals.

Defective highvoltage
transformer PCB.
Replace the high-voltage transformer

PCB.
Leakage during
main charging.
Check and clean the main charger

assembly.
Deformed highvoltage
transformer PCB
terminal spring.
Replace the spring.
Fixing heater
installed
incorrectly.
Check and reinstall if necessary.
Broken fixing
heater wire.
Check for continuity. If none, replace fixing

heater.
Poor contact in
the fixing unit
thermistor
connector
terminals.
Check the connection of connector CN12

on the main PCB and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Remedy or
Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace

the fixing unit thermistor.
Fixing unit
thermistor
installed
incorrectly.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the

fixing unit thermostat. Check the operation
of the cooling fan and repair if necessary.
2AV/X
Code
Contents
C620
Abnormally low fixing unit

thermistor temperature
The fixing temperature remains below
100C/212F for 10 s during copying.
C630
C710
C730
Remarks
Causes
Fixing heater
installed
incorrectly.
Broken fixing
heater wire.
Check for continuity. If none, replace fixing

heater.
Poor contact in
the fixing unit
thermistor
connector
terminals.

on the main PCB and the continuity across
the connector terminals. Remedy or
Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace

Fixing unit
thermistor
installed
incorrectly.
Fixing unit
thermostat
triggered.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the

fixing unit thermostat. Check the operation
of the cooling fan and repair if necessary.
Abnormally high fixing unit

thermistor temperature
The fixing temperature exceeds
240C/464F for 10 s.
Shorted fixing unit

thermistor.
Measure the resistance. If it is 0 , replace

Broken fixing
heater control
circuit on the
power source
PCB.
Replace the power source PCB.
Toner sensor problem

The sensor output voltage is outside
the range of 0.5 to 4.5 V during toner
control.
The toner sensor control voltage
cannot be set within the setting range
when maintenance item U130 is run.
Defective toner
sensor.
Replace the toner sensor.
Poor contact of
the toner sensor
connector
terminals.

Developer
problem.
Replace the developer.
Poor contact of
the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.

Defective external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB.
Broken external temperature

thermistor wire
The input voltage is above 4.5 V.
1-5-15
1-5
2AV/X
Code
Contents
C731
Short-circuited external temperature

thermistor
The input voltage is below 0.5 V.
Remarks
Causes
Poor contact of
the humidity
sensor PCB
connector
terminals.

Defective external
temperature
thermistor.
Replace the humidity sensor PCB.
Image formation unit connector

insertion problem
Absence of the image formation unit
is detected continuously for 1500 ms
while there is no error on the copier.
Image formation
unit connector
inserted
incorrectly.
Reinsert the image formation unit

connector if necessary.
Defective image
formation unit
connector.
Replace the image formation unit.
C817
Finisher* front side registration

motor problem
A problem is
detected with the
front side
registration motor.
See the finisher service manual.
C818
Finisher* rear side registration

motor problem
A problem is
detected with the
rear side
registration motor.
C819
Finisher* trailing edge registration

motor problem
A problem is
detected with the
trailing edge
registration motor.
C821
Finisher* stapler motor problem
A problem is
detected with the
stapler motor.
C740
1-5
*: Optional
1-5-16
**: Optional for the 15 cpm copier only.
2AV/X
1-5-3 Image formation problems

(1) No image appears
(entirely white).

(entirely black).
(3) Image is too light.
(4) Background is visible.
See page 1-5-18
See page 1-5-18
(5) A white line appears

longitudinally.
(6) A black line appears

longitudinally.

laterally.
(8) One side of the copy

image is darker than
the other.
See page 1-5-19
See page 1-5-20
See page 1-5-20
See page 1-5-20
(9) Black dots appear on

the image.
See page 1-5-21

(13) Paper creases.
See page 1-5-22

(17) Image is out of focus.
See page 1-5-23
(10) Image is blurred.
See page 1-5-21

(14) Offset occurs.
See page 1-5-22

(18) Image center does not
align with the original
center.
See page 1-5-23
See page 1-5-19
(11) The leading edge of the

image is consistently
misaligned with the
original.
See page 1-5-21

(15) Image is partly missing.
See page 1-5-19
(12) The leading edge of the

image is sporadically
misaligned with the
original.
See page 1-5-22

(16) Fixing is poor.
See page 1-5-23
See page 1-5-23
(19) Image is not square.
(20) Image contrast is low

(carrier scattering).
See page 1-5-24
See page 1-5-24
1-5-17
1-5
2AV/X
(entirely white).
Causes
1. No transfer charging.
Causes
1. No transfer charging.
A. Broken transfer wire.
Replace or repair the wire.
B. The connector terminals of the high-voltage

transformer PCB make poor contact.
Reinsert the connector. Also check for continuity within the

connector cable. If none, remedy or replace the cable.
C. Defective main PCB
Check if CN4-5 on the main PCB goes low when maintenance item
U101 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.
D. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1-5 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U101 is
run. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.
1-5
(entirely black).
Causes
1. No main charging.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.
Causes
1. No main charging.
A. Broken main charger wire.
Replace the wire.
B. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
C. The connector terminals of the high-voltage

transformer PCB make poor contact.

D. Defective main PCB.
E. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if main charging takes place when CN1-7 on the high-voltage

transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run. If
not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.
2. Exposure lamp fails to light.

A. The connector terminals of the exposure
lamp make poor contact.

B. Defective inverter PCB.
Check if the exposure lamp lights when CN1-5 and 1-6 on the
inverter PCB go low while maintenance item U061 is run. If not,
replace the inverter PCB.
C. Defective main PCB.
Check if CN24-1 and 24-2 on the main PCB go low when

maintenance item U061 is run. If not, replace the main PCB.
1-5-18
2AV/X
(3) Image is too
light.
Causes
1. Insufficient toner.
2. Deteriorated developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Causes
1. Insufficient toner.
If the display shows the message requesting toner replenishment,

replace the cartridge.
Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it

has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
3. Dirty or deteriorated drum.
Clean the drum or, if the maintenance level has been reached,
replace the drum (see page 1-6-43).
(4) Background is visible.
1-5
Causes
Causes
(5) A white line appears

longitudinally.
Check the number of copies made with the current developer. If it

has reached the specified limit, replace the developer.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
3. Flawed drum.
4. Dirty shading plate.
Causes
1. Dirty or flawed main charger wire.
Clean the main charger wire or, if it is flawed, replace it.
2. Foreign matter in the developing section.
Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly. If not, replace the

developer.
3. Flawed drum.
Replace the drum (see page 1-6-43).
4. Dirty shading plate.
Clean the shading plate.
1-5-19
2AV/X
longitudinally.
Causes
1. Dirty contact glass.
2. Dirty or flawed drum.
3. Deformed or worn cleaning blade.
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Causes
Clean the contact glass.
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-43).
Replace the cleaning blade (see page 1-6-46).
4. Dirty scanner mirror.
Clean the scanner mirror.
(7) A black line appears laterally.
Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
1-5
Causes
1. Flawed drum.
2. Dirty developing section.
Clean any part contaminated with toner or carrier in the developing

section.
3. Leaking main charger housing.
Clean the main charger wire, grid and shield.
(8) One side of the

copy image is
darker than the
other.
Causes
1. Dirty main charger wire.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Causes
1. Dirty main charger wire.
Clean the wire or, if it is extremely dirty, replace it.
2. Defective exposure lamp.
Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly. If not, replace

the exposure lamp (see page 1-6-19).
1-5-20
2AV/X
(9) Black dots appear
on the image.
Causes
Causes
Clean the drum or, if it is flawed, replace it (see page 1-6-43).
Clean the contact glass.
(10) Image is blurred.
Causes
1. Scanner moves erratically.
2. Deformed press roller.
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Causes
1-5
1. Scanner moves erratically.
Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner
rails. If any, remove it.
2. Deformed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-53).
3. Paper conveying section drive problem.
Check the gears and belts and, if necessary, grease them.
(11) The leading edge of

the image is consistently misaligned with
the original.
Causes
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge
registration.
Causes
1. Misadjusted leading edge registration.
Readjust the leading edge registration (see pages 1-6-12).
2. Misadjusted scanner leading edge

registration.
Readjust the scanner leading edge registration (see page 1-6-36).
1-5-21
2AV/X
(12) The leading edge of
the image is sporadically misaligned with
the original.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch
or paper feed clutch installed or operating
incorrectly.
Causes
1. Registration clutch, bypass paper feed clutch Check the installation position and operation of the registration
or paper feed clutch installed or operating
clutch, bypass paper feed clutch and paper feed clutches. If any of
incorrectly.
them operates incorrectly, replace it.
(13) Paper creases.
Causes
1. Paper curled.
2. Paper damp.
3. Defective pressure springs.
1-5
Causes
1. Paper curled.
Check the paper storage conditions.
2. Paper damp.
Replace the pressure springs.
(14) Offset occurs.
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
Causes
1. Defective cleaning blade.
1-5-22
2AV/X
Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
3. Drum condensation.
4. Flawed drum.
(15) Image is partly missing.
Causes
1. Paper damp.
2. Paper creased.
Replace the paper.
3. Drum condensation.
Clean the drum.
4. Flawed drum.
(16) Fixing is poor.
Causes
1. Wrong paper.
3. Flawed press roller.
Causes
1. Wrong paper.
Check if the paper meets specifications.
Replace the pressure springs.
3. Flawed press roller.
Replace the press roller (see page 1-6-53).
(17) Image is out of

focus.
1-5
Causes
1. Defective image scanning unit.
Causes
1. Defective image scanning unit.
Replace the image scanning unit (see page 1-6-28).
(18) Image center does not Causes

align with the original 1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
center.
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Causes
1. Misadjusted center line of image printing.
Readjust the center line of image printing (see pages 1-6-13 and
14).
2. Misadjusted scanner center line.
Readjust the scanner center line (see page 1-6-37).
3. Original placed incorrectly.
Place the original correctly.
1-5-23
2AV/X
(19) Image is not
square.
Causes
1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.
Causes
1. Laser scanner unit positioned incorrectly.
Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit

(see page 1-6-26).
2. Image scanning unit positioned incorrectly.
Adjust the installation position of the image scanning unit

(see page 1-6-30).
(20) Image contrast is

low (carrier scattering).
Causes
1. No developing bias output.
1-5
Causes
1. No developing bias output.

A. Developing bias wire makes poor contact.
Check the developing bias wire. If there are any problems, replace it.
B. Defective main PCB.
C. Defective high-voltage transformer PCB.
Check if developing bias is output when there is no problem with the

main PCB while maintenance item U030 is run. If not, replace the
high-voltage transformer PCB.
1-5-24
2AV/X
1-5-4 Electrical problems

Problem
Causes
No electricity at the power

outlet.
Measure the input voltage.
The power cord is not

plugged in properly.
Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet.
The front cover, paper

conveying unit and/or
lower drawer left cover*1
are/is not closed
completely.
Check the front cover, paper conveying unit and lower drawer
left cover*1.
Broken power cord.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cord.
Defective main switch.
Check for continuity across the contacts. If none, replace the

main switch.
Blown fuse in the power

source PCB.
Check for continuity. If none, remove the cause of blowing and

replace the fuse.
Defective safety switch 1,

2 or 3*1.
Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If none,

replace the switch.
Defective power source

PCB.
With AC present, check for 3.3 V DC at CN3-9 on the power

source PCB, 5 V DC at CN3-5 and CN3-6, 12 V DC at CN4-3
and 24 V DC at CN3-1 and CN3-2. If none, replace the power
source PCB.
Poor contact in the drive

motor connector terminals.

Broken drive motor gear.
Check visually and replace the drive motor if necessary.
Defective drive motor.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if the drive motor

operates when CN12-16 on the main PCB goes low. If not,
replace the drive motor.
(3)
The scanner motor
does not operate.
Broken scanner motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the scanner
motor.
Poor contact in the

scanner motor connector
terminals.

(4)
The toner feed
motor does not
operate.
Broken toner feed motor

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the toner
feed motor.
Poor contact in the toner

feed motor connector
terminals.

connector cable. If none, repair or replace the cable.
(5)
Cooling fan motor 1
does not operate.
Broken cooling fan motor 1

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace cooling fan
motor 1.
Poor contact in the cooling

fan motor 1 connector
terminals.

(6)
Cooling fan motor 2
does not operate.

coil.
motor 2.
(1)
The machine does
not operate when
the main switch is
turned on.
(2)
The drive motor
does not operate
(C200).

terminals.
*1: Optional for 15 cpm copier. *2: For 20 cpm copier only. *3: Optional for 220-240 V specifications of 15 cpm copier.
*4: Optional for both 20 cpm and 15 cpm copiers.
1-5-25
1-5
2AV/X
Problem
Causes
(7)
Cooling fan motor 3
does not operate.

coil.
motor 3.

terminals.

(8)
The drawer drive
motor*1 does not
operate.
Broken drawer drive

motor*1 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the drawer
drive motor*1.
Poor contact in the drawer

drive motor*1 connector
terminals.

(9)
The registration
clutch does not
operate.
Broken registration clutch

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the

registration clutch.
Poor contact in the

registration clutch
connector terminals.

(10)
The upper paper
feed clutch does not
operate.
Broken upper paper feed

clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the upper
paper feed clutch.
Poor contact in the upper

paper feed clutch

(11)
The lower paper
feed clutch*1 does
not operate.
Broken lower paper feed

clutch*1 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the lower
paper feed clutch*1.
Poor contact in the lower

paper feed clutch*1

Broken paper feed clutch

(ST) 1*4 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feed
clutch (ST) 1*4.
Poor contact in paper feed

clutch (ST) 1*4 connector
terminals.

(13)
Paper feed clutch
(ST) 2*4 does not
operate.
Broken paper feed clutch

(ST) 2*4 coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace paper feed
clutch (ST) 2*4.
Poor contact in paper feed

clutch (ST) 2*4 connector
terminals.

(14)
The bypass paper
feed clutch does not
operate.
Broken bypass paper feed

clutch coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the bypass
paper feed clutch.
Poor contact in the bypass

paper feed clutch

(15)
The cleaning lamp
does not turn on.
Poor contact in the

cleaning lamp connector
terminals.

Defective cleaning lamp.
Check for continuity. If none, replace the cleaning lamp.
1-5
(12)
Paper feed clutch
(ST) 1*4 does not
operate.
1-5-26
2AV/X
Problem
Causes
Poor contact in the

exposure lamp connector
terminals.

Defective inverter PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn on when CN24-1 and CN24-2
on the inverter PCB are held low, replace the inverter PCB.
(17)
The exposure lamp
does not turn off.
Defective inverter PCB.
If the exposure lamp does not turn off when CN24-1 and CN24-2
on the inverter PCB are held high, replace the inverter PCB.
(18)
The fixing heater
does not turn on
(C610).
Broken wire in fixing

heater.
Check for continuity across the heater. If none, replace the

heater.
Fixing unit thermostat

triggered.
Check for continuity across the thermostat. If none, remove the

cause and replace the thermostat.
Broken fixing unit

thermistor wire.
Measure the resistance. If it is , replace the fixing unit

thermistor.
(19)
The fixing heater
does not turn off.
Dirty sensor part of the

fixing unit thermistor.
Check visually and clean the thermistor sensor parts.
(20)
Main charging is not
performed (C510).
Broken main charger wire.
See page 1-5-18.
(16)
The exposure lamp
does not turn on.
1-5
Leaking main charger

housing.
Poor contact in the highvoltage transformer PCB
Defective main PCB.
Defective high- voltage
transformer PCB .
(21)
Transfer charging is
not performed.

See page 1-5-18.
Defective main PCB.

Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB .
(22)
No developing bias
is output.
(23)
The original size is
not detected.
Poor contact in the

developing bias wire.
Check the developing bias wire. If there is any problem, replace

it.


Defective high-voltage
transformer PCB .
Check if the developing bias is output when CN1-3 on the highvoltage transformer PCB goes low while maintenance item U030
is run. If not, replace the high-voltage transformer PCB.
Defective original
detection switch*3.
Check if CN25-2 on the main PCB goes low when the original
detection switch*3 is turned on and off. If not, replace the original
detection switch*3.
1-5-27
2AV/X
Problem
1-5
Causes
Original is not placed

correctly.
Check the original and correct if necessary.
Poor contact in the original

size detection sensor

Defective original size

detection sensor.
Check if the sensor operates correctly. If not, replace it.
(25)
The message
requesting paper to
be loaded is shown
when paper is
present in the upper
drawer.
Poor contact in the upper

paper switch connector
terminals.

Defective upper paper

switch.
Check if CN3-10 on the main PCB goes low when the upper
paper switch is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN3-11 on the
main PCB. If not, replace the upper paper switch.
(26)
The message
requesting paper to
be loaded is shown
when paper is
present in the lower
drawer*1.
Poor contact in the lower

paper switch*1 connector
terminals.

Defective lower paper

switch*1.
Check if CN8-15 on the main PCB goes low when the lower
paper switch* is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN8-21 on the
main PCB. If not, replace the lower paper switch*1.
(27)
The message
requesting paper to
be loaded is shown
when paper is
present on the
bypass tray.*3

paper switch*3 connector
terminals.

Defective bypass paper

switch*3 .
Check if CN25-2 on the main PCB goes low when the bypass
paper switch*3 is turned on with 5 V DC present at CN25-3 on
the main PCB. If not, replace the bypass paper switch*3 .
(28)
The size of paper in
the upper drawer is
not displayed
correctly.
Poor contact in upper

paper size switch 1

Defective upper paper size

switch 1.
Check if CN9-2 on the main PCB goes low when upper paper
size switch 1 is turned on. If not, replace upper paper size switch
1.

paper size switch 2


switch 2.
2.

paper size switch 3


switch 3.
3.
(24)
The original size is
not detected
correctly.
1-5-28
2AV/X
Problem
Causes
(28)
the upper drawer is
not displayed
correctly.

paper size switch 4


switch 4.
4.
(29)
the lower drawer*1
is not displayed
correctly.
Poor contact in the

connector terminals of
lower paper size switch
1*1, 2*1, 3*1 or 4*1.
Check for continuity across the connector terminals. If none,

replace them.
Defective lower paper size

switch 1*1, 2*1, 3*1 or 4*1.
Check for continuity across each of lower paper size switches

1*1, 2*1, 3*1 and 4*1. If there is no continuity when each switch is
on, replace lower paper size switch 1*1, 2*1, 3*1 or 4*1.
(30)
The printing width of
the paper on the
bypass tray is not
detected correctly.*2

size detection PCB

Defective bypass size

detection PCB.
Check for continuity between CN6-7 and each of CN6-4, CN6-5

and CN6-6. If the continuity status does not change when the
position of the bypass slider is changed, replace the bypass
paper size detection PCB.
(31)
A paper jam in the
paper feed, paper
conveying or fixing
section is indicated
when the main

around the drawer feed
switch*, registration
switch or eject switch.
Check and remove if any.

switch*1.
switch.


(32)
The message
requesting covers to
be closed is
displayed when the
front cover, paper
conveying unit and
lower drawer left
cover*1 are closed.
Poor contact in the

connector terminals of
safety switch 1, 2 or 3*1.

Defective safety switch 1,

2 or 3*1.
Check for continuity across the contacts of each switch. If there

is no continuity when the switch is on, replace it.
(33)
Others.
Wiring is broken, shorted

or makes poor contact.
Check for continuity. If none, repair.
Noise.
Locate the source of noise and remove.
1-5-29
1-5
2AV/X
1-5-5 Mechanical problems

Problem
(1)
No primary paper feed.
Check if the surfaces of the following pulleys

are dirty with paper powder: upper paper
feed pulleys, lower paper feed pulleys* and
bypass paper feed pulleys.
Clean with isopropyl alcohol.
Check if the paper feed pulleys are

deformed.
Check visually and replace any deformed

pulleys (see page 1-6-3).
Electrical problem with the following

electromagnetic clutches: upper paper feed
clutch, lower paper feed clutch* and bypass
paper feed clutch.
See pages 1-5-26.
Check if the surfaces of the left and right

registration rollers are dirty with paper
powder.
Electrical problem with the registration

clutch.
See page 1-5-26.
Width guide in a drawer installed incorrectly.
Check the width guide visually and correct

or replace if necessary.
Deformed width guide in a drawer.
Repair or replace if necessary .
Check if a pressure spring along the paper

conveying path is deformed or out of place.
Repair or replace.
(4)
The scanner does not
travel.
Check if the scanner wire is loose.
Reinstall the scanner wire (see page 1-621).
The scanner motor malfunctions.
See page 1-5-25.
(5)
Multiple sheets of paper
are fed at one time.
Deformed drawer claw.
Check the drawer claw visually and correct

or replace if necessary.
Check if the paper is curled.
Change the paper.
(6)
Paper jams.
Check if the paper is excessively curled.
Change the paper.
Deformed guides along the paper conveying

path.
Check visually and replace any deformed

guides.
Check if the contact between the right and

left registration rollers is correct.

Replace the pressure spring if it is
deformed.
Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or

deformed.
Clean or replace the press roller.
Check if the contact between the heat roller

and its separation claws is correct.
Repair if any springs are off the separation

claws.
(7)
Toner drops on the
paper conveying path.
Check if the developing section of the image

formation unit is extremely dirty.
Clean the developing section of the image

formation unit.
(8)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
Check if the pulleys, rollers and gears

operate smoothly.
Grease the bearings and gears.
Check if the following electromagnetic

clutches are installed correctly: upper paper
feed clutch, lower paper feed clutch* and
bypass paper feed clutch.
Correct.
(2)
No secondary paper
feed.
(3)
Skewed paper feed.
1-5
*Optional for 15 cpm copier.
1-5-30
Corrective measures
2AV/X
1-6-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly

(1) Precautions
Be sure to turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug before starting disassembly.
When handling PCBs, do not touch connectors with bare hands or damage the board.
Do not touch any PCB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge.
Use only the specified parts to replace the fixing unit thermostat. Never substitute electric wires, as the copier may be
seriously damaged.
Use the following testers when measuring voltages:
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
* Capable of measuring RMS values.
Prepare the following as test originals:
1. NTC (new test chart)
2. NPTC (newspaper test chart)
1-6
1-6-1
2AV/X
(2) Running a maintenance item
Start
Enter 10871087 using

the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the cursor up/down keys
(20 cpm), the zoom +/ keys (15 cpm)
or numeric keys.
Maintenance mode is entered.
The maintenance item is

selected.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Yes
Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
1-6
Yes
Run another maintenance

item?
No
Enter 001 using the cursor up/down

keys (20 cpm), the zoom +/ keys (15 cpm)
or numeric keys and press the start key.
End
1-6-2
Maintenance mode is exited.
2AV/X
1-6-2 Paper feed section

(1) Detaching and refitting the upper and lower paper feed pulleys
Follow the procedure below to replace the paper feed pulleys.
Procedure
Upper paper feed pulleys
1. Open the bypass tray and paper conveying
unit and then remove the rear and rear left
covers. Pull out the upper drawer.
2. Remove the screw and then the handle (rear
side of the machine).
3. Remove the two screws, release the wires
from the clamps and then detach the shaft
handle retainer at the machine rear.
Shaft handle retainer

Handle
Figure 1-6-1
4. Remove the stop ring and then the paper
feed clutch.
When refitting, insert the cutout in the paper
feed clutch over the stopper on the copier.
Cutout
Stop ring
1-6
Paper feed cluth
Figure 1-6-2
5. Remove the E ring and bushing from the
paper feed shaft unit (machine rear).
E ring
Bushing
Figure 1-6-3
1-6-3
2AV/X
6. Open the front cover and remove the image
formation unit (see page 1-6-40).
7. Remove the stop ring from the paper feed
shaft unit (machine front).
Stop ring
Figure 1-6-4
8. Push the paper feed shaft unit toward the
machine rear (in the direction of 1) and
remove the unit from the lower front side (in
the direction of 2).
1-6
Paper feed shaft unit
Figure 1-6-5
9. Remove the screw holding each of the upper
paper feed pulleys and then the pulleys.
10. Replace the upper paper feed pulleys and
refit all the removed parts.
Before returning the drawer, turn the main
switch on and check that the upper paper
feed pulleys are positioned correctly (the
semicircular pulleys should be facing
downward).
Upper paper feed pulleys
Figure 1-6-6
1-6-4
2AV/X
Lower peper feed pulleys (optional for the 15 cpm copier)
1. Open the lower drawer left cover and pull the
lower drawer out.
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear
cover of the lower drawer and then the cover.
3. Turn the drawer drive motor clockwise and
rotate the paper feed shaft unit so that the
screws holding the lower paper feed pulleys
can be seen when the left cover is opened.
Drawer drive motor
Figure 1-6-7
4. Remove the screws holding each of the lower
paper feed pulleys and then the pulleys.
5. Replace the lower paper feed pulleys and
Before returning the drawer, turn the main
switch on and check that the lower paper
feed pulleys are positioned correctly (the
semicircular pulleys should be facing
downward).
Lower peper feed pulleys
1-6
Screws
Figure 1-6-8
1-6-5
2AV/X
(2) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper feed pulley
Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper feed pulley.
Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray, paper conveying unit
and front cover and then remove the image
2. Remove the screw and then the fulcrum pin.
Fulcrum pin
Figure 1-6-9
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the
paper conveying unit.
Connector
Figure 1-6-10
4. Remove the two screws holding the lower left
Lower left cover
Figure 1-6-11
1-6-6
2AV/X
5. Remove the rear screw of the bypass paper
feed pulley and then the pulley.
Bypass paper feed pulley
Figure 1-6-12
6. Replace the bypass paper feed pulley and
When refitting, check that the cam on the
rear of the shaft is correctly positioned (see
figure 1-6-13).
1-6
Cam
Figure 1-6-13
1-6-7
2AV/X
(3) Detaching and refitting the left registration cleaner assembly
Follow the procedure below to replace the left registration cleaner assembley.
Procedure
unit.
2. Remove the transfer roller unit (see page 1-647).
3. While rotating the left registration roller in the
direction of the arrow in the diagram, remove
the left registration cleaner assembly.
4. Replace the left registration cleaner assembly
and refit all the removed parts.
Left registration roller
Left registration cleaner assembley
Figure 1-6-14
(4) Detaching and refitting the right registration cleaner assembly

Follow the procedure below to replace the right registration cleaner assembly.
1-6
Procedure
and front cover and then remove the image
2. Remove the right registration cleaner unit by
lifting its front first.
3. Replace the right registration cleaner unit and
Right registration cleaner assembley
Figure 1-6-15
1-6-8
2AV/X
(5) Detaching and refitting the bypass paper width switch
Follow the procedure below to replace the bypass paper width switch.
Procedure
1. Remove the paper conveying unit and lower
left cover (see page 1-6-6).
2. Remove the bypass tray assembly.
3. Remove the two screws and then the upper
bypass cover.
Upper bypass cover
Figure 1-6-16
4. Remove the gear and rack plate and detach
the connector and then remove the bypass
paper width switch.
Rack plate
Gear
1-6
Bypass paper width switch
Conector
Figure 1-6-17
5. Replace the bypass paper width switch and
When replacing, apply the specified grease
to the printed surface of the new bypass
paper width switch.
When refitting the gear, move the front and
rear rack plates to their innermost positions.
Rack plate
Gear
Rack plate
Figure 1-6-18
1-6-9
2AV/X
(6) Adjustment after roller and clutch replacement
Perform the following adjustment after refitting rollers and clutches.
(6-1) Adjusting the leading edge registration of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U066
(P. 1-6-36)
U034
U071
(P. 1-4-14)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
20 cpm
Leading edge registration
Start
Enter maintenance mode.

Correct image
Enter 034 using the numeric keys.
Output
example 1
Figure 1-6-19a
1-6
Select Leading edge registration

and press the start key.
Select the items to be adjusted using

the cursor up/down keys.
Message display
RCL ON : Leading edge registration
RCL ON 2 : Leading edge registration for when
the paper pauses at the registration
roller
RCL DUP : Leading edge registration for duplex
copying (second face)
After adjusting the leading edge registration for
regular operation (RCL ON), be sure to adjust
the leading edge registration for when paper
pauses at the registration roller (RCL ON2).
Press the start key
Press the interrupt key.
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
to output a test pattern.
Is the leading edge

registration correct?
Yes
Press the stop/clear key to exit
maintenance mode.
End
1-6-10
No
For output example 1, decrease

the value using the cursor left key.
For output example 2, increase
the value using the cursor right key.
Setting range: 5.0 +5.0
Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves the
leading edge by 1.0 mm.
Output
example 2
2AV/X
15 cpm
Leading edge registration
Start
Correct image
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 1-6-19b
Photo
Text
Text indicator : Leading edge registration adjustment

is on
Press the image mode selection

key to light the text indicator.
Select the items to be adjusted

using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.

Setting 1: leading edge registration
Setting 2: Leading edge registration for when the paper
pauses at the registration roller
After adjusting the leading edge registration for regular
operation (setting 1), be sure to adjust the leading edge
registration for when paper pauses at the registration roller
(setting 2).
1-6
Press the start key
The new setting is stored

Press the start key
to output a test pattern.
Is the leading edge

Yes
maintenance mode.
No

the value using the zoom ()
key.
the value using the zoom (+)
key.
Initial setting: 0
leading edge by 1.0 mm.
End
1-6-11
2AV/X
(6-2) Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edge of the copy image and the leading
edge of the original during memory copying.
U053
(P. 1-4-11)
U034
(P. 1-6-13)
U065
(P. 1-6-32)
U066
(P. 1-6-36)
U407
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Procedure
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-20
The new setting is stored.
1-6
Press the start key

and make a test copy.
Is the leading edge

Yes
Press the stop/clear key to
exit maintenance mode.
End
1-6-12
No
20 cpm
For copy example 1, decrease the
value using the cursor left key.
For copy example 2, increase the
value using the cursor right key.
15 cpm
value using the zoom () key.
value using the zoom (+) key.
Setting range: 10 +10
Initilal setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 moves
the leading edge by 1 mm.
Copy
example 2
2AV/X
(6-3) Adjusting the center line of image printing
Make the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original when
paper is fed from the drawer.
U067
(P. 1-6-37)
U034
U072
(P. 1-4-15)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in maintenance
mode.
Procedure
20 cpm
Center line of printing
Start
Correct image
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 1-6-21a
Select Adjusting the center line

LSU DECK : Upper drawer
LSU BYP : Bypass tray
LSU 2ND : Lower drawer
LSU 3RD : Optional drawer 1
LSU 4TH : Optional drawer 2
LSU DUP : Duplex copying (second face)
Select the item to be adjusted using

1-6

Press the start key to output a test
pattern.
Is the image correct?

Yes
maintenance mode.
No

Initial setting: 0
center line by 1 mm.
End
1-6-13
2AV/X
15 cpm
Correct image
Output
example 1
Start
Figure 1-6-21b
Photo
Text
Photo and text indicators : Center line adjustment
are on

Press the image mode selection key

to light the photo and text indicators.
Setting 1 : Upper drawer
2 : Bypass tray
3 : Lower drawer (option)
4 : Optional drawer 1
Select the item to be adjusted

adjustment keys.
1-6

pattern.

Yes
maintenance mode.
End
1-6-14
No

the value using the zoom () key.
the value using the zoom (+) key.
Initial setting: 0
center line by 1 mm.
Output
example 2
2AV/X
(6-4) Adjusting the margins for printing
Make the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U403
(P. 1-6-38)
U402
U404
(P. 1-4-46)
Caution:
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the margins are still incorrect, perform the above adjustments in
maintenance mode.
Procedure
20 cpm
Start
LEAD : printer leading edge margin

AC
: printer left/right margins
TRAIL : printer trailing edge margin
(standard size)
D CUT : printer trailing edge margin
(non-standard size)
TRAIL2 : printer trailing edge margin for
duplex copying (second face)
Select the items to be adjusted using

1-6

pattern using A3/11" 17" paper.
Are the margins correct?
No
Yes
Yes
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the cursor right
key makes the margin winder.
Decreasing the value using the cursor left
key makes the margin narrower.
Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)
Printer leading edge margin: 0 +10 (3/0.5 mm)
Printer left/right margin: 5 +10 (2.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin (standard size): 5 +10 (4.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin (non-standard size): 5 +5 (3/0.25 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin for duplex copying
(second face): 5 +10 (4.5/0.5 mm)
Proceed to
another mode?
No
Printer leading edge margin

(3 2.5 mm)
End
Ejection direction
(reference)
Printer
right margin
(2.5+2.0
1.5 mm)
Printer
left margin
(2.5+2.0
1.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin

(3 2.5 mm)
Normal copy mode
(A3/11" 17")

for duplex copying (3 2.5 mm)
Duplex copy mode
(second face, A3/11" 17")
1-6-15
2AV/X
15 cpm
Start

Setting 1 : printer leading edge margin

2 : printer left/right margins
3 : printer trailing edge margin
(standard size)
4 : printer trailing edge margin
(non-standard size)

the copy exposure adjustment keys.


pattern using A3/11" 17" paper.
1-6
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the zoom (+)
No
key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the zoom ()
key makes the margin narrower.
Yes
Yes
Setting range (initial setting/change in value per step)

Printer leading edge margins: 0 +10 (3/0.5 mm)
Printer left/right margin: 5 +10 (2.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin (standard size): 5 +10 (4.5/0.5 mm)
Printer trailing edge margin (non-standard size): 5 +15 (3.0/0.25 mm)
Proceed to
another mode?
No
End
(3 2.5 mm)
Ejection direction
(reference)
Printer
left margin
(2.5+2.0
1.5 mm)
Printer
right margin
(2.5+2.0
1.5 mm)

(3 2.5 mm)
Normal copy mode
(A3/11" 17")
1-6-16

for duplex copying (3 2.5 mm)
Duplex copy mode
(second face, A3/11" 17")
2AV/X
(6-5) Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper
Make the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded.
Procedure
20 cpm
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-22a
Amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller
DECK : Upper drawer
BYPASS : Bypass tray
DECK2 : Lower drawer
DUPLEX : Duplex copying (second face)
Select "RESIST DATA" or "FEED

DATA" using the cursor up/down keys.
Amount of slack in the paper at the paper feed roller

3RD DECK : Optional drawer 1
4TH DECK : Optional drawer 2


Press the start key
to make a test copy.
1-6
Is the leading
edge of the image missing
or varying randomly (copy
example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the cursor right key.
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
No
Yes
Decrease the value using the cursor left key.

Initial setting: 0
Changing the value by 1 changes
the amount of slack by 0.32 mm.
The greater the value,
the larger the amount of slack;
the smaller the value, the smaller
the amount of slack.
End
1-6-17
2AV/X
15 cpm
Original
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-22b
Start
Copy
example 1
Image mode
selection key
Photo
Text
Text indicator : Amount of slack at the

is on
paper registration roller
Image mode
selection key
Photo
Text
Photo and Text : Amount of slack at

indicators are on the feed roller
Press the image mode selection key to

light the text indicator or the photo and
text indicators.

copy exposure adjustment keys.
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Setting 1 : Upper drawer
2 : Bypass tray
3 : Lower drawer (option)
1-6
Copy exposure
adjustment keys
Setting 1 : Optional drawer 1

Press the start key
Is the leading
or varying randomly (copy
example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the zoom (+) key.
No
Is the copy
paper Z-folded (copy
example 2)?
No
End
1-6-18
Yes
Decrease the value using the zoom () key.

Initial setting: 0
the amount of slack by 0.32 mm.
the smaller the value, the smaller
the amount of slack.
2AV/X
1-6-3 Optical section

(1) Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp
Replace the exposure lamp as follows.
Procedure
1. Remove the original cover or the DF.
2. Remove the five screws holding the right
cover. While sliding the right cover in the
direction of the arrow in the diagram, remove
the contact glass.
Contact glass
Right cover
Figure 1-6-23
3. Move the mirror 1 frame to the cutouts of the
machine.
Caution: When moving the mirror 1 frame, do
not touch the exposure lamp nor the inverter
PCB.
4. Remove the screw holding the metal plate at
the machine rear and then the plate.
1-6
Metal plate
Figure 1-6-24
5. Detach the exposure lamp connector from the
inverter PCB.
6. Remove the two screws holding the exposure
lamp and then the lamp.
7. Replace the exposure lamp and refit all the
removed parts.
Exposure lamp
Connector
Figure 1-6-25
1-6-19
2AV/X
(2) Detaching and refitting the scanner wires
Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced.
Caution:
After replacing the scanner wires, proceed to (4-1) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (see page 1-6-26) and (6)
Adjusting the position of the ISU (see page 1-6-30).
(2-1) Detaching the scanner wires
Inverter wire guide plate
Procedure
1. Remove the exposure lamp (see page 1-619).
2. Remove the rear cover, upper rear cover,
upper left cover, front left cover, rear left
cover, slit glass and operation unit.
3. Remove the inverter wire guide plate and
then the wire from the inverter PCB.
Inverter wire
Figure 1-6-26
4. Remove the screw holding each of the front
and rear wire retainers and then remove the
mirror 1 frame from the scanner unit.
1-6
Mirror 1 frame
Rear wire retainers
Front wire retainers
Figure 1-6-27
5. Unhook the round terminal of the scanner
wire from the scanner tension spring on the
left side of the scanner unit.
6. Remove the scanner wire.
Scanner tension spring
Scanner wire
1-6-20
Figure 1-6-28
2AV/X
(2-2) Fitting the scanner wires
Caution:
When fitting the wires, be sure to use those specified below.
Machine front: P/N 2AV1219 (black)
Machine rear: P/N 2AV1220 (gray)
Fitting requires the following tools:
Two frame securing tools (P/N 2AV6808)
Two scanner wire stoppers (P/N 3596811)
Procedure
1. Remove the three screws and detach the
connector and then remove the scanner
motor unit.
Scanner motor unit
Connector
Figure 1-6-29
2. Remove the E ring and bushing from the rear
of the scanner wire drum shaft and then
remove the E ring, two shims, spring and
bushing from the front of the shaft.
1-6
Bushing
E ring
3. Remove the scanner wire drum shaft from the

scanner unit.
Shim
Bushing
Spring
Scanner wire
drum shaft
E ring
Figure 1-6-30
1-6-21
2AV/X
4. Insert the locating ball on each of the scanner
wires into the hole in the respective scanner
wire drum and wind the scanner wire three
turns inward and four turns outward.
With the locating ball as the reference point,
wind the shorter end of each of the wires
inward.
5. Secure the scanner wires using the scanner
wire stoppers.
Scanner wire stoppers
Three turns
Four turns
Three turns
Locating ball
Four turns
Scanner wire drum
Figure 1-6-31
1-6
6. Refit the scanner wire drum shaft to the

scanner unit.
7. Insert the two frame securing tools into the
positioning holes at the front and rear of the
scanner unit to pin the mirror 2 frame in
position.
Frame securing tools
Mirror 2 Frame
Figure 1-6-32
1-6-22
2AV/X
8. Loop the inner ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the pulleys at the right of the scanner unit,
winding from below to above. ......................................................................................................................... 1
9. Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from above to
below. .............................................................................................................................................................. 2
10. Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside the scanner unit. ............................................................... 3
Figure 1-6-33
11. Loop the outer ends of the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire pulleys at the left of the
scanner unit, winding from below to above. .................................................................................................... 4
12. Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame, winding from below to
above. ............................................................................................................................................................. 5
13 Wind the scanner wires around the grooves in the scanner wire guides at the left of the scanner unit. ......... 6
14. Hook the round terminals onto the scanner tension springs. .......................................................................... 7
1-6
Figure 1-6-34
15. Remove the scanner wire stoppers and frame securing tools.
16. Gather the scanner wires toward the locating balls.
17. Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position.
1-6-23
2AV/X
(3) Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit
Take the following procedure when the laser scanner unit is to be checked or replaced.
Procedure
2. Remove the two screws holding the eject tray
and then the tray.
Eject tray
Figure 1-6-35
3. Remove the two screws and detatch the two

connectors and then remove the fan duct.
Connector
1-6
Fan duct
Figure 1-6-36
4. Remove the three screws and detatch the
two connectors and then remove the laser
scanner unit.
1-6-24
Laser scanner unit

Connector
Figure 1-6-37
2AV/X
5. Check or replace the laser scanner unit and
Caution: Before fitting the new laser scanner
unit, fit the LSU front spacer and LSU right
spacer by orienting the markings correctly
and using the correct layer as specified on
the label on the laser scanner unit cover.
LSU front spacer
LSU right spacer
Figure 1-6-38
1-6
1-6-25
2AV/X
(4) Adjusting the skew and vertical shifting of the laser scanner unit
(4-1) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit
Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral
squareness not obtained).
Caution:
After adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit, make a test copy and check the copy image. If lateral squareness is
still not obtained, perform "(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU" (see page 1-6-30).
Procedure
Start
Skew : X (mm)
Correct image
20 cpm
Select VTC-PG2 using the
cursor up/down keys.
15 cpm
Select 2 using the copy
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-39
Refit the laser scanner unit and

turn the main switch on.
1-6
Press the start key and make
a copy at 100% magnification.
No
Turn the main switch off and remove the

laser scanner unit (see page 1-6-24).
Change the insertion direction of the LSU
front spacer (see table 1-6-1).
Yes
End
Skew: X (mm)*
8 mm X < 3 mm
LSU front spacer
3 mm X +3 mm
+3 mm < X +8
LSU front spacer
LSU front spacer
O (3rd from the bottom)
X (4th from the bottom)
LSU front spacer

insertion direction
No marking (2nd from the bottom)
* "" indicates that the beginning of the printing is higher than the ending (copy example 1)
"+" indicates that the beginning of the printing is lower than the ending (copy example 2)
Table 1-6-1
1-6-26
2AV/X
(4-2) Adjusting the vertical shifting of the laser scanner unit
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image shifts vertically due to vertical shifting of the position of the laser
scanner unit.
Vertical shifting : X (mm)
Start

Correct image
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-40
20 cpm
Select VTC-PG2 using the
cursor up/down keys
15 cpm
Select 2 using the copy
Rifit the laser scanner unit and

turn the main switch on.

a copy at 100% magnification.
1-6
No
Turn the main switch off and remove the

laser scanner unit (see page 1-6-24).
Change the position of the LSU right spacer
(see table 1-6-2).
Yes
End
Vertical shifting:
X (mm)*
1.5 mm X < 0.5 mm
0.5 mm X +0.5 mm
+0.5 mm < X +1.5 mm
LSU right spacer

LSU right spacer
Position of LSU
right spacer
LSU right spacer
Top layer
2nd layer from the top
3rd layer from the top
* "" indicates that the copy image shifts toward the bottom (copy example 1)
"+" indicates that the copy image shifts toward the top (copy example 2)
Table 1-6-2
1-6-27
2AV/X
(5) Detaching and refitting the ISU (reference)
Take the following procedure when the ISU is to be checked or replaced.
Caution: After fitting the ISU, proceed to (6) Adjusting the position of the ISU (see page 1-6-30).
ISU installation requires the following tools:
Two positioning pins (P/N 1856812)
Procedure
Detaching the ISU
1. Remove the contact glass (see page 1-6-19).
2. Remove the rear and shield covers and
detach connectors CN22 and CN23 on the
main PCB.
CN23 CN22
Connector
Figure 1-6-41
3. Remove the eight screws holding the ISU
1-6
ISU cover
Figure 1-6-42
4. Remove the two screws holding the paper
size switch and then the switch.
5. Remove the four screws holding the ISU and
then the ISU.
6. Check or replace the ISU.
Paper size switch
ISU
1-6-28
Figure 1-6-43
2AV/X
Refitting the ISU
1. Fit the ISU using the two positioning pins.
2. Secure the ISU using the four screws.
3. Remove the two positioning pins and refit all
the removed parts.
Positioning pins
ISU
Figure 1-6-44
1-6
1-6-29
2AV/X
(6) Adjusting the position of the ISU (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed (lateral
Caution:
Be sure to perform (4-1) Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit (page 1-6-26) first.
Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for
the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Correct image
Figure 1-6-45
Place the original

on the contact glass.

a test copy at 100% magnification.
1-6
Yes
Copy
example 1
Refit the contact glass.
No
Remove the contact glass and adjust

the lateral squareness of the ISU by
rotating the pin.
For copy example 1, rotate the pin in
the direction of the black arrow (\).
For copy example 2, rotate the pin in
the direction of the white arrow (e).
End
Pin
Figure 1-6-46
1-6-30
Copy
example 2
2AV/X
(7) Adjusting the longitudinal squareness (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if the copy image is longitudinally skewed (longitudinal squareness not obtained).
Caution:
Adjust the amount of slack in the paper (page 1-6-17) first. Check for the longitudinal squareness of the copy image,
and if it is not obtained, perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment.
Before making the following adjustment, output a VTC-PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for
the adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Original
Place the original
on the contact glass.
Yes
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-47
Retighten the two screws and
refit the contact glass.

a test copy at 100% magnification.
Copy
example 1
No
Remove the contact glass.

Loosen the two screws and
adjust the position of the
mirror 2 frame.
For copy example 1,
move the frame in the direction of
the white arrow (e).
For copy example 2,
move the frame in the direction of
the black arrow (b).
1-6
End
Screws
Mirror 2 frame
Figure 1-6-48
1-6-31
2AV/X
(8) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the main scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is not correct.
U053
(P. 1-4-11)
U065
(main scanning
direction)
U065
(auxiliary scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-34)
U067
(P. 1-6-37)
Caution:
Before making the following adjustment, ensure that the above adjustments have been made in maintenance mode.
Also, perform (9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction (page 1-6-34) and (11)
Adjusting the scanner center line (page 1-6-37) after this adjustment.
Procedure
20 cpm
Start
Original
Copy
example
Figure 1-6-49a
Select MAIN SCAN ADJ
(main scanning direction).
1-6
The new setting

is stored.
Place an original and press

the start key to make a test copy.
Yes
End
1-6-32
No

Initial setting: 0
the magnification by 0.1%.
Increasing the value makes
the image wider, and decreasing it
makes the image narrower.
Copy
example 2
2AV/X
15 cpm
Start
Original
Copy
example
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-49b

Select 1 (main scanning direction
adjustment keys).

Setting 1 : Main scanning direction
2 : Auxiliary scanning direction
The new setting

is stored.

Yes
End
No

1-6

Initial setting: 0
the image wider, and decreasing it
makes the image narrower.
1-6-33
2AV/X
(9) Adjusting magnification of the scanner in the auxiliary scanning direction
Perform the following adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is not correct.
U053
(P. 1-4-11)
U065
(main scanning
direction) (P. 1-6-32)
U065
(auxiliary scanning
direction)
U070
(P. 1-4-14)
Caution:
Procedure
20 cpm
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-50a
Select SUB SCAN ADJ
(auxiliary scanning direction).
1-6
The new setting

is stored.

Yes
End
1-6-34
No

Initial setting: 0
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
Copy
example 2
2AV/X
15 cpm
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-50b

Select 2 (auxiliary scanning
direction using the copy exposure
adjustment keys).

Setting 1 : Main scanning direction
2 : Auxiliary scanning direction
The new setting

is stored.

Yes
End
No

1-6

Initial setting: 0
the image longer, and decreasing it
make the image shorter.
1-6-35
2AV/X
(10) Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration
Perform the following adjustment if there is regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
U034
(P. 1-6-10)
U071
(P. 1-4-14)
U066
Caution:
Procedure
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-6-51

The new setting
is stored.

1-6
Is the scanner
leading edge registration
correct?
Yes
End
1-6-36
No
20 cpm
For copy example 1, increase
For copy example 2, decrease
15 cpm
Setting range : 15 +15 (20 cpm)
: 32 +32 (15 cpm)
Initial setting: 0
the leading edge by 0.17 mm.
Copy
example 2
2AV/X
(11)Adjusting the scanner center line
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
U034
(P. 1-6-10)
U071
(P. 1-4-14)
U067
Caution:
Procedure
Scanner center line
Start
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-6-52
The new setting

is stored.
Is the scanner
center line correct?
Yes
End
No
1-6
20 cpm
15 cpm
Initial setting: 0
the center line by 0.17 mm.
1-6-37
2AV/X
(12) Adjusting the margins for scanning an original on the contact glass
Perform the following adjustment if the margins are not correct.
U402
(P. 1-6-15)
U404
(P. 1-4-46)
U403
Caution:
Procedure
20 cpm
Start

A MGN: scanner left margin

B MGN: scanner leading edge margin
C MGN: scanner right margin
D MGN: scanner trailing edge margin

The new setting
is stored.
1-6
Press the start key

Yes
Yes
Proceed to another mode?
No
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the cursor
right key makes the margin wider.
Decreasing the value using the
cursor left key makes the margin
narrower.
Setting range (default)
Scanner left margin: 0 +10 (2)
Scanner leading edge margin: 0 +10 (3)
Scanner right margin: 0 +10 (2)
Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 +10 (2)
Changing the value by one moves
the margin by 0.5 mm for all.

End
Scanner leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm)

Ejection direction
(reference)
Scanner
left margin
(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
Scanner
right margin
(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
Scanner trailing edge margin

(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
1-6-38
2AV/X
15 cpm
Start


Setting 1 : scanner left margin
2 : scanner leading edge margin
3 : scanner right margin
4 : scanner trailing edge margin
The new setting

is stored.
Press the start key


Yes
Yes
No
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the zoom
(+) key makes the margin wider.
zoom () key makes the margin
narrower.
1-6

Scanner left margin: 0 +10 (2)
Scanner leading edge margin: 0 +10 (3)
Scanner right margin: 0 +10 (2)
Scanner trailing edge margin: 0 +10 (2)
Changing the value by one moves

End
Scanner leading edge margin (3 2.5 mm)

Ejection direction
(reference)
Scanner
left margin
(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
Scanner
right margin
(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
Scanner trailing edge margin

(2 +2.0
1.5 mm)
1-6-39
2AV/X
1-6-4 Main charging section

(1) Detaching and refitting the charger assembly
Follow the procedure below to replace the charger assembly.
Prucedure
and front cover, and then remove the toner
cartridge and waste toner tank.
2. Remove the two screws and disconnect the
connector. While pressing the hook on the
front image formation cover, pull the image
formation unit out.
Connector
Hook
Image formation unit
Figure 1-6-53
3. Remove the screw holding the charger
assemby and then the assembly.
4. Replace the charger assembly and refit all
the removed parts.
1-6
Charger assembly
Figure 1-6-54
1-6-40
2AV/X
(2) Replacing the tungsten wire (reference)
Take the following procedure when the tungsten wire is broken or to be replaced.
Precautions
Use the specified tungsten wire (P/N: 2AR1016).
The part of the wire wrapped around the charger spring must not protrude over the L-shaped hook in the main charger
rear housing.
Use clean, undamaged tungsten wire.
Keep the tungsten wire taut by stretching it.
Clean the shield grid with a wet cloth followed by a dry cloth when replacing the tungsten wire.
Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinner to clean the shield grid.
Do not leave dust or dirt after cleaning the shield grid.
Procedure
1. Remove the image formation unit (see page 1-6-40).
2. Remove the charger assembly (see page 1-6-40).
3. Remove the main charger front and rear lids.
4. Remove the shield grid from the front of the charger assembly.
5. Remove the tungsten wire retainer pin and the charger spring from the charger terminal, and then the tungsten wire.
Shield grid
Main charger rear lid
Main charger front lid

Charger terminal
Charger spring
1-6
Tungsten wire
Tungsten wire retainer pin
Main charger housing
Figure 1-6-55
1-6-41
2AV/X
6. Wind the new tungsten wire six turns around one end of the charger spring and trim the end.
The width of the coiled tungsten wire and the cut end must be less than 2 mm.
7. Hook the other end of the charger spring onto the charger terminal of the main charger rear housing.
8. Pass the tungsten wire through the V-shaped notch in the tungsten wire retainer pin and stretch it taut.
The tungsten wire must be adjusted so that the distance between the spring end and the rib on the main charger
rear housing is 2-4 mm.
9. Insert the tungsten wire retainer pin into the projection on the main charger rear housing to secure the tungsten wire.
10. Cut off the excess wire under the tungsten wire retainer pin.
The cut end of the tungsten wire must protrude less than 2 mm.
11. Refit the main charger front and rear lids.
Charger terminal
1-6
Tungsten wire
retainer pin
2-4 mm
Not more
than 2 mm
Not more
than 2 mm of cut end
Charger spring
Main charger rear housing
Main charger front housing
Figure 1-6-56
1-6-42
2AV/X
1-6-5 Drum section

(1) Detaching and refitting the drum
Follow the procedure below to replace the drum.
Cautions:
Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and fitting the drum.
Hold the drum at the ends and never touch the drum surface.
After removing the drum, keep it in the drum case or storage bag to protect the surface from light.
Procedure
1. Remove the image formation unit (see page
1-6-40).
2. Remove the two screws holding the transfer
right guide and then the guide.
3. Remove the screw holding each of the three
drum separation claw assemblies and then
the assemblies.
Drum separation claw assemblies
Transfer right guide
Figure 1-6-57
4. Pull the drum shaft out and replace the drum.
Check the letter indicating the drum type (G,
H or J) printed on the new drum flange.
When fitting the drum, orient it correctly so
that the gear is positioned at the machine
rear.
When fitting the drum shaft, insert it fully.
Drum shaft
1-6
Drum
Figure 1-6-58
5. Remove the front image formation unit cover.
Rub the contacting surfaces of the drum shaft
and drum drive grounding plate with a cloth
and then apply the GE-334C conductive
grease (P/N A0199040) to the contacting
surfaces of the grounding plate. Refit the
removed parts.
6. After replacing the drum, run maintenance
items below.
U109 Setting the drum type (set to the
drum type printed on the new drum flange)
U110 Checking/clearing the drum
count(clear the drum count)
U111 Checking/clearing the drum drive
time (clear the value)
Drum shaft
Drum drive grounding plate
Figure 1-6-59
1-6-43
2AV/X
1-6-6 Developing section

(1) Adjusting the position of the doctor blade (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if carrier or background appears on the copy image.
Procedure
1-6-40).
2. Remove the charger assembly (see page 16-40).
3. Remove the screw holding the MC rail and
then the rail.
MC rail
Figure 1-6-60
4. Remove the screw holding the doctor blade
Caution: When refitting the doctor blade
cover, be sure to refit the bias wire.
Doctor blade cover
1-6
Bias wire
Figure 1-6-61
5. Measure the distance between the doctor
blade and the developing roller at the three
points indicated by the circles using a
thickness gauge. Adjust the distances with
the three screws until the correct
measurements are obtained; the 0.55 mm
gauge should go into the gap and the 0.65
mm one should not.
Caution: The smaller the distance, the lighter
the image; the larger the distance, the darker
the image.
Adjustment screws
Doctor blade
Figure 1-6-62
1-6-44
2AV/X
1-6-7 Transfer section

(1) Detaching and refitting the transfer roller assembly
Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller assembly.
Procedure
unit.
2. Remove the transfer roller assembly.
Caution: Remove the transfer roller assembly
carefully to prevent the residual toner in the
transfer roller assembly from spilling.
3. Replace the transfer roller assembly and refit
all the removed parts.
Transfer roller assembly
Figure 1-6-63
1-6
1-6-45
2AV/X
1-6-8 Cleaning section

(1) Detaching and refitting the cleaning blade
Follow the procedure below to replace the cleaning blade.
Procedure
1. Remove the image formation unit and the
charger assembly (see page 1-6-40).
2. Remove the MC rail (see page 1-6-44).
3. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-43).
4. Remove the three screws holding the
cleaning blade and then the blade.
Caution: When detaching and refitting the
cleaning blade, take care not to touch the
blade.
Cleaning blade
Figure 1-6-64
5. Replace the cleaning blade and refit all the
removed parts.
Caution: When fitting the cleaning blade,
position the end of the thrust shaft on the
notch in the thrust gear by turning the gear.
Thrust shaft
Thrust gear
1-6
Notch
Figure 1-6-65
1-6-46
2AV/X
(2) Detaching and refitting the drum separation claw assemblies
Follow the procedure to replace the drum separation claw assemblies.
Procedure
1-6-40).
2. Remove the screw holding each of the drum
separation claw assemblies and then the
assemblies.
3. Remove the drum separation claws from the
drum separation claw assemblies.
4. Replace the drum separation claws and refit
all the removed parts.
Drum separation claw assemblies
Figure 1-6-66
(3) Detaching and refitting the cleaning lower seal assembly

Follow the procedure below to replace the cleaning lower seal assembly.
Procedure
1-6-40).
2. Remove the drum (see page 1-6-43).
3. Remove the two screws holding the cleaning
lower seal assembly and then the assembly.
Caution: When detaching and refitting the
cleaning lower seal assembly, take care not
to lose the M3 retainers (P/N 3330208).
4. Replace the cleaning lower seal assembly
and refit all the removed parts.
M3 retainers
1-6
Cleaning lower seal assembly
Figure 1-6-67
1-6-47
2AV/X
1-6-9 Fixing section

(1) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit
Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fixing unit.
Procedure
and front cover, and then remove the rear
cover, left front cover and left rear cover.
2. Detach the three fixing unit connectors (blue,
green and yellow) at the machine rear.
Connector (blue)
Connector (green)
Connector (yellow)
Figure 1-6-68
1-6
3. Remove the two screws from the rear and the

two pins from the front of the fixing unit and
shift the unit toward the machine front.
Remove the drive pin on the copier and then
remove the fixing unit.
When refitting the fixing unit, be sure to
return the two pins at the front of the unit to
their original positions.
Fixing unit
Pin
Figure 1-6-69
1-6-48
Pins
2AV/X
(2) Detaching and refitting the fixing unit thermistor
Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing unit thermistor.
Procedure
1. Remove the fixing unit (see page 1-6-48).
2. Remove the screw and detach the connector,
and then remove the fixing unit thermistor.
3. Replace the fixing unit thermistor and refit all
the removed parts.
Fixing unit thermister
Connector
Figure 1-6-70
(3) Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws

Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws.
Procedure
2. Remove the spring from each of the five heat
roller separation claws and then the claws.
3. Replace the heat roller separation claws and
Springs
1-6
Heat roller separation claws
Figure 1-6-71
1-6-49
2AV/X
(4) Detaching and refitting the fixing heater
Follow the procedure below to replace the fixing heater.
Procedure
2. Detach the fixing heater connector.
Connector
Figure 1-6-72
3. Remove the screw holding each of the fixing
heater front and rear retainers and then the
retainers.
1-6
Fixing heater
front retainer
Fixing heater
rear retainer
Figure 1-6-73
4. Pull out the fixing heater from the fixing unit.
5. Replace the fixing heater and refit all the
removed parts.
Fixing heater
Figure 1-6-74
1-6-50
2AV/X
(5) Detaching and refitting the heat roller
Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller.
Procedure
2. Remove the fixing unit thermistor, fixing
heater and heat roller separation claw
assemblies (see pages 1-6-49 and 50).
3. Remove the two screws holding the eject
guide and then the guide.
Eject guide
Figure 1-6-75
4. Remove the two stop rings, collar, gear,
spring pin and bushing on the rear of the
eject roller and then remove the eject roller.
Eject roller
Spring pin
Bushing
Stop ring
Gear
Stop ring
Collar
Figure 1-6-76
5. Remove the gear and detach the eject switch
connector.
Gear
Connector
Figure 1-6-77
1-6-51
1-6
2AV/X
6. Remove the four screws holding the fixing
housing and then the housing.
Fixing housing
Figure 1-6-78
7. Remove the pressure spring from each of the
front and rear ends of the fixing unit.
1-6
Press springs
Figure 1-6-79
8. Remove the C ring, gear and bushing on the
rear and the C ring and bushing on the front
of the heat roller, and then remove the heat
roller.
9. Replace the heat roller and refit all the
removed parts.
C ring
Heat roller
Bushing
Bushing
C ring
Gear
Figure 1-6-80
1-6-52
2AV/X
(6) Detaching and refitting the press roller
Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller.
Procedure
2. Remove the heat roller (see page 1-6-51).
3. Remove the screw holding the fixing guide
plate and then the plate.
Fixing guide plate
Figure 1-6-81
4. Remove the press roller and two bearings.
5. Replace the press roller and refit all the
removed parts.
Bearing
Press roller
Bearing
Figure 1-6-82
1-6-53
1-6
2AV/X-1
1-7-1 Replacing the main PCB

Main PCB replacement requires the following tools:
Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)
NVRAM (P/N NAS09010)
Procedure
Before replacing the main PCB (backing up the machine data)
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the
power plug.
2. Remove the two screws holding the upper
shield cover and then the cover.
3. If the optional memory board is installed,
remove the memory board (15 cpm copier
only).
Upper shield
cover
Figure 1-7-1
4. Fit the NVRAM to the memory tool PCB.
Caution:
After fitting the NVRAM, do not remove it until
the writing of the machine data completes.
5. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and
connect its CN1 to CN31 on the main PCB.
Note:
On the 15 cpm copier, insert the memory tool
PCB along the upper and lower guides.
On the 20 cpm copier, take care not to allow
the memory tool PCB to make contact with the
metal components of the copier.
Memory tool
PCB
1-7
CN1
LED2
LED1
Guides (15 cpm

copier only)
NVRAM
Figure 1-7-2
1-7-1
2AV/X
6. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 1 s off for 1 s)
for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data on the SRAM of the main PCB will be backed up on the NVRAM.
7. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, backing up of machine data is complete.
If an error occurs while the machine data is being backed up, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns given
below according to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective corrective
measures and then back up the machine data again.
LED1
--: On for 0.25 s
-: Off for 0.25 s
Off
Description
Corrective measures
WRITE is selected in maintenance

item U917.
Run maintenance item U917 and select READ.
Since the NVRAM contains data

from the previous operation, data
cannot be written to it.
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and back

up the machine data again.
The machine data was not transmitted from the SRAM on the main
PCB to the NVRAM correctly.
Turn the main switch off and on and back up the machine
data again. If the error persists, replace the NVRAM.
8. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
9. Remove the memory tool PCB.
10. Replace the main PCB.
1-7
After replacing the main PCB (writing the machine data)

11. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on.
12. Upgrade the firmware on the main PCB and operation unit PCB (20 cpm copier only). See pages 1-7-3 and 5.
13. Turn the main switch on.
14. Enter maintenance mode.
15. Run maintenance item U020.
16. Run maintenance item U252 and set the destination.
17. Run maintenance item U917 and select WRITE.
19. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug.
20. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and connect its CN1 to CN31 on the main PCB.
Note:
On the 15 cpm copier, insert the memory tool PCB along the upper and lower guides.
On the 20 cpm copier, take care not to allow the memory tool PCB to make contact with the metal components of the copier.
21. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB flashes (on for 0.5 s off for
0.5 s on for 0.5 s off for 0.5 s on for 1 s off for 0.5 s) for approximately 10 seconds and the machine data on
the NVRAM will be written to the SRAM on the main PCB.
22. When flashing LED1 (green) on the memory tool PCB remains lit, writing of the machine data is complete.
If an error occurs while the machine data is being written, LED1 (green) flashes and goes off in the patterns given below
according to the nature of the error. Remove the memory tool PCB and perform the respective corrective measures and
then write the machine data again.
LED1
---
Description
Corrective measures
READ is selected in maintenance

item U917.
Run maintenance item U917 and select WRITE.
An NVRAM with no backup data is

used. (LED1 flashes for 10 s in the
pattern on for 1 s and off for 1 s, and
then flashes in the pattern described
on the left.)
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and then

back up the machine data again.
--
The machine data on the NVRAM

may be damaged (checksum error).
Replace the NVRAM on the memory tool PCB and back

up the machine data again.
Off
The machine data was not

transmitted from the NVRAM to the
SRAM on the main PCB correctly
(SRAM problem).
Turn the main switch off and on and write the machine
data again. If the error persists, replace the main PCB.
: On for 0.25 s
-: Off for 0.25 s
: On for 0.25 s
-: Off for 0.25 s
: Off for 1 s
1-7-2
2AV/X
1-7-2 Upgrading the firmware on the main PCB

Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:
Flash tool assembly (P/N 35968010)
Memory tool PCB (P/N 2AV68030)
Master ROMs
15 cpm: Main ROM 1 IC (P/N 2AV68060)
20 cpm: Main ROM IC (P/N 2AX68010)
Procedure
power plug.
Upper shield
cover
Figure 1-7-3
3. If the optional memory board is installed,
remove the memory board (15 cpm copier
only).
4. Fit the master ROM into the IC3 socket on the
flash tool assembly.
5. Connect CN2 on the flash tool PCB to CN2 on
the memory tool PCB.
6. Insert the memory tool PCB into the copier and
connect its CN1 to CN31 on the main PCB.
Note:
On the 15 cpm copier, insert the memory tool
PCB along the upper and lower guides.
On the 20 cpm copier, take care not to allow
the memory tool PCB to make contact with the
metal components of the copier.
Memory tool
PCB
Flash tool assembly
1-7
CN1
IC3
CN2
CN2
Guides (15 cpm
copier only)
LED2
Master ROM
Figure 1-7-4
1-7-3
2AV/X
7. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED2 (green) on the flash tool assembly flashes and upgrading of the
master ROM starts.
8. When flashing LED2 (green) remains lit after approximately 30 to 40 seconds, upgrading of the master ROM is
complete.
9. Turn the main switch on.
Important:
C021 may be indicated on the operation panel while upgrading the firmware. However, it does not interfere with the
upgrading operation.
1-7
1-7-4
2AV/X
1-7-3 Upgrading the firmware on the operation unit PCB (20 cpm copier only)
Firmware upgrading requires the following tools:
Master ROMs
Inch specifications
Operation unit ROM 1 IC (P/N 2AX68020)
Operation unit ROM 1 IC (P/N 2AX68040)
Procedure
power plug.
Upper shield
cover
Figure 1-7-5
3. Fit the master ROM into the IC3 socket on the
4. Align the flash tool assembly with the cutout
and insert into the copier. Connect CN2 on the
flash tool assembly to CN33 on the main PCB.
Flash tool assembly
Cutout
CN2
IC3
1-7
LED2
Master ROM
Figure 1-7-6
5. Insert the power plug and turn the main switch on. LED2 (green) on the flash tool assembly flashes and upgrading of the
master ROM starts.
6. When flashing LED2 (green) remains lit after approximately 2 to 4 minutes, upgrading of the master ROM is complete.
7. Turn the main switch off.
8. Remove the flash tool assembly.
1-7-5
2AV/X
1-7-4 Adjustment-free variable resistors (VR)

The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field.
High-voltage transformer PCB: VR101, VR102, VR201, VR301, VR302
Inverter PCB: VR1, VR2
1-7
1-7-6
2AV/X
2-1-1 Paper feed section

The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections. Primary feed conveys paper from
the upper drawer, lower drawer or bypass tray to the left and right registration rollers, at which point secondary feed
takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing.
Each drawer can hold up to 250 sheets of paper. The bypass tray can hold up to 50 sheets of paper.
Paper is fed from the drawer by the rotation of the paper feed pulley. Paper is fed from the bypass tray by the rotation of
the bypass paper feed pulley.
Figure 2-1-1 Paper feed section
1 Upper paper feed pulley

2 Lower paper feed pulley*1
3 Bypass paper feed pulley
4 Right registration roller
5 Left registration roller
6 Paper conveying roller*1
7 Paper conveying pulley*1
8 Drawer lift
9 Paper conveying guide*1
0 Bypass lift
! Transfer guide
@ Right transfer guide
# Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U)
$ Lower paper feed clutch*1 (PFCL-L)
% Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL)
^ Upper paper switch (PSW-U)

& Lower paper switch*1 (PSW-L)
* Upper paper size switch 1 (PSSW1-U)
( Lower paper size switch 1*1 (PSSW1-L)
) Upper paper size switch 2 (PSSW2-U)
Lower paper size switch 2*1 (PSSW2-L)
Upper paper size switch 3 (PSSW3-U)
Upper paper size switch 4 (PSSW4-U)
Bypass paper switch*2 (BYPPSW)
Drawer feed switch*1 (DFSW)
2-1
*1: Standard for the 20 cpm copier/optional

for the 15 cpm copier.
*2: For the 20 cpm copier only.
2-1-1
2AV/X
MPCB
RCL
CN4-10
RSW
CN3-7
PFCL-U
CN4-14
CN3-10
PSW-U
BYPPFCL
CN4-12
CN6-2
BYPPSW
CN8-3
PFCL-L*
CN8-15
PSW-L*
*Optional for the 15 cpm copier.
Figure 2-1-2 Paper feed section block diagram
Start key
DM
263 ms
RCL
100 ms
PFCL-U
263 ms
300 ms
300 ms
100 ms
2927 ms (20 cpm)
3871 ms (15 cpm)
RSW
Copy paper: A4/11" 81/2", magnification ratio 100%, two copies
Timing chart 2-1-1 Paper feed from the upper drawer

a: When the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) and the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turn on and upper
paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper feed.
b: 263 ms after the leading edge of the first paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL)
turns on and the right registration roller rotates.
c: 300 ms after the trailing edge of the first paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL)
turns off.
d: 2927 ms (for the 20 cpm)/3871 ms (for the 15 cpm) after the upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turns on, the upper
paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) turns on again and starts primary paper feed of the second paper.
e: 263 ms after the leading edge of the second paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch
(RCL) turns on and the right registration roller rotates.
f: 300 ms after the trailing edge of the second paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch
(RCL) turns off.
2-1-2
2AV/X
Start key
DM
263 ms
RCL
300 ms
100 ms
BYPPFCL
3000 ms
RSW
Original: A5R, copy paper: A3/11" 17", magnification ratio 200%
Timing chart 2-1-2 Paper feed from the bypass tray

a: When the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) turns on.
b: 3000 ms after the drive motor (DM) turns on, the bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) turns on and the bypass
paper feed pulleys rotate to start primary paper feed.
c: 263 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
on and the right registration roller rotates.
d: 300 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, the registration clutch (RCL) turns
off.
2-1
2-1-3
2AV/X
2-1-2 Main charging section

The main charging section consists of the drum and main charger assembly. The drum is electrically charged by means
of a grid to form a latent image on the surface. The shield grid ensures that the charge is applied uniformly.
Tungsten wire
Main charger assembly
Drum
Shield grid
Figure 2-1-3 Main charging section
1 Main charger housing

2 Main charger front lid
3 Main charger rear lid
4 Tungsten wire
5 Charger spring
6 Charger terminal
7 Charger pin
8 Shield grid
2-1
Figure 2-1-4 Main charger assembly
2-1-4
2AV/X
HVTPCB
MC
GRID
CN1-9
CN1-7
CN1-4
Drum
CN1-1
MPCB
24 V DC
MC REM
GRID CONT
MC ALM
CN4-1
CN4-3
CN4-6
CN4-9
Figure 2-1-5 Main charging section block diagram
Start key
DM
MC REM
500 ms
840 ms
ESW
Timing chart 2-1-3 Main charging

a: 500 ms after the start key is pressed, main charging (MC REM) starts.
b: 840 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the eject switch (ESW) off, main charging (MC REM) is completed.
2-1
2-1-5
2AV/X
2-1-3 Optical section

The optical section consists of the scanner, mirror frames and the image scanning unit for scanning and the laser
scanner unit for printing.
Figure 2-1-6 Optical section

1 Mirror 1 frame
2 Mirror 2 frame
3 Exposure lamp (EL)
4 Mirror 1
5 Mirror 2
6 Mirror 3
7 Lens
8 CCD PCB (CCDPCB)
9 Image scanning unit
0 Laser scanner unit (LSU)
! Scanner motor (SM)
@ Scanner home position switch
(SHPSW)
2-1
2-1-6
2AV/X
(1) Original scanning
The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp (EL) and scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) in the image
scanning unit via the three mirrors, the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal.
The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to
side. The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner. When the DF* is used, the scanner and mirror
frames stop at the DF original scanning position to start scanning.
* Optional.
Original
EL
CN28-1
CN28-6
CN23-1
CN23-6
CN22-1
CN22-10
SM
CN24-1
CN24-6
CN25-5
SHPSW
CN1-1
CN1-6
INPCB
CN2-1
CN2-6
CN1-1
CN1-10
CCDPCB
MPCB
Figure 2-1-7 Optional section block diagram

Start key
178 ms
Fwd. rotation
SM
Rev. rotation
5294 P
4048 P
1078 P
2-1
168 P
DM
RSW
Copy paper: A4/11" 81/2", magnification ratio 100%
Timing chart 2-1-4 Scanner operation

a: When the start key is pressed, the scanner motor (SM) reverses for 1078 pulses and then turns off.
b: 168 pulses after the scanner motor (SM) rotates in the reverse direction again, the scanner motor (SM) turns off.
c: 178 ms after the leading edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) on, the scanner motor (SM) rotates
forward to start original scanning.
d: The scanner motor (SM) rotates forward for 5294 pulses and then rotates in the reverse direction.
e: 4048 pulses after the scanner motor (SM) rotates in the reverse direction, the scanner motor (SM) turns off.
2-1-7
2AV/X
(2) Image printing
The image data scanned by the CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is processed on the main PCB (MPCB) and transmitted as image
printing data to the laser scanner unit (LSU). By repeatedly turning the laser on and off, the laser scanner unit forms a
latent image on the drum surface.
Figure 2-1-8 Laser scanner unit (1)

1 Laser diode PCB (LDPCB)
2 Laser diode
3 Collimator lens
4 Cylindrical lens
5 Lenses
6 Polygon mirror
7 Polygon motor (PM)
8 f lens
9 f lens
0 BD sensor mirror
! Cylindrical correcting lens
@ BD sensor
2-1
2-1-8
2AV/X
Drum
Figure 2-1-9 Laser scanner unit (2)

1 Laser diode: Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum.
2 Collimator lens: Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam.
3 Cylindrical lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.
4 Lens: Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution.
5 Polygon mirror: Six-facet mirror that rotates at approximately 23622 rpm with each face reflecting the laser beam
toward the drum for one main-direction scan.
6 F lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter
constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam
is on the drum surface.
7 F lens: Corrects for non-linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface, keeps the beam diameter
constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam
is on the drum surface.
8 BD sensor mirror: Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main-direction (horizontal) sync signal.
9 Cylindrical correcting lens: Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD
sensor.
0 BD sensor: Detects the beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror, outputting a signal to the main PCB (MPCB) to
provide timing for the main-direction sync signal.
The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2-1-10.
Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror, while scanning in the auxiliary direction is
provided by the rotating drum, forming a static latent image on the drum.
The static latent image of the letter A, for example, is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2-1-11. Electrical
charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser.
The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line, and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other.
Main scanning direction
9025 m
Auxilary scanning direction
75+25
-15 m
:laser beam is on
Figure 2-1-10
Figure 2-1-11
2-1-9
2-1
2AV/X
2-1-4 Developing section

The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner cartridge.
The developing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed, the doctor blade and the
developing spirals that agitate the developer.
Toner from the toner cartridge and residual toner collected in the cleaning section are conveyed to the waste toner tank.
Toner cartridge
Toner feed motor (TFM)

Developing unit
Figure 2-1-12 Developing section
Left developing spiral

Cleaning spiral
Right developing spiral
Toner recycling assembly
Waste toner tank
2-1
Flow of the recycled toner
Figure 2-1-13 Toner recycling
2-1-10
2AV/X
(1) Formation of magnetic brush
The developing roller consists of a magnet roller with five poles and a sleeve roller. Rotation of the sleeve roller around
the magnet roller entrains developer, which in turn forms a magnetic brush at pole N1 on the magnet roller. The height of
the magnetic brush is regulated by the doctor blade; the developing result is affected by the position of the poles on the
magnet roller and the position of the doctor blade.
A developing bias voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the developing roller
to provide image contrast.
A
1 Developing unit housing

2 Developing roller
3 Toner sensor (TNS)
4 Doctor blade
5 Right developing spiral
6 Left developing spiral
7 Developing paddle
A: Distance between the doctor blade and developing roller: 0.60.05 mm
Figure 2-1-14 Forming a magnetic brush
HVTPCB
CN1-9
CN1-6
DB
CN1-4
MPCB
24 V DC
DB REM
DB CONT
CN4-1
CN4-4
CN4-7
WTDSW
CN13-7
TNS SIG
TNS CONT
CN13-2
CN13-3
2-1
TFM
CN11-1,2
Figure 2-1-15 Developing section block diagram
2-1-11
2AV/X
(2) Toner density detection by the toner sensor
The toner sensor (TNS) detects the toner density. As the developer passes by the sensor section of the toner sensor, the
toner sensor detects the ratio of toner to carrier in the developer and converts it into a voltage. When more toner is used,
the ratio of toner to carrier decreases and the toner sensor output voltage increases. When the ratio drops below the
specified value, the increase in toner sensor output voltage triggers toner replenishing. When toner is added and the ratio
of toner to carrier returns to normal, the toner sensor output voltage drops to the point where toner replenishing stops.
(3) Toner density control
Toner request message
Toner being replenished message (Toner cartridge and
waste toner tank to be replaced.)
(forced toner feed)
Toner sensor
output voltage (V)
180 s
Toner empty
detection level
Copying
Figure 2-1-16 Toner density control

a: If the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner feed start level 3 s after the drive motor (DM) has turned on (end
of toner empty detection inhibit time), the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.
b: As toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level and
replenishing stops.
c: When the toner sensor output voltage exceeds the toner empty detection level after toner replenishing is carried out,
the toner being replenished message appears disabling copying and forced toner feed starts. If the toner sensor
output voltage fails to fall to the toner feed stop level within 180 s of the start of forced toner feed, the toner request
message appears.
d: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops below the toner feed stop level and
replenishing stops. After 60 s aging (15 s while copying) the toner being replenished message disappears and
copying is enabled.
e: After replacing the toner cartridge and the waste toner tank, the toner feed motor (TFM) turns on to replenish toner.
f: When toner is replenished, the toner sensor output voltage falls until it drops to the toner feed stop level. The toner
being replenished message disappears and replenishing stops.
2-1
2-1-12
2AV/X
(4) Correcting the toner sensor control voltage
The toner sensor control voltage is corrected based on the absolute humidity and the total drive motor time so that the
toner density is kept constant regardless of the changes in humidity and the total drive motor time.
Toner sensor control voltage after correction = A + B + C
A: Toner sensor control voltage before correction (value set by maintenance item U131)
B: Correction data based on the absolute humidity
C: Correction data based on the total drive motor time
Correction based on the absolute humidity
Correction data
+15
-15
1.5
4.0
10.0
19.0
Absolute humidity (g/m3)
Figure 2-1-17 Correction based on the absolute humidity

a: When the absolute humidity is between 0 and 1.5 g/m3, a constant value of +15 is added to the toner sensor control
voltage.
b: When the absolute humidity is between 1.5 and 4.0 g/m3, the correction data is reduced according to the rise in
absolute humidity.
c: When the absolute humidity is between 4.0 and 10.0 g/m3, the correction data becomes 0.
d: When the absolute humidity is between 10.0 and 18.0 g/m3, the correction data is decreased according to the rise in
absolute humidity, reducing the toner sensor control voltage.
e: When the absolute humidity exceeds 18.0 g/m3, the correction data becomes a constant value of 15, decreasing the
toner sensor control voltage.
Computing the absolute humidity
The humidity sensor (HUMSENS) converts the relative humidity detected by the humidity sensing element into a voltage
and sends it to the main PCB (MPCB). The main PCB (MPCB) computes the absolute humidity based on this HUMSENS
signal and the temperature (ETTH signal) detected by the external temperature thermistor (ETTH).
2-1
MPCB
ETTH
Humidity
sensing
element
ETTH
GND
CN7-1
CN7-2
HUMSENS CN7-3
HUMSENS
1
DC5V
CN7-4
Figure 2-1-18 Absolute humidity computation block diagram
2-1-13
2AV/X
Correction based on the total drive motor time
The toner sensor control voltage is also corrected based on the total time the drive motor (DM) has been on from
execution of maintenance item U130, so that the toner sensor output voltage is regulated properly.
Correction data
0
X-10
X-20
X-30
X-40
300 500
800
1200
2000
3000
6000
7000
Drive time (min.)
X: Toner sensor control voltage for initial developer setting (the value set in U131 in bits)
Figure 2-1-19 Correction based on the total drive motor time

a: When maintenance item U130 is run for initial developer setting, the total drive motor time is cleared and the toner
sensor control voltage correction data becomes 0.
b: When the total drive motor time is between 300 and 500 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
increase in the total drive motor time.
c: When the total drive motor time is between 500 and 800 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
constant value of 10.
d: When the total drive motor time is between 800 and 1200 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
e: When the total drive motor time is between 1200 and 2000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
f: When the total drive motor time is between 2000 and 3000 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
g: When the total drive motor time is between 3000 and 6000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a
h: When the total drive motor time is between 6000 and 7000 min., the correction data is decreased according to the
i: When the total drive motor time exceeds 7000 min., the toner sensor control voltage is corrected with a constant
value of 40.
2-1
(5) Correcting toner sensor output voltage

The toner sensor output voltage is corrected according to the absolute humidity at power-on (the main switch turning on),
fixing temperature and accumulated drive time.
Toner sensor output voltage after correction = Toner sensor output voltage before correction Correction data at poweron
Correction data at power-on = A B
If A B 0, the correction data at power-on is 0
A: Correction data based on the absolute humidity and fixing temperature
B: Accumulated drive time from the main switch turning on (total drive motor on-time)
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50C/122F or below, correction data A is determined as follows:
Condition
The absolute humidity at the last main switch turning off
was 50 g/m3 or below and the absolute humidity at the
main switch turning on was 50 g/m3 or below.
Cases other than above.
Correction data A
+15
+30
If the fixing temperature at the main switch turning on is 50C/122F or above, the value of correction data A applied
when the main switch was last turned off is used.
2-1-14
2AV/X
2-1-5 Transfer and separation section

The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller and drum separation claws.
A high voltage generated by the high-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) is applied to the transfer roller for transfer
charging. Toner adhered to the transfer roller is removed by the transfer cleaner.
Separation claw pulleys
Drum separation claws
Transfer roller
Transfer cleaner
Figure 2-1-20 Transfer and separation section
MPCB
HVTPCB
CN1-9
Drum
CN1-5
TC
CN1-2
24 V DC
TC REM
TC CONT
CN4-1
CN4-5
CN4-8
Transfer roller
2-1
Figure 2-1-21 Transfer and separation section block diagram
2-1-15
2AV/X
Start key
DM
RCL
RSW
TC REM
418 ms
474 ms
Timing chart 2-1-5 Operation of transfer

a: 418 ms after the registration clutch (RCL) turns on to start secondary paper feed, transfer charging (TC REM) starts.
b: 474 ms after the trailing edge of the paper turns the registration switch (RSW) off, transfer charging (TC REM) ends.
2-1
2-1-16
2AV/X
2-1-6 Cleaning section

The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer
process, and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner tank.
Cleaning spiral
Lower cleaning seal

Cleaning blade
Drum
Figure 2-1-22 Cleaning section
2-1
2-1-17
2AV/X
2-1-7 Charge erasing section

The cleaning lamp (CL) consists of LEDs which remove residual charge from the drum surface.
Cleaning lamp (CL)
Light-blocking lumirror
Figure 2-1-23 Charge erasing section

MPCB
CL
CL REM
CN12-2
Drum
Figure 2-1-24 Charge erasing section block diagram

Start key
DM
MC REM
CL
1316 ms
Timing chart 2-1-6 Operation of charge erasing

a: When the start key is pressed, the drive motor (DM) and cleaning lamp (CL) turn on simultaneously.
b: 1316 ms after main charging (MC REM) ends, the drive motor (DM) and cleaning lamp (CL) turn off simultaneously.
2-1-18
2AV/X
2-1-8 Fixing section

The fixing section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2-1-25. When paper reaches the fixing section after the transfer
process, it passes between the press roller and heat roller, which is heated by the fixing heater (FH). Pressure is applied
by the fixing unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted, fused and fixed onto the paper.
When the fixing process is completed, the paper is separated from the heat roller by heat roller separation claws and is
ejected from the fixing section by the rotation of the eject pulley and roller.
1 Upper fixing housing

2 Lower fixing housing
3 Fixing guide
4 Heat roller
5 Press roller
6 Heat roller separation claw
7 Fixing heater (FH)
8 Fixing unit thermostat (FTS)
9 Fixing unit thermistor (FTH)
0 Eject switch (ESW)
! Left fixing eject guide
@ Feedshift guide
# Eject roller
$ Eject pulley
% Eject guide
Figure 2-1-25 Fixing section
FTS
FH
CN2-1
SSW2
CN2-3
FTH
Heat roller
2-1
5 V DC
CN12-9
CN12-8
FTH
24 V DC R2
CN10-3
24 V DC R1
CN10-7
24 V DC R1
CN32-3
24 V DC
CN32-1
CN3-3
FH REM
CN4-1
SSW1
PSPCB
MPCB
Figure 2-1-26 Fixing section block diagram
2-1-19
MSW
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
160C/320F
MSW: ON
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
135C/275F
2AV/X
FH
1500 ms
1000 ms
PM
20 s
30 s
DM
DB REM
Half speed
Full speed
Half speed
CFM1, 2, 3
Timing chart 2-1-7 Operation of fixing section

a: 1500 ms after the main switch (MSW) is turned on, the fixing heater (FH) turns on to heat the heat roller. At the same
time, cooling fan motors 1, 2 and 3 (CFM1, 2 and 3) rotate at half speed.
b: 1000 ms after the fixing heater (FH) turns on, the polygon motor (PM) of the laser scanner unit and developing bias
(DB REM) turn on.
c: When the fixing temperature reaches the primary stabilization temperature (135C/275F), the drive motor (DM) turns
on. Cooling fan motors 1, 2 and 3 (CFM1, 2 and 3) start rotating at full speed.
d: When the fixing temperature reaches the secondary stabilization temperature (160C/320F), the fixing heater (FH)
turns on and off to maintain the fixing control temperature at 160C/320F and aging starts.
e: 20 s after the copier enters secondary stabilization, the drive motor (DM) turns off and aging ends.
f: 30 s after aging ends, the developing bias (DB REM) turns off and cooling fan motors 1, 2 and 3 (CFM1, 2 and 3)
start rotating at half speed.
2-1
2-1-20
2AV/X
2-2-1 Electrical parts layout

(1) PCBs
1
9
3
Machine front
10
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 PCBs
1. Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls the other PCBs, electrical components and optional devices.
2. Power source PCB (PSPCB) ....................... Generates 24 V DC, +12 V DC, 5V DC and 3.3 V DC; controls the fixing
heater.
3. High-voltage transformer PCB (HVTPCB) ... Main charging. Generates developing bias and high voltages for
transfer.
4. Inverter PCB (INPCB) .................................. Controls the exposure lamp.
5. CCD PCB (CCDPCB) .................................. Reads the image off originals.
6. Operation unit PCB (OPCB) ........................ Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs.
7. Laser diode PCB (LDPCB) .......................... Generates and controls the laser light.
8. Beam detection PCB (BDPCB) .................... Detects the laser light.
9. Memory PCB* (MEMPCB) ........................... Reads and outputs the image.
10. Drawer drive motor PCB* (DDMPCB) .......... Controls the drawer drive motor in the lower drawer.
*Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 20 cpm copier (the main PCB and memory PCB are integrated on one
PCB).
2-2-1
2AV/X
(2) Switches and sensors
19
18
20
22
26
24
1
23
5
21
25
15
16
11 9 7
13
;
6
4
17
14
Machine front
12 10 8
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-2 Switches and sensors

1.
2.
3.
4.
2-2
Main switch (MSW) ...................................... Turns the AC power on and off.

Safety switch 1 (SSW1) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened.
Safety switch 2 (SSW2) ............................... Breaks the safety circuit when the paper conveying unit is opened.
Safety switch 3* (SSW3) .............................. Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover of the lower drawer is
opened.
5. Upper paper switch (PSW-U) ....................... Detects the presence of paper in the upper drawer.
6. Lower paper switch* (PSW-L) ...................... Detects the presence of paper in the lower drawer.
7. Upper paper size switch 1 (PSSW1-U) ........ Detects the width of paper in the upper drawer.
8. Lower paper size switch 1* (PSSW1-L) ....... Detects the width of paper in the lower drawer.
9. Upper paper size switch 2 (PSSW2-U) ........ Detects the length of paper in the upper drawer.
10. Lower paper size switch 2* (PSSW2-L) ....... Detects the length of paper in the lower drawer.
15. Bypass paper switch** (BYPPSW) ............... Detects the presence of paper on the bypass tray.
2-2-2
2AV/X
16. Bypass paper width switch
(BYPPSW) ................................................... Detects the width of paper on the bypass tray.
17. Drawer feed switch* (DFSW) ....................... Detects a paper misfeed in the lower drawer.
18. Scanner home position switch
(SHPSW) ..................................................... Detects the optical system in the home position.
19. Original detection switch (ODSW) ................ Operates the original size detection sensor.
20. Original size detection sensor***
(OSDS) ........................................................ Detects the size of the original.
21. Registration switch (RSW) ........................... Controls the secondary paper feed start timing.
22. Eject switch (ESW) ....................................... Detects a paper misfeed in the fixing section.
23. Toner sensor (TNS) ...................................... Detects the toner density in the developing section.
24. Waste toner detection switch (WTDSW) ...... Detects the presence of the waste toner tank.
25. Humidity sensor (HUMSENS) ...................... Detects absolute humidity.
26. Fixing unit thermistor (FTH) ......................... Detects the heat roller temperature.
*Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 20 cpm copier.
**For the 20 cpm copier only.
***Optional for 220-240 V specifications of the 20 cpm copier.
2-2
2-2-3
2AV/X
(3) Motors
5,6
1
3
7
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-3 Motors
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Drive motor (DM) ......................................... Drives the machine.

Scanner motor (SM) .................................... Drives the optical system.
Toner feed motor (TFM) ............................... Replenishes toner.
Cooling fan motor 1 (CFM1) ........................ Cools the fixing section.
Cooling fan motor 2 (CFM2) ........................ Cools the machine interior.
Cooling fan motor 3 (CFM3) ........................ Cools the machine interior.
Polygon motor (PM) ..................................... Drives the polygon mirror.
Drawer drive motor* (DDM) ......................... Drives the paper feed system in the lower drawer.
2-2
2-2-4
2AV/X
(4) Other electrical components
8
7
6
4
1
3
;
2
Machine front
Machine inside
10
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-4 Other electrical components

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Upper paper feed clutch (PFCL-U) .............. Primary paper feed from the upper drawer.
Lower paper feed clutch* (PFCL-L) ............. Primary paper feed from the lower drawer.
Bypass paper feed clutch (BYPPFCL) ......... Primary paper feed from the bypass tray.
Registration clutch (RCL) ............................. Secondary paper feed.
Exposure lamp (EL) ..................................... Exposes originals.
Cleaning lamp (CL) ...................................... Removes residual charge from the drum surface.
Fixing heater (FH) ........................................ Heats the heat roller.
Fixing unit thermostat (FTS) ........................ Prevents overheating in the fixing section.
Total counter (TC) ........................................ Displays the total number of copies produced.
Drawer heater** (DH) ................................... Dehumidifies the drawer section.
2-2

**Optional.
2-2-5
2AV/X
2-3-1 Power source PCB
Power source PCB

AC input
D1
Noise
filter
circuit
Rectifier circuit T1
D9
Q1
C14
C29,30
24 V DC
output
circuit
IC2
C34
+
Zero-cross
detection circuit
PC1
Switching
regulator
circuit IC1
PC2
TR1
PC3
Fixing heater control circuit
PT1
24 V DC
12 V DC
output circuit
IC3
5.1 V DC output
circuit IC4
GND
12 V DC
C32
GND
5.1 V DC
C37,91
3.3 V DC
output circuit
IC5
GND
C43
3.3 V DC
GND
Overvoltage
detection circuit
Phase
control
circuit
HEATER REM
5 V DC
HEATER COMMON
Figure 2-3-1 Power source PCB block diagram

The power source PCB (PSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 24 V DC, 5.1 V DC, 3.3 V DC
and 12 V DC. It includes a noise filter circuit, a rectifier circuit, a switching regulator circuit, a 24 V DC output circuit, a 5 V DC
output circuit, a 3.3 V DC output circuit, a 12 V DC output circuit, a fixing heater control circuit and a phase control circuit.
The noise filter circuit consists mainly of a line filter and capacitors. It reduces external noise from the AC input and prevents
switching noise generated by the power source PCB from leaving the machine.
The rectifier circuit full-wave rectifies the AC input that has passed through the noise filter circuit using the diode bridge D1.
The smoothing capacitor C14 smoothes out the pulsed current from the diode bridge.
In the switching control circuit, PWM controller IC1 turns the power MOSFET Q1 on and off to switch the current induced in
the primary coil of the transformer T1.
The 24 V DC output circuit smoothes the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via diode D9 and
smoothing capacitors C29 and C30, and outputs a stable 24 V DC by the function of the shunt regulator IC2. It also monitors
the 24 V DC output status, which is fed back to PWM controller IC1 in the switching control circuit via photocoupler PC2.
PWM controller IC1 controls the switching duty width of the power MOSFET Q1 based on the output voltage status,
producing a stable 24 V DC output.
The 5.1 V DC output circuit consists of a step-down chopper circuit that uses IC4 as the control IC. It outputs a stable 5.1 V
DC.
The 3.3 V DC output circuit converts the 5 V DC from the 5 V DC output circuit to a stable 3.3 V DC by means of the 4-pin
regulator IC5.
The 12 V DC output circuit converts the 24 V DC from the 24 V DC output circuit to a stable 12 V DC by means of the 4-pin
regulator IC3.
The phase control circuit and zero-cross detection circuit prevent flicker problems. These circuits modify the fixing heater on
signal from the main PCB (MPCB) to prevent abrupt variations in current when turning the fixing heaters on and off, and
convey the signal to the fixing heater control circuit.
The fixing heater control circuit is controlled by the fixing heater on signal modified at the phase control circuit. The
phototriac PT1 turns on when the fixing heater on signal goes low. When the phototriac PT1 is turned on, current flows
through the triac TR1 to turn the fixing heaters on.
2-3-1
2-3
2AV/X
100V
LUG3
IC6
IC8
IC7
C46
LUG1
C31
PT1
HS2
PC1
Q3
C45
C32
TR1
L6
D1
TH1
C14
C42
L3
HS5
C11
IC4
C36
LUG2
CN4
Z2
L4
R15
L2
C17
B1
B2
D9
AL
T1
L1
PC3
CN5
C34
C30
C1
C91
C13
Q1
C37
CN2
C43
C15
IC5
C35
R31
HS3
IC3
L5 D13
C29
F3
Z1
C23
TB2
IC1
PC2
TB1
CN3
TB5
C2
TB4
HS4
F1
TB3
200V
LUG3
IC6
IC8
IC7
C46
LUG1
C31
PT1
HS2
C45
TR1
D1
TH1
L6
IC4
C36
C14
C42
L3
HS5
LUG2
CN4
Z2
L4
T1
L1
C17
B1
B2
D9
AL
L2
R15
PC3
CN2
C34
C30
C1
C91
C13
Q1
C37
CN5
C43
C15
IC5
C35
C11
C32
R31
HS3
IC3
PC1
Q3
L5 D13
F2
C23
Z1
IC1
F3
PC2
TB2
C29
C2
2-3
TB4
HS4
F1
TB3
Figure 2-3-2 Power source PCB silk-screen diagram
2-3-2
TB1
CN3
TB5
2AV/X
Terminals (CN)
TB-1
TB-2
TB-1
TB-2
TB-4
TB-5
TB-4
TB-5
2-3
2-1
2-3
2-1
3-1, 2
3-3, 4
3-5, 6
3-7, 8
3-9
3-10
4-1
3-3
4-3
4-2
5-2
5-1
5-2
5-1
Voltage
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
24 V DC
5.1 V DC
3.3 V DC
0/5 V DC
12 V DC
120 V AC
220-240 V AC
Remarks
120 V AC supply, input
220-240 V AC supply, input*2
120 V AC supply for MSW, output
220-240 V AC supply for MSW, output*2
AC supply for FH, output
AC supply for FH, output*2
24 V DC supply for MPCB, output
5.1 V DC supply for MPCB, output
3.3 V DC supply for MPCB, output
FH on/off, input
12 V DC supply for MPCB, output
120 V AC supply for drawer heater*1 (DH), output
220-240 V AC supply for drawer heater*1 (DH), output*2
2-3
*1: Optional. *2: For 220-240 V specifications.
2-3-3
2AV/X
2-3-2 Main PCB

15 cpm copier
Main PCB
Clock signal
Analog image data
Odd
S/H
IC
Even
ADC
IC2
Print data
FEEPROM
IC11
MIP
IC4
BUF
CCD PCB
LSU
Printer data
Printer controller*
Memory image data

Address bus
CPU
IC16
Memory PCB*
Data bus
SRAM
IC15,17
XIO
IC19,25
Control signal
output
STDF*
Driver
Detection signal input
Job separator*
Optional drawer*
Operation unit PCB
Drive unit
Scanner unit
Control signal output
Driver
Developing unit
Paper feed unit
Fixing unit
High-voltage
transformer PCB
* Optional.
Figure 2-3-3 Main PCB block diagram (15 cpm copier)
The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC16. It communicates with the printer controller and controls the
memory PCB, image processing system and engine drive system.
The CPU IC16 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM IC15 and IC17 for work memory and backup memory. In
accordance with the control program in FEEPROM IC11, the CPU IC16 communicates with the printer controller via the
serial communication function in the CPU. The CPU IC16 also controls the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), which is for image input
control, and the LSU, which is for image output control, via the image processing ASIC MIP IC4, and drives the operation
section and machine, conveys paper and detects abnormalities via XIO IC19 and IC25.
2-3
2-3-4
2AV/X
CN25
1 CN23 6
1 CN22
10
CN24
8
9
2
1
1 CN20 5
6
5
CN21
IC2
CN28
2
1
20
24
13
12
2AV2801
REV:2
14
13
11
12
12
48
IC5 1
104
IC6
24
105
CN26
24
23
1
2
25
IC4
36
37
157
10
53
IC3
1
IC1
20
BAT1
11
IC9
1
IC8
10
IC7
IC10
+
1
15
28
14
1
16
15
IC16
IC17
28 15
B40
B39
A40
A39
14
IC15
CN30
B2
B1
A2
A1
IC14
IC12
24
25
IC13
IC31
IC11
30
CN16
CN31
51
50
31
B1
73
2
8 1
18
17 1
CN12
CN13
IC30
CN10
CN11
7 1 CN323
2
1
11
IC27
IC26
2
1
12
13
15
14
CN8
72
37
IC29
IC28
73
36
CN9
8
7
IC25
IC24
108
IC23
A1
B12
IC19
IC22
IC21
36
B2
B1
A2
A1
37
CN14
IC20
72
109
CN15
108
A12
B20
B19
A20
A19
IC18
2
1
25
26
CN7
14
2
1
2
15 1
CN4
6
7
CN6
11
1
CN3
CN1
2-3
10
Figure 2-3-4 Main PCB silk-screen diagram (15 cpm copier)
2-3-5
2AV/X
20 cpm copier
Main PCB
Scan signal
Driver
Operation unit PCB

SRAM
IC19
LCD controller
IC12
LCD display data
BUF
LCD
Address bus
Operation
unit CPU
IC10
Flash tool
Data bus
Clock signal
FEEPROM
IC16
Analog image data

Odd
S/H
Even
IC
ADC
IC6
Print data
Fax transmission/
reception data
MIP
IC15
CCD PCB
BUF
LSU
BUF
Fax unit*
Printer data
Printer controller*
FEEPROM
IC28
Memory image data

Address bus
Scanner PCB*
Data bus
Main CPU
IC23
MCP
IC22
DIMM
STDF*
SRAM
IC39,40
XIO
IC42,43
SRDF*
CODEC
IC46
Finisher*
Duplex unit*
Driver
Job separator*
Optional drawer*
Drive unit
Driver
Scanner unit
Developing unit
Paper feed unit
Fixing unit
High-voltage
transformer PCB
* Optional.
2-3
Figure 2-3-5 Main PCB block diagram (20 cpm copier)
2-3-6
2AV/X
The main PCB (MPCB) consists of the main CPU and operation unit CPU. The main CPU IC23 communicates with other
PCBs and controls memory copying, the image processing system and the engine drive system. The operation unit CPU
IC10 controls the LCD display and the entire operation section.
The main CPU IC23 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM IC39 and IC40 for work memory and backup memory. In
accordance with the control program in FEEPROM IC28, the main CPU IC23 communicates with the operation unit CPU,
printer controller, fax unit and finisher via the serial communication function in the CPU and XIO IC43 and IC43. The main
CPU IC23 controls ASIC MCP IC22 and CODEC IC46 during memory copying for sort and rotation copies. The main CPU
IC23 also controls the CCD PCB (CCDPCB), which is for image input control, and the LSU, which is for image output control
via the image processing ASIC MIP IC15, and drives the machine, conveys paper and detects abnormalities via XIO IC42
and IC43.
The operation unit CPU IC10 operates on an 8-bit bus. It uses the SRAM IC19 for work memory. In accordance with the
control program in FEEPROM IC16, which also contains LCD display fonts, the operation unit CPU IC10 controls key
switches and LEDs on the operation unit PCB (OPCB) and controls the LCD display via the LCD controller IC12.
2-3
2-3-7
2AV/X
CN28
1
2
CN19
IC41
37
144
CN9
12
13
15
14
CN8
2-3-8
IC21
12
11
CN16
CN17
2
1
B1 A11
2
81 1
CN14
1
14
2
1
2
1
CN4
B11
1718
CN5
CN7 4
15
6
7
CN6
CN3
21
11 1
CN2
Figure 2-3-6 Main PCB silk-screen diagram (20 cpm copier)
2-3
CN15
10
11
1
2
8 1
7
25
26
CN10
2
1
2
1
36
IC51
IC50
72
IC49
37
+
IC48
73
IC47
36
37
36
144
IC40
IC52
28
IC44
BT1
144 IC46
16
15
12
73
A1
IC43
108
IC42
108
1
14
CN12
IC38
IC37
15 IC39 14
28
15
CN13
IC34
B2
B1
A2
A1
48
B20
B19
A20
A19
24
IC35
IC28
25
IC29
228
IC32
229
153
100
IC30
152
IC27
1
81
IC31
CN31
80
CN18
30
IC26
31
50
IC23
51
IC36
304
IC33
CN30
IC22
IC25
B2
B1
A2
A1
IC19
2AX2801
REV : 3
76
39
40
B1
B2
A1
A2
CN29
2
1
3
71
CN32
B29
B30
A29
A30
52
51
77
IC7
14
12
157
156
CN11
99
B25
B26
A25
A26
B40
B39
A40 IC18
A39
100
CN34
104
12
IC24
CN33
48
65
64
41
13
48
80
40
1
50 49
37
IC20
25
1
24
36
208
A12
9
8 IC12 1
24
IC14
A1
B12
3
4
28
25 IC16
IC45
19
15 IC9 14
B1
B2
A1
A2 IC812
IC11 14
13
IC15
52
53
IC53
CN20
CN21
1
5 1
8
5
IC6
IC2
IC1
30
2
1
IC5
13
IC10
CN24
10
9
CN27
IC3
CN23
CN22
1
6 1
21
22
CN25 8
2
1
IC13
10
11
13 IC4
12
24
CN26
2
1
CN1
10
2AV/X
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
Remarks
1-2
1-1
3.3 V DC
3.3 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
1-5, 6
1-3, 4
5 V DC
5 V DC supply from PSPCB, input
1-9, 10
1-7, 8
24 V DC
3-1
3-2
12 V DC
3-3
1-3
0/5 V DC
FH on/off, output
3-4
1-7
0/24 V DC
MSW on/off, input
3-5
1-7
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for MSW, output
3-6
3-8
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for RSW, output
3-7
3-8
0/5 V DC
RSW on/off, input
3-10
3-9
0/5 V DC
PSW-U on/off, input
3-11
3-9
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for PSW-U, output
4-1
4-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for HVTPCB, output
4-3
4-2
0/5 V DC
Main charging on/off, output
4-4
4-2
0/5 V DC
Developing bias on/off, output
4-5
4-2
0/5 V DC
Transfer charging on/off, output
4-6
4-2
0 - 5 V DC
GRID control voltage, output
4-7
4-2
0 - 5 V DC
Developing bias control voltage, output
4-8
4-2
0 - 5 V DC
Transfer charging control voltage, output
4-9
4-2
0/5 V DC
Main charging ALM signal, input
4-10
4-2
0/24 V DC
RCL on/off, output
4-11
4-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for RCL, output
4-12
4-2
0/24 V DC
BYPPFCL on/off, output
4-13
4-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for BYPPFCL, output
4-14
4-2
0/24 V DC
PFCL-U on/off, output
4-15
4-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for PFCL-U, output
5-1
5-2
0/5 V DC
Duplex unit*4 detection signal, input
5-3
5-2
0/24 V DC
FSSOL*4 latch-on signal, output
5-4
5-2
0/24 V DC
FSSOL*4 actuate signal, output
5-5
5-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for FSSOL*4, output
5-7
5-6
0/5 V DC
DUPPCSW2*4 on/off, input
5-8
5-6
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for DUPPCSW2*4, output
5-10
5-9
0/5 V DC
DUPPCSW1*4 on/off, input
5-11
5-9
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for DUPPCSW1*4, output
6-1
6-3
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for BYPPSW*1, output
6-2
6-3
0/5 V DC
BYPPSW*1 on/off, input
6-4
6-7
0/5 V DC
BYPPWSW width detection signal, input
6-5
6-7
0/5 V DC
6-6
6-7
0/5 V DC
7-1
7-2
ETTH detection voltage, input
7-3
7-2
HUMSENS detection voltage, input
7-4
7-2
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for HUMSENS, output
8-1
8-22
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for lower drawer*2, optional drawer*3, output
8-2
8-22
24 V DC
8-3
8-22
0/24 V DC
PFCL-L*2 on/off, output
8-4
8-22
0/24 V DC
PFCL (ST) 1*3 on/off, output
8-5
8-22
0/24 V DC
PFCL (ST) 2*3 on/off, output
8-6
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
SSW3*2 scan signal, output (SCAN1)
8-7
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-8
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-9
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
SSW3*2 return signal, input (SENS0)
8-10
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-11
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-12
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-13
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
8-14
8-22
5/0 V DC (pulse)
*1: For 20 cpm copier only. *2: Standard for 20 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.
*3: Optional for both 20 cpm and 15 cpm copiers. *4: Optional for 20 cpm copier only.
2-3
2-3-9
2AV/X
2-3
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
Remarks
2
8-15
8-22
0/5 V DC
PSW-L* on/off, input
8-16
8-22
0/5 V DC
PSW (ST) 1*3 on/off, input
8-17
8-22
0/5 V DC
PSW (ST) 2*3 on/off, input
8-18
8-22
0/24 V DC
DDM*2 on/off, output
8-19
8-22
0/24 V DC
DDM (ST) 1*3 on/off, output
8-20
8-22
0/24 V DC
DDM (ST) 2*3 on/off, output
8-21
8-22
5 V DC
8-23
8-22
0/5 V DC
DFSW*2 on/off, input
8-24
8-22
0/5 V DC
DFSW (ST) 1*3 on/off, input
8-25
8-22
0/5 V DC
DFSW (ST) 2*3 on/off, input
8-26
8-22
0/5 V DC (pulse)
DDM drive clock pulse, output
9-2
9-1
0/5 V DC
PSSW1-U on/off, input
9-4
9-3
0/5 V DC
9-6
9-5
0/5 V DC
9-8
9-7
0/5 V DC
10-1
10-4
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for key card*3, key counter*3, output
10-3
10-4
0/24 V DC
SSW1 on/off, input
10-5
10-4
0/5 V DC
Key card*3, key counter*3 copy count signal, output
10-6
10-4
0/5 V DC
Key card*3, key counter*3 connection signal, input
10-7
10-4
24 V DC
SSW2 on/off, output
11-1
10-4
24/14 V DC
TFM drive control signal (+), output
11-2
10-4
14/24 V DC
TFM drive control signal (-), output
11-3
10-4
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for CFM1, output
11-4
10-4
12/24 V DC
CFM1 half speed/full speed, output
11-5
10-4
0/24 V DC
CFM1 on/off, output
11-6
10-4
24 V DC
11-7
10-4
12/24 V DC
11-8
10-4
0/24 V DC
CFM2 on/off, output
11-9
10-4
24 V DC
11-10
10-4
12/24 V DC
11-11
10-4
0/24 V DC
CFM3 on/off, output
12-1
12-12
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for CL, output
12-2
12-12
0/24 V DC
CL on/off, output
12-3
12-12
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for total counter, output
12-4
12-12
0/24 V DC
Total counter on/off, input
12-6
12-5
0/5 V DC
ESW on/off, input
12-7
12-5
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for ESW, output
12-8
12-5
0 - 5 V DC
FTH detection voltage, input
12-9
12-5
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for FTH, output
12-10
12-12
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for DM, output
12-11
12-12
24 V DC
12-14
12-12
5 V DC
12-16
12-12
0/5 V DC
DM on/off, output
12-17
12-12
0/5 V DC (pulse)
DM drive clock pulse, output
12-18
12-12
0/5 V DC
DM LOCK signal, input
13-1
13-4
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for TNS, output
13-2
13-4
TNS detection voltage, input
13-3
13-4
0 - 15 V DC
TNS control voltage, output
13-5
13-6
0/5 V DC
Connection detection signal, input
13-7
13-8
0/5 V DC
WTDSW on/off, input
14-6A
14-4A
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for STDF*3, SRDF*4, output
14-7A
14-4A
5 V DC
14-10A
14-8A
24 V DC
14-10A
14-8A
24 V DC
14-1B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OSLED*4 (red) on/off, output
2-3-10
2AV/X
Terminals (CN)
Voltage
Remarks
4
14-2B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OSLED* (green) on/off, output
14-3B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
SBPSOL*4 release signal, output
14-4B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
SBPSOL*4 actuate signal, output
14-5B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OFCL*4 on/off, output
14-6B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
EFSSOL*4 on/off, output
14-8B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
SBFSSOL*4 on/off, output
14-9B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OFSOL*4 release signal, output
14-10B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OFSOL*4 actuate signal, output
14-11B
14-4A
0/5 V DC
OFM*4 ENABLE signal, output
15-1A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OFM*3 ENABLE signal, output
15-2A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3, OSBSW*4 on/off, input
15-3A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3, OFSW*4 on/off, input
15-4A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3, OSSW*4 on/off, input
15-5A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3 on/off, input
15-6A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3 on/off, input
15-7A
14-4
0/5 V DC
STDF*3, SRDF*4 installed/not installed signal, input
15-8A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSWSW*4 on/off, input
15-9A
14-4
0/5 V DC
DFSSW2*3 on/off, input
15-10A
14-4
0/5 V DC
DFSSW1*3 on/off, input
15-11A
14-4
0/5 V DC
OSDPCB*3, OSLSW*4 on/off, input
15-12A
14-4
0/5 V DC
DFTSW*3 on/off, input
15-2B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OFM*3 control signal OFM RET, output
15-3B
14-4
0/5 V DC (pulse)
OFM*3 drive clock pulse, output
15-4B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OFM*3 rotational direction switching signal OFM CWB, output
15-5B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OCM*3 ENABLE signal, output
15-6B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OCM*3 control signal OCM RET, output
15-7B
14-4
0/5 V DC (pulse)
OCM*3 drive clock pulse, output
15-8B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OCM*3 rotational direction switching signal OCM CWB, output
15-9B
14-4
OCM*3 current control voltage OCM Vref, output
15-10B
14-4
0/5 V DC
OCM*3 drive control signal OCM M3, output
15-11B
14-4
0/5 V DC
15-12B
14-4
0/5 V DC
16-1
16-2
0/5 V DC
Job separator*3, duplex unit*4 connection signal, input
16-3
16-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for FSSOL*3, output
16-4
16-2
0/24 V DC
FSSOL*3 actuate signal, output
16-5
16-2
24/0 V DC
FSSOL*3 release signal, output
16-6
16-8
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for JBESW*3, output
16-7
16-8
0/5 V DC
JBESW*3 on/off, input
16-10
16-2
24/0 V DC
SBSOL*4 actuate signal, output
16-11
16-2
24/0 V DC
SBSOL*4 release signal, output
16-13
16-12
0/5 V DC
JOFSW*3 on/off, input
16-14
16-12
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for JOFSW*3, output
16-15
16-12
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for LED*3, output
16-16
16-12
0/5 V DC
LED*3 on/off, output
18-1
18-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for MDPCB*4, output
18-3
18-4
5 V DC
5 V DC supply for MDPCB*4, output
18-5
18-4
0/5 V DC (pulse)
FSM*4 drive clock pulse, output
18-6
18-4
0/5 V DC
FSM*4 R/L signal, output
18-7
18-4
0/5 V DC
FSM*4 on/off, output
18-8
18-4
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for DUPOCSW*4, output
18-9
18-4
0/5 V DC
FSM*4 MODE signal, output
18-10
18-4
24 V DC
DUPOCSW*4 on/off, output
18-11
18-4
0/5 V DC
MACHINE TYPE signal, input
20-1
20-2
24 V DC
24 V DC supply for PM, output
20-3
20-2
0/5 V DC
PM S/S signal, output
2-3
2-3-11
2AV/X
2-3
Terminals (CN)
20-4
20-2
20-5
20-2
21-1
21-2
21-3
21-2
21-5
21-2
21-6
21-2
21-7
21-2
22-2
22-1
22-4
22-3
22-6
22-5
22-8
22-7
22-10
22-9
23-2
23-1
23-4
23-3
23-6
23-5
24-1
24-5
24-2
24-5
24-3
24-5
24-4
24-5
25-2
25-1
25-3
25-1
25-5
25-4
25-6
25-4
25-8
25-7
25-9
25-7
26-1
27-12
26-2
27-12
26-3
27-12
26-4
27-12
26-5
27-12
26-6
27-12
26-7
27-12
26-8
27-12
26-9
27-12
26-10
27-12
26-11
27-12
26-13
27-12
26-14
27-12
26-15
27-12
26-16
27-12
26-17
27-12
26-18
27-12
26-19
27-12
26-20
27-12
26-21
27-12
26-22
27-12
27-1
27-12
27-2
27-12
27-3
27-12
27-4
27-12
27-5
27-12
27-6
27-12
27-7
27-12
27-8
27-12
27-9
27-12
27-10
27-12
2-3-12
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
12 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0 - 5 V DC
-12-0 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
PM READY signal, input
PM drive clock pulse, output
LDPCB HSYNC signal, input
5 V DC supply for LDPCB, output
LDPCB ENABLE signal, output
LDPCB VIDEO signal, output
LDPCB S/H signal, output
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, output
CCDPCB CLP signal, output
CCDPCB RESET signal, output
CCDPCB clock pulse, output
CCDPCB clock pulse, output
12 V DC supply for CCDPCB, output
CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), input
CCDPCB image signal (ODD), input
EL on/off, output
EL on/off, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
24 V DC supply for INPCB, output
ODSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for ODSW, output
SHPSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for SHPSW, output
5 V DC supply for OSDS, output
OSDS on/off, input
OPCB KEY0 signal, input
OPCB LEDON0 signal, output
OPCB SCAN7 signal, output
LCD Vdd signal, output
LCD Vee signal, output
LCD UD3 signal, output
LCD CP signal, output
LCD FLM signal, output
LCD LEDENB signal, output
LCD LP signal, output
2AV/X
Terminals (CN)
27-11
27-12
28-1
24-5
28-2
24-5
28-3
24-5
28-4
24-5
28-5
24-5
28-6
24-5
32-1
10-4
32-3
10-4
Voltage
-12-0 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
Remarks
LCD Vo signal, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (_A)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (A)
SM coil energization pulse, output (B)
24 V DC supply for SM, output
SM coil energization pulse, output (_B)
24 V DC supply for SSW2, output
SSW2 on/off, input
2-3
2-3-13
2AV/X
2-3-3 CCD PCB

CCD PCB
Main PCB
1
2
CCD
IC2
Logic IC1
RS
RS
CLP
CLP
SHIFT
SHIFT
Odd
Transistor TR2
Clock signal generator

ASIC
Odd
Analog signal
processing circuit
Even
Transistor TR1
Even
Figure 2-3-7 CCD PCB block diagram
The CCD PCB (CCDPCB) is equipped with a CCD sensor IC2 for original scanning.
The CCD sensor IC2 is controlled by the clock signals 1, 2, RS, CLP and SHIFT for CCD drive from the main PCB
(MPCB) via logic IC1.
Image signals are analog signals. Even- and odd-numbered pixels are output separately. These analog image signals are
amplified by emitter followers in the transistors TR1 and TR2 and then transmitted to the analog signal processing circuit in
the main PCB (MPCB).
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-3
2-3-14
Voltage
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
12 V DC
Remarks
CCDPCB clock pulse, input
CCDPCB clock pulse, input
CCDPCB RESET signal, input
CCDPCB CLP signal, input
CCDPCB SHIFT signal, input
CCDPCB image signal (ODD), output
CCDPCB image signal (EVEN), output
12 V DC supply from MPCB, input
2AV/X
2-3-4 Laser diode PCB

Main PCB
Laser diode PCB
Photo
sensor
PH1
LD1
Laser driver
IC1
/ADJUST
/ENABLE
Driver
/VIDEO
/BD
Figure 2-3-8 Laser diode PCB block diagram
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) consists of the laser diode LD1 and laser driver IC1.
The laser driver IC1 on the laser diode PCB (LDPCB) turns the laser diode LD1 on and off according to the image data
received from the main PCB (MPCB). Upon detection of a laser beam from the laser diode LD1, the photo sensor PH1
outputs a horizontal sync signal (/BD) to the main PCB (MPCB).
The laser diode PCB (LDPCB) adjusts the laser diode drive current (APC) for each line scanned outside the image area
when /ADJUST is low to keep the laser beam output constant.
Terminals (CN)
1-2
1-7
1-3
1-7
1-4
1-7
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-7
Voltage
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
Remarks
LCDPCB S/H signal, input
LCDPCB VIDEO signal, input
LCDPCB ENABLE signal, input
5 V DC supply for LCDPCB, input
LCDPCB HSYNC signal, output
2-3
2-3-15
CFM1,2,3
DB REM
DM
PM
FH
MSW
CN11-5,8,11
CN4-4
CN12-16
CN20-3,4,5
CN3-3
CN3-4
1500 ms
Primary stabilization
fixing temperature
135C/275F
Half speed
1000 ms
Secondary stabilization
fixing temperature
160C/320F
MSW: ON
20 s
Full speed
Timing chart No. 1 From the main switch turned on to machine stabilization
30 s
Half speed
2AV/X
2-4
2-4-1
2-4
2-4-2
CN12-16
DM
Rev. rotation
CN28-1,3,4,6
CN12-16
SM
DM
Off
Fwd. rotation
Rev. rotation
Off
Fwd. rotation
SHPSW: OFF
CN28-1,3,4,6
SM
SHPSW: ON
200 P
200 P
200 P
Timing chart No. 2 Scanner initialization
113 P
113 P
410 P
410 P
10774 P
10774 P
10364 P
10364 P
1078 P
1078 P
2AV/X
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 3 Copying an A5R/51/2" 81/2" original onto a sheet of A3/11" 17" copy paper from the bypass tray, magnification ratio 200%
Start key
Any key
Fwd. rotation
SM
CN28-1,3,4,6
Rev. rotation
1078 P
472 P
2834 P
2834 P
2834 P
34 P
2362 P
5136 P
4024 P
178 ms
DM
CN12-16
RCL
CN4-10
BYPPFCL
CN4-12
3000 ms
100 ms
MC REM
CN4-3
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
ESW
CN12-6
TC REM
CN4-5
DB REM
CN4-4
500 ms
1316 ms
263 ms
840 ms
300 ms
418 ms
474 ms
30 s
2-4
2-4-3
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 4 Continuous copying of an A4/11" 81/2" original onto two sheets of A4/11" 81/2" copy paper from the upper drawer, magnification ratio 100% (20 cpm copier)
Start key
Any key
Fwd. rotation
SM
CN28-1,3,4,6
Rev. rotation
1078 P
472 P
DM
2834 P
2834 P
2834 P
2362 P
4048 P
5294 P
168 P
CN12-16
178 ms
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
PFCL-U
CN4-14
2927 ms
100 ms
MC REM
CN4-3
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
500 ms
1316 ms
263 ms
840 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
TC REM
CN4-5
DB REM
CN4-4
418 ms
474 ms
263 ms
418 ms
300 ms
474 ms
30 s
2-4
2-4-4
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 5 Continuous copying of an A4/11" 81/2" original onto two sheets of A4/11" 81/2" copy paper from the upper drawer, magnification ratio 100% (15 cpm copier)
Start key
Any key
Fwd. rotation
SM
CN28-1,3,4,6
Rev. rotation
1078 P
472 P
DM
2834 P
2834 P
2834 P
2362 P
168 P
5294 P
5294 P
5294 P
CN12-16
178 ms
178 ms
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
100 ms
PFCL-U
4048 P
CN4-14
3871 ms
MC REM
CN4-3
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
500 ms
1316 ms
263 ms
840 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
TC REM
CN4-5
263 ms
418 ms
418 ms
474 ms
DB REM
300 ms
474 ms
CN4-4
30 s
2-4
2-4-5
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 6 Continuous copying of an A3/11" 17" original onto two sheets of A5R/51/2" 81/2" copy paper from the lower drawer, magnification ratio 50%, ejection to the job separator
Start key
Fwd. rotation
CN28-1,3,4,6
SM
Rev. rotation
1078 P
9106 P
10524 P
340 P
CN12-16
DM
185 ms
*1
DDM
CN8-18
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
PFCL-L*1
100 ms
CN8-3
6667 ms
MC REM
CN4-3
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
500 ms
1316 ms
270 ms
270 ms
1840 ms
300 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
JBESW*2
CN16-7
TC REM
CN4-5
418 ms
418 ms
474 ms
DB REM
474 ms
CN4-4
30 s
*1: Optional for 15 cpm copier/standard for 20 cpm copier.
2-4
2-4-6
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 7 Continuous copying of an A4R/81/2" 11" original onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" 11" copy paper from optional drawer 1, magnification ratio 100% (15 cpm copier)
Start key
DM
CN12-16
DDM
CN8-18
DDM (ST) 1 CN8-19
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
100 ms
PFCL (ST) 1 CN8-4

5715 ms*
MC REM
CN4-3
500 ms
1316 ms
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
ESW
CN12-6
DFSW
CN8-23
TC REM
CN4-5
DB REM
CN4-4
270 ms
270 ms
300 ms
300 ms
840 ms
300 ms
300 ms
380 ms
380 ms
418 ms
418 ms
474 ms
474 ms
30 s
*4800 ms when the optional memory board is installed.
2-4
2-4-7
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 8 Continuous copying of an A4/11" 81/2" original onto two sheets of A4/11" 81/2" copy paper from optional drawer 1, magnification ratio 100%, ejection to the finisher (20 cpm copier)
Start key
DM
CN12-16
DDM
CN8-18
DDM (ST) 1 CN8-19

High speed
PCM
CN6-9,10,
11,12
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
100 ms
PFCL (ST) 1 CN8-4

2927 ms
MC REM
CN4-3
500 ms
1316 ms
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
270 ms
270 ms
300 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
JBESW
CN16-7
1600 ms
300 ms
380 ms
DFSW
CN8-23
TC REM
CN4-5
DB REM
CN4-4
1740 ms
380 ms
300 ms
474 ms
474 ms
418 ms
418 ms
30 s
2-4
2-4-8
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 9 Continuous copying of an A4/11" 81/2" original onto two sheets of A4R/81/2" 11" copy paper from optional drawer 1, magnification ratio 100%, ejection to the finisher (20 cpm copier)
Start key
DM
CN12-16
DDM
CN8-18
DDM (ST) 1 CN8-19
DDM (ST) 2 CN8-20
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
100 ms
PFCL (ST) 2 CN8-5

3871 ms*
MC REM
CN4-3
500 ms
1316 ms
CL
CN12-2
RSW
CN3-7
300 ms
270 ms
270 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
DFSW
CN8-23
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
380 ms
DFSW(ST)
CN8-24
TC REM
CN4-5
DB REM
CN4-4
300 ms
380 ms
550 ms
550 ms
418 ms
418 ms
474 ms
*3244 ms when the optional memory board is installed.
840 ms
474 ms
30 s
2-4
2-4-9
2AV/X
Timing chart No. 10 Duplex copying of a single-sided A4R/81/2" 11" original onto a duplex A4R/81/2" 11" copy from optional drawer 2, magnification ratio 100%, ejection to the job separator
(20 cpm copier)
Start key
DM
CN12-16
DDM
CN8-18
DDM (ST) 1 CN8-19
DDM (ST) 2 CN8-20

High speed
FSM
CN18-7
1600 ms
105 ms
RCL
CN4-10
100 ms
PFCL (ST) 2
CN8-5
4445 ms
MC REM
100 ms
CN4-3
1316 ms
CL
500 ms
CN12-2
RSW
270 ms
295 ms
CN3-7
270 ms
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
ESW
CN12-6
JBESW
CN16-7
155 ms
DFSW
300 ms
CN8-23
DFSW (ST)
CN8-24
300 ms
1840 ms
300 ms
300 ms
380 ms
380 ms
550 ms
550 ms
DUPPCSW1
CN5-10
DUPPCSW2
300 ms
CN5-7
TC REM
CN4-5
418 ms
418 ms
474 ms
418 ms
474 ms
474 ms
DB REM
CN4-4
2-4
30 s
2-4-10
2AV/X
General wiring diagram (1)

A
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW (ST) 1
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BE
LB
BE
PE
BE
GY
BE
BN
BE
LB
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1-L PSSW2-L PSSW3-L PSSW4-L
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
SSW3
BK
WE
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 2 REM
LB
PE
PE
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GN
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW (ST) 2
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
BK
1
WE
2
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
DFSW (ST) 1
2 1
SCAN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PSSW1 (ST) 2
PSSW2 (ST) 2
PSSW3 (ST) 2
PSSW4 (ST) 2
SSW (ST) 2
SENS 0
PSSW1 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW (ST) 2
Output
DDM (ST) 2 CLK
DDM (ST) 2 CLK
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 1
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
LB
13
PE
12
PE
11
10
YW
9
YW
8
7
OE
6
BE
5
GY
4
GY
3
2
GN
1
DFSW
HEATER LIVE
1
HEATER NEUTRAL 2
DDM (ST) 1 REM
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
DFSW (ST) 2
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1
(ST) 1
PSSW2
(ST) 1
PSSW3
(ST) 1
PSSW4
(ST) 1
SSW
(ST) 1
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
BK
1
WE
2
BK
WE
1
2
BE
LB
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW-L
PFCL (ST) 2
BE
BN
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
Output
Output
PFCL (ST) 2
Input
Input
BE
GY
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB (ST) 2
BE
PE
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
LB
13
PE
12
PE
11
10
YW
9
YW
8
7
OE
6
BE
5
GY
4
GY
3
2
GN
1
BE
LB
SENS4
SENS3
SENS2
SENS1
SENS0
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
PFCL (ST) 2
PFCL (ST) 1
PFCL-L
24 V
24 V
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
BE
BN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BE
GY
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Output
PSW (ST) 2
DFSW (ST) 2
Input
Output
PSW (ST) 2
DFSW (ST) 2
Input
RD
1 YW
2
BE
PE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
1 RD
2 YW
BE
LB
SENS5
PSW-L
PSW (ST) 1
PSW (ST) 2
DDM REM
DDM (ST) 1 REM
DDM (ST) 2 REM
5V
GND
DFSW
DFSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 2
DDM CLOCK
Output
Output
PFCL (ST) 1
Input
Input
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
BE
LB
1 RD
2 YW
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB (ST) 1
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
PFCL (ST) 1
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
PFCL-L
Output
PSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 1
Input
Output
PSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 1
Input
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
SCAN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PSSW1 (ST) 1
PSSW2 (ST) 1
PSSW3 (ST) 1
PSSW4 (ST) 1
SSW (ST) 1
SENS 0
PSSW1 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW (ST) 1
Output
DDM (ST) 1 CLK
DDM (ST) 1 CLK
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
Output
Output
PFCL-L
Input
Input
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB
SCAN1
PSSW1-L
PSSW2-L
PSSW3-L
PSSW4-L
SSW3
SENS 0
PSSW1-L
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2-L
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3-L
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4-L
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW3
Output
DDM CLK
DDM CLK
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
Output
PSW-L
DFSW
Input
Output
PSW-L
DFSW
Input
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
DDM REM
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1
(ST) 2
PSSW2
(ST) 2
PSSW3
(ST) 2
PSSW4
(ST) 2
SSW
(ST) 2
BK
1
WE
2
BK
WE
1
2
7
BK
WE
Main PCB
(copier)
BK
WE
DH
(Option)
BK
WE
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 1
Lower drawer
(optional for 15 cpm copier)
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 2
2-4-15
2AV/X

E
Duplex unit*2(Option)
BIAS
DRUM
JBESW
1 2 3
1 2 3
LED
LED
PE SG
5-2
5-1
5-5
5-4
5-3
PE LATCH-ON
PE 24V
PE ACT
PE SG
PE 5V
1 2 3
5-8
5-7
5-6
PE 5V
PE DUPPCSW2
1 2 3
5-11
PE DUPPCSW1
5-10
PE SG
5-9
PE SG
PE SG
PE DUP DET
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-1
16-2
PE FSESW
PE 5V
YW SG
YW DUPOCSW DET
YW MACHINE DET
YW FSW MODE
YW DUPOCSW
YW FSW REM
YW FSW R/L
YW FSW CLK
YW SG
YW 5V
YW PG
YW 24V
PE K
PE A
PE A
PE 5V
PE SIG
PE 5V
PE SG
16-12
16-13
16-14
16-15
16-16
16-6
PE JBESW
16-7
PE SG
16-8
PE RET
PE ACT
PE 24V
PE SG
PE JOB DET
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
GY MC ALM
GY TC CNT
GY DB CNT
GY GRID CNT
GY TC REM
GY DB REM
GY MC REM
GY PG
GY 24VR2
1 2 3
GY 24V
GY BYPPFCL
GY BYPPWSW1
GY BYPPWSW2
GY BYPPWSW3
25-9
25-8
SG
25-7
24V
EL ON
EL ON
4
4
10
10
3 2
3 2
11 12
11 12
1
1
13
13
a
L
N
5
5
9
9
DM CLK
6
6
8
8
PE
PE
PE
7
7
7
7
DFSW (ST) 2
PSW (ST) 2
PE
8
8
6
6
5V
GY
9
9
5
5
PE
PSW-L
PSW (ST) 1
PE
10
10
4
4
DFSW
SENS5
PE
11
11
3
3
DFSW (ST) 1
SENS4
GY
13 12
13 12
1 2
1 2
PE
SENS3
GY
1
14
26
13
PE
SENS2
GY
2
15
25
12
5V
SENS1
GY
3
16
24
11
SG
SENS0
GY
4
17
23
10
PE
SCAN3
GY
5
18
22
9
PE
SCAN2
GY
6
19
21
8
PE DDM (ST) 2 REM
SCAN1
GY
7
20
20
7
DDM REM
PFCL (ST) 2
GY
8
21
19
6
PE DDM (ST) 1 REM
PFCL-L
PFCL (ST) 1
GY
9
22
18
5
25-6
25-5
SG
25-4
Lower drawer*3
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 1
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 2
DH
(Option)
GY SHPSW
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
CCDCLK
GND(CCDCLK)
CCDCLK
GND(CCDCLK)
RESET
GND(RESET)
CCDCLP
GND(CCDCLP)
SHIFT
GND(SHIFT)
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
ODD
GND(ODD)
EVEN
GND(EVEN)
12V
GND(12V)
22-10
22-9
22-8
22-7
22-6
22-5
22-4
22-3
22-2
22-1
23-6
23-5
23-4
23-3
23-2
23-1
GY HSYNC
21-1
SG
GY
21-2
GY
R5V
21-3
BE
SG
21-4
GY ENABLE
21-5
GY
VIDEO
21-6
GY
S/H
21-7
NC
21-8
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
CLK
READY
S/S
G(24V)
24V
20-5
20-4
20-3
20-2
20-1
15-12A
15-11A
15-10A
15-9A
15-8A
15-7A
15-6A
15-5A
15-4A
15-3A
15-2A
15-1A
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
DFTSW
OSLSW
DFSSW1
DFSSW2
OSWSW DET
DF SHORT
OSDPCB
OSDPCB
OSSW
OFFW
OSBSW
OFM ENABLE
15-12B
15-11B
15-10B
15-9B
15-8B
15-7B
15-6B
15-5B
15-4B
15-3B
15-2B
15-1B
14-11B
14-10B
14-9B
14-8B
14-7B
14-6B
14-5B
14-4B
14-3B
14-2B
14-1B
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
OCM M1
OCM M2
OCM M3
OCM Vref
OCM CWB
OCM CLK
OCM RET
OCM ENABLE
OFM CWB
OFM CLK
OFM RET
OFM ENABLE
OFSOL(ACT)
OFSOL(RET)
SBFSSOL
EFSSOL
OFCL
SBPSOL(ACT)
SBPSOL(RET)
OSLED(GN)
OSLED(RED)
FG
SRDF*2
(Option)
7 8 9 10 11
7 8 9 10 11
GY
5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11
25-3
25-2
SG
25-1
GY ODSW
11 10 9 8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
5V
GY
5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11
GY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
A
A
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3
PG
24V
24-6
24-5
24-4
24-3
24-2
24-1
10
23
17
4
12 11
25 24
15 16
2 3
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
INPCB
ODSW SHPSW
EL
CCDPCB
PG
1-6
1-5
1-4
1-3
1-2
1-1
Finisher
(Option)
Network
scanner*2
(Option)
Scanner
network
PCB
E
13
26
14
1
GY
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
A
24V
OE
24V
24V
GY
BK
GY
SM
GY
5V
GY
BN
*2
BYPPSW
GY SG
Scanner
relay PCB
1
40
GY BYPPSW
CN30
GY 5V
1 2 3
3 2 1
*4
GY SG
RD
28-6
28-5
28-4
28-3
28-2
28-1
11 10 9 8 7 6
11 10 9 8 7 6
B
B
11 10 9 8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
GY DM LOCK
24V
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
B
B
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GY DM CLK
WE
CN18 CN17 CN16
GY DM REM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GY PG
6 5 4 3 2 1
GY 5V
5 4 3 2 1
GY PG
LDPCB
GY PG
BDPCB
GY 24VR2
GY SIG
HUMSENS
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY 24VR2
Key card
PM
BE PG
LSU
PK SIG
5V
Bypass
GN REM
1 2 3 4
4-13
4-12
RCL
10-1
10-5
10-6
10-4
RD 24V
GY RCL
DM
GY 24V
GY SG
BYPPFCL
4-11
4-10
GY RSW
Bypass size
detection
PCB
GY 5V
1 2 3
3 2 1
GY CFM3 REM
YW
OSDS
RSW
GY CFM3 H/L
1 2 3
CFM3 CFM2 CFM1
GY 24V
3-6
3-7
3-8
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
4 3 2 1
GY CFM2 REM
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY CFM2 H/L
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY 24V
GY CFM1 REM
Key card
(Optional for
120 V specs only)
Key counter
(Option)
11-6
11-7
11-8
GY CFM1 H/L
2 1
1 2
CN31
40
80
1
80
(Option)
Printer board
CN3
DIMM
60
1
1
60
60
60
1
1
10Base-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
6-1
6-2
6-3
CF
GY TH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN1
40
Memory
board*1
CN19
Memory
(Option)
1
NCU PCB
DIMM
B
GY SG
2 1
1 2
12-1
12-2
GY HUM
GY 24V
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
11-2
GY 5V
4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2
24V
GY CL REM
Fax control PCB
Battery
LINE MOD
TEL MOD
HAND SET
Fax unit*2
(Option)
Operation unit
1 2
1 2
TFM
CL
Speaker
Fax operation unit
OPCB
LCD
GY
11-1
9 8 7 1 3 5 6
BE AG
PE 12V
CN1
CN2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13
1 2
CT
GY TFM2
7-4
7-3
7-2
7-1
CN29
GY PFCL-U
GY TFM1
12-3
12-4
40
GY 24V
TC
CN1
DIMM
GY SG
24V
GY
11-9
11-10
11-11
Network board (Option)
GY PSW-U
2 1
1 2
TC
4-15
4-14
GY 5V
1 2 BATT
G(5V)
2 1
10Base-T
3-11
3-10
3-9
1 1 SPEAKER
2 2 A.GND
Upper drawer
GY PSSW4-U
OE 5V
BE SG
GN RELAY REM
3-5
Relay PCB
1 5 4 3 2
GY
IEEE1284
PFCL-U
9-7
9-8
PSSW4-U PSSW3-U PSSW2-U PSSW1-U
GY SG
1 2 3 4 5
FSSOL
MPCB
Printer network board (Option)
PSW-U
GY PSSW3-U
CT
GY SG
9-5
9-6
1 2
CT
GY PSSW2-U
1 2
CT
9-3
9-4
1 2
CT
GY SG
3 2 1
CT
GY PSSW1-U
2 1
1 2
Vdd
Vee
UD3
UD2
UD1
UD0
CP
FLM
LEDENB
LP
Vo
GND
F.GND
GY SG
9-1
9-2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
10-7
YW 24VR2 10-3
GY 24V
GY MSW REM
3-4
GY HEATER REM
GY 12V
GY SG(12V)
BE SG(3.3V)
BE SG
BN 3.3V
OE 5V
BE SG
OE 5V
BE PG
RD 24V
BE PG
RD 24V
27-1
27-2
27-3
27-4
27-5
27-6
27-7
27-8
27-9
27-10
27-11
27-12
27-13
32-3
RD 24VR1
Key card
1-10
1-9
1-8
1-7
1-6
1-5
1-4
1-3
1-2
1-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
LEDON4
LEDON3
SCAN7
SCAN6
SCAN5
SCAN4
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
SCAN0
24V 32-1
DUPPCSW1 DUPPCSW2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SSW1
4
KEY0
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
KEY5
KEY6
KEY7
LEDON0
LEDON1
LEDON2
RD 24V
PK
RD 24VR1
Duplex unit for finisher*2(Option)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
NEUTRAL TB3
LIVE(OUT)
LIVE
(IN)
TB5
3-2
3-1
3-8
3-7
3-6
3-5
3-4
3-3
3-9
3-10
4-3
4-2
4-1
TB4
FTH
MSW
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
12-8
1 3
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
GY FTH
2 3 1 4 5 6 9 10 7 12
12-9
BE SG
5V
BE SG
PK WT DET
GY
220-240V
specs only
PSPCB
1 2 3 2 3
1 2 3
(220-240V 910W)
Phase
control
26-1
26-2
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-6
26-7
26-8
26-9
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
FSSOL FSESW
1 2 3
BE SG
BN CON.DET
CN2-3
FSOFSW
HVTPCB
FH
850W
120V
JOFSW
FSSOL
PE TNSCONT
TB2
COM
24VT
MDPCB
WTDSW
PE SG
Heater
control
circuit
Noise filter
TNS
Job separator
(Option)
FTS
CN2-1
TB1
GY
GY TNS
LIVE
INLET
GY ESW
DUP
OCSW
FSW
16-12
16-13
16-14
16-15
16-16
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
18-10
18-11
18-12
16-3
16-4
16-5
SSW2
220-240V
12-7
12-6
SG
12-5
24V
GRID
MC TC
5V
PE K
COM
GY
3 2 1
5-2
5-1
LIVE
ESW
L
N
24VT
24VT
A
A
B
B
3
4
1
2
6
5
PE RET
PE ACT
PE 24V
PE 5V
PE SIG
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
NC
NC
G(5V)
G(5V)
5.1V
5.1V
G(24V)
G(24V)
24V
24V
14-1A
14-2A
14-3A
14-4A
14-5A
14-6A
14-7A
14-8A
14-9A
14-10A
14-11A
STDF
(Option)
*1 : Optional for 15 cpm copier only.

*3 : Standard for 20 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.
*4 : For 20 cpm copier only.
2-4-16
2AV/X
Maintenance parts list

Copier
Maintenance part name
Name used in service manual
Name used in parts list
Part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.
Right registration roller

Upper paper feed pulley
Lower paper feed pulley
Left registration cleaner assembly
Right registration cleaner assembly
Left cover
RIGHT ROLLER, REGISTRATION

LEFT ROLLER, REGISTRATION
PULLEY, PAPER FEED
PULLEY, PAPER FEED
PULLEY, PAPER FEED
PARTS, ASSY LEFT REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP
PARTS, ASSY RIGHT REGISTRATION CLEANER,SP
COVER, CONVEYING
2AV06060
2AV06070
2AV06010
2AV06010
2AV06320
2AV93010
2AV93020
2AV04120
6
7
6
5
6
7
6
7
8
6
3
30
44
25
42
2
Contact glass
Slit glass
Mirror 1
Mirror 2 and mirror 3
Exposure lamp
Original size detection sensor
CONTACT GLASS
CONTACT GLASS, ADF
MIRROR A
MIRROR B
LAMP, SCANNER
SENSOR, ORIGINAL DETECTION
35912010
2AV12250
2AV12150
2AV12160
2AV12100
35927290
9
9
9
9
9
9
46
19
9
10
4
53
Cleaning blade
Drum separation claw
Drum shaft
Drum shaft front bushing
Cleaning lower seal A
BLADE, CLEANING
CLAW, SEPARATION
SHAFT, DRUM
FRONT BUSHING, DRUM SHAFT
LOWER SEAL A, CLEANING
2AV18030
2AR18240
2AR08030
2AR09230
2AR93410
11
11
11
11
11
6
112
23
32
94
Drum
Charger assembly
Cleaning lamp
Doctor blade cover
SET, DRUM
MAIN CHARGER ASSY A
LAMP, CLEANING LAMP
PARTS, ASSY TRANSFER ROLLER, SP
COVER A DOCTOR BLADE ASSY
2AV82010
2AR93420
2AR27031
2AV93030
2AR68580
11
11
10
7
11
1
12
12
26
70
Heat roller
Press roller
Bushing
Bearing
Fixing unit thermister
Heat roller separation claw
Fixing heater
Fixing heater
Gear
Eject roller
Eject pulley
ROLLER, HEAT
PARTS, ROLLER PRESSURE,SP
BUSHING, HEAT ROLLER
BEARING, PRESSURE
THERMISTOR, FIXING
CLAW, SEPARATION
HEATER 120, FIXING
HEATER 230, FIXING
GEAR 35, HEAT ROLLER
ROLLER, EJECT
PULLEY, EJECT
2AV20100
2AB93040
35920350
35920130
2AV20250
35920150
2AV20130
2AV20140
35920240
2AV20150
2AV20160
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
28
41
37
24
39
13
13
40
14
15
Part No.
Fig. No.
Ref. No.
2AV06010
3A506060
2
2
30
23
Optional drawer
Maintenance part name
Name used in service manual
Paper feed pulleys
Conveying roller
Name used in parts list

PULLEY, PAPER FEED
ROLLER,CONVEYING
2-4
2-4-11
2AV/X
Periodic maintenance procedures

Copier
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Test copy and

test print
Perform at the maximum

copy size
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Paper feed
section
Section
Optical section
2-4
2-4-12
Method
Test copy
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Page
Points and cautions
Page
Every service
Maintenance cycle
Right registration roller
Clean
Every service
Clean
Every service
Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Upper paper feed pulley
Clean
Every service
1-6-3
Clean or replace
Every service
1-6-6
Left registration cleaner

assembly
Clean or replace
Every service
Replace after feeding 200,000

sheets. Vacuum.
1-6-8
Right registration cleaner

assembly
Clean or replace
Every service
Replace after feeding 200,000

sheets. Vacuum.
1-6-8
Upper paper feed clutch
Check
Every service
Check the leading edge

registration and paper feed
conditions in the registration
section, bypass and paper feed
section.
Rollers
Clean
Every service
Check and grease
Every service
Check noise. If noise is heard,

apply grease TMP-200G to the
contacting surfaces of the paper
conveying unit and bushing.
Lower paper feed pulley

Lower paper feed clutch
Clean
Check
Every service
Every service

section.
Paper feed roller
Clean
Every service
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Slit glass
Clean
Every service
Clean with alcohol and then

a dry cloth.
Contact glass
Clean
Every service
Clean with alcohol and then

a dry cloth.
Mirror 1
Clean
Every service
Clean with alcohol and then a dry

cloth only if vertical black lines
appear on the copy image.
Mirror 2 and mirror 3
Clean
Every service
Clean with alcohol and then a dry

cloth only if vertical black lines
appear on the copy image.
Scanner lens
Clean
Every service
Clean with a dry cloth only if

vertical black lines appear on the
copy image.
Reflector
Clean
Every service
Clean with a dry cloth only if

vertical black lines appear on the
copy image.
Exposure lamp
Clean or replace
Every service
Replace if an image problem

occurs or after feeding
200,000 sheets.
Optical rail
Grease
Every service
Check noise and shifting and

then apply scanner rail grease
PG671.
1-6-5
Page
1-6-19
2AV/X
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Optical section
(con.)
Original size detection

sensor
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Developing
section
Method
Clean
Method
Maintenance cycle
Every service
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Page
Clean the sensor emitter and

receiver with alcohol and then a
dry cloth only if there is a problem.
Points and cautions
Page
Apply GE-334C conductive

grease (P/N A0199040) between
the drum shaft and grounding
plate.
1-6-43
Developer
Replace
Every service
Drum unit
Replace
Every service
1-3-8
Charger assembly
Replace
Every service
Cleaning lamp
Clean
Every service
Clean with a dry cloth.
Clean
Clean after every

100,000 counts
Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth

(take care not to damage the
transfer roller).
Check and grease
After every
100,000 counts

apply grease G501 to the
following locations:
Contacting surfaces of the
transfer roller and collar
transfer roller and bushing
Contacting surfaces of the gear
and collar
1-6-40

apply conductive grease GE334
to the following locations:
transfer roller, bushing and
terminal
Doctor blade cover
Seals
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Cleaning
section
Replace
Every 200,000 counts
Clean
Clean after every

100,000 counts
Replace
Every 200,000 counts
Clean
Every service
Method
Maintenance cycle
Cleaning blade
Replace
Every service
Drum separation claw
Check or replace
Every service
1-6-45
Clean with a dry cloth (take care
not to damage the doctor blade
cover).
Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth.
Points and cautions
Page
1-6-46
Clean with a dry cloth; replace

if the tip is deformed.
Drum shaft
Clean
Every service
Front drum bushing
Clean
Every service
Rear drum bushing
Clean
Every service
Cleaning lower seal
Check or replace
After 200,000 counts
Replace if toner spills due to

wavy or deformed edges of
the seal.
Seals
Clean
Every service
Vacuum or clean with a dry cloth.
1-6-43
1-6-47
2-4
2-4-13
2AV/X
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Fixing/Eject
section
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Page
Heat roller
Clean or replace
Clean after 100,000

counts; check and
replace after 200,000
counts
Clean with alcohol.
1-6-51
Press roller
Clean or replace
Clean after 100,000

counts; check and
replace after 200,000
Clean with alcohol.
1-6-53
Bushing
Check and replace
Check the installation position

and noise.
1-6-51
Bearing
Check and replace
Check the installation position

and noise.
1-6-53
Fixing unit themistor
Check and clean
Clean with alcohol and check for

peeling of the film.
1-6-49
Heat roller separation claw Clean or replace
Clean with alcohol.
1-6-49
counts
Fixing heater
Check and replace
Check if the lamp is dark or not.
1-6-50
Gear
Check and replace
Every service
Check for chips in the gear.
1-6-51
Eject roller
Clean
Every service
Eject pulley
Clean
Every service
Eject roller
Clean and grease
Every service

apply grease TMP1-200G to the
contacting surfaces of the eject
roller and bushing.
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Covers
Covers
Maintenance
part/location
Section
Other
Image quality
Method
Clean
Method
Check and adjust
Maintenance cycle
Every service
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Page
Points and cautions
Page
Points and cautions
Page
Points and cautions
Page
Every service
Optional drawer
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Test copy and

test print
Perform at the maximum

copy size
Section
Maintenance
part/location
Paper feed
section
2-4
2-4-14
Paper feed pulleys
Method
Test copy
Method
Maintenance cycle
Every service
Maintenance cycle
Clean
Every service
Check
Every service

section.
Paper feed roller
Clean
Every service
Bushings
Check
Every service

apply grease TMP-200G.
2AV/X

A
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW (ST) 1
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BE
LB
BE
PE
BE
GY
BE
BN
BE
LB
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1-L PSSW2-L PSSW3-L PSSW4-L
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
SSW3
BK
WE
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 2
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 2 REM
LB
PE
PE
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GN
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
BE
BE
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW (ST) 2
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
BK
1
WE
2
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
DFSW (ST) 1
2 1
SCAN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PSSW1 (ST) 2
PSSW2 (ST) 2
PSSW3 (ST) 2
PSSW4 (ST) 2
SSW (ST) 2
SENS 0
PSSW1 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4 (ST) 2
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW (ST) 2
Output
DDM (ST) 2 CLK
DDM (ST) 2 CLK
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM (ST) 1
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
1
2
1 2 3 4 5 6
LB
13
PE
12
PE
11
10
YW
9
YW
8
7
OE
6
BE
5
GY
4
GY
3
2
GN
1
DFSW
HEATER LIVE
1
HEATER NEUTRAL 2
DDM (ST) 1 REM
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 PE
SG 3 BE
DFSW (ST) 2
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1
(ST) 1
PSSW2
(ST) 1
PSSW3
(ST) 1
PSSW4
(ST) 1
SSW
(ST) 1
5 V 1 OE
OUT 2 GY
BE
SG 3
BK
1
WE
2
BK
WE
1
2
BE
LB
PK
BN
GY
PE
LB
BE
BE
BE
YW
YW
YW
RD
RD
PSW-L
PFCL (ST) 2
BE
BN
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
Output
Output
PFCL (ST) 2
Input
Input
BE
GY
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB (ST) 2
BE
PE
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
LB
13
PE
12
PE
11
10
YW
9
YW
8
7
OE
6
BE
5
GY
4
GY
3
2
GN
1
BE
LB
SENS4
SENS3
SENS2
SENS1
SENS0
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
PFCL (ST) 2
PFCL (ST) 1
PFCL-L
24 V
24 V
LB
PE
PE
PE
YW
YW
YW
OE
BE
GY
GY
GY
GN
BE
BN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BE
GY
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Output
PSW (ST) 2
DFSW (ST) 2
Input
Output
PSW (ST) 2
DFSW (ST) 2
Input
RD
1 YW
2
BE
PE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
1 RD
2 YW
BE
LB
SENS5
PSW-L
PSW (ST) 1
PSW (ST) 2
DDM REM
DDM (ST) 1 REM
DDM (ST) 2 REM
5V
GND
DFSW
DFSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 2
DDM CLOCK
Output
Output
PFCL (ST) 1
Input
Input
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
BE
LB
1 RD
2 YW
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB (ST) 1
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
PFCL (ST) 1
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
PFCL-L
Output
PSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 1
Input
Output
PSW (ST) 1
DFSW (ST) 1
Input
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
SCAN1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
PSSW1 (ST) 1
PSSW2 (ST) 1
PSSW3 (ST) 1
PSSW4 (ST) 1
SSW (ST) 1
SENS 0
PSSW1 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4 (ST) 1
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW (ST) 1
Output
DDM (ST) 1 CLK
DDM (ST) 1 CLK
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
YW
27
Output
Output
PFCL-L
Input
Input
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
BE
LB
LB
LB
PE
PE
PE
GY
GY
GY
BN
BN
BN
PK
PK
LB
LB
LB
GN
GN
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
24 V
B
A
COM B
COM A
B
A
DDMPCB
SCAN1
PSSW1-L
PSSW2-L
PSSW3-L
PSSW4-L
SSW3
SENS 0
PSSW1-L
Output
SENS 1
PSSW2-L
Output
SENS 2
PSSW3-L
Output
SENS 3
PSSW4-L
Output
SENS 4
Output
SENS 5
SSW3
Output
DDM CLK
DDM CLK
RD
RD
RD
RD
RD
Output
PSW-L
DFSW
Input
Output
PSW-L
DFSW
Input
1 2 3 4 5 6
DDM
SS
SG
SG
SG
5V
5V
5V
5V
DDM REM
BE
BE
BE
BE
OE
OE
OE
OE
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
2 1
PSSW1
(ST) 2
PSSW2
(ST) 2
PSSW3
(ST) 2
PSSW4
(ST) 2
SSW
(ST) 2
BK
1
WE
2
BK
WE
1
2
7
BK
WE
Main PCB
(copier)
BK
WE
DH
(Option)
BK
WE
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 1
Lower drawer
(optional for 15 cpm copier)
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 2
2-4-15
2AV/X

E
Duplex unit*2(Option)
BIAS
DRUM
JBESW
1 2 3
1 2 3
LED
LED
PE SG
5-2
5-1
5-5
5-4
5-3
PE LATCH-ON
PE 24V
PE ACT
PE SG
PE 5V
1 2 3
5-8
5-7
5-6
PE 5V
PE DUPPCSW2
1 2 3
5-11
PE DUPPCSW1
5-10
PE SG
5-9
PE SG
PE SG
PE DUP DET
16-6
16-7
16-8
16-1
16-2
PE FSESW
PE 5V
YW SG
YW DUPOCSW DET
YW MACHINE DET
YW FSW MODE
YW DUPOCSW
YW FSW REM
YW FSW R/L
YW FSW CLK
YW SG
YW 5V
YW PG
YW 24V
PE K
PE A
PE A
PE 5V
PE SIG
PE 5V
PE SG
16-12
16-13
16-14
16-15
16-16
16-6
PE JBESW
16-7
PE SG
16-8
PE RET
PE ACT
PE 24V
PE SG
PE JOB DET
16-1
16-2
16-3
16-4
16-5
GY MC ALM
GY TC CNT
GY DB CNT
GY GRID CNT
GY TC REM
GY DB REM
GY MC REM
GY PG
GY 24VR2
1 2 3
GY 24V
GY BYPPFCL
GY BYPPWSW1
GY BYPPWSW2
GY BYPPWSW3
25-9
25-8
SG
25-7
24V
EL ON
EL ON
4
4
10
10
3 2
3 2
11 12
11 12
1
1
13
13
a
L
N
5
5
9
9
DM CLK
6
6
8
8
PE
PE
PE
7
7
7
7
DFSW (ST) 2
PSW (ST) 2
PE
8
8
6
6
5V
GY
9
9
5
5
PE
PSW-L
PSW (ST) 1
PE
10
10
4
4
DFSW
SENS5
PE
11
11
3
3
DFSW (ST) 1
SENS4
GY
13 12
13 12
1 2
1 2
PE
SENS3
GY
1
14
26
13
PE
SENS2
GY
2
15
25
12
5V
SENS1
GY
3
16
24
11
SG
SENS0
GY
4
17
23
10
PE
SCAN3
GY
5
18
22
9
PE
SCAN2
GY
6
19
21
8
PE DDM (ST) 2 REM
SCAN1
GY
7
20
20
7
DDM REM
PFCL (ST) 2
GY
8
21
19
6
PE DDM (ST) 1 REM
PFCL-L
PFCL (ST) 1
GY
9
22
18
5
25-6
25-5
SG
25-4
Lower drawer*3
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 1
DH
(Option)
Optional drawer 2
DH
(Option)
GY SHPSW
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
GY
BE
CCDCLK
GND(CCDCLK)
CCDCLK
GND(CCDCLK)
RESET
GND(RESET)
CCDCLP
GND(CCDCLP)
SHIFT
GND(SHIFT)
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
ODD
GND(ODD)
EVEN
GND(EVEN)
12V
GND(12V)
22-10
22-9
22-8
22-7
22-6
22-5
22-4
22-3
22-2
22-1
23-6
23-5
23-4
23-3
23-2
23-1
GY HSYNC
21-1
SG
GY
21-2
GY
R5V
21-3
BE
SG
21-4
GY ENABLE
21-5
GY
VIDEO
21-6
GY
S/H
21-7
NC
21-8
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
CLK
READY
S/S
G(24V)
24V
20-5
20-4
20-3
20-2
20-1
15-12A
15-11A
15-10A
15-9A
15-8A
15-7A
15-6A
15-5A
15-4A
15-3A
15-2A
15-1A
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
DFTSW
OSLSW
DFSSW1
DFSSW2
OSWSW DET
DF SHORT
OSDPCB
OSDPCB
OSSW
OFFW
OSBSW
OFM ENABLE
15-12B
15-11B
15-10B
15-9B
15-8B
15-7B
15-6B
15-5B
15-4B
15-3B
15-2B
15-1B
14-11B
14-10B
14-9B
14-8B
14-7B
14-6B
14-5B
14-4B
14-3B
14-2B
14-1B
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
OCM M1
OCM M2
OCM M3
OCM Vref
OCM CWB
OCM CLK
OCM RET
OCM ENABLE
OFM CWB
OFM CLK
OFM RET
OFM ENABLE
OFSOL(ACT)
OFSOL(RET)
SBFSSOL
EFSSOL
OFCL
SBPSOL(ACT)
SBPSOL(RET)
OSLED(GN)
OSLED(RED)
FG
SRDF*2
(Option)
7 8 9 10 11
7 8 9 10 11
GY
5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11
25-3
25-2
SG
25-1
GY ODSW
11 10 9 8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
A
A
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
5V
GY
5 4 3 2 1
7 8 9 10 11
GY
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
A
A
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3
PG
24V
24-6
24-5
24-4
24-3
24-2
24-1
10
23
17
4
12 11
25 24
15 16
2 3
5 4 3 2 1
5 4 3 2 1
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 2 1
INPCB
ODSW SHPSW
EL
CCDPCB
PG
1-6
1-5
1-4
1-3
1-2
1-1
Finisher
(Option)
Network
scanner*2
(Option)
Scanner
network
PCB
E
13
26
14
1
GY
8-1
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-8
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-12
8-13
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-25
8-26
A
24V
OE
24V
24V
GY
BK
GY
SM
GY
5V
GY
BN
*2
BYPPSW
GY SG
Scanner
relay PCB
1
40
GY BYPPSW
CN30
GY 5V
1 2 3
3 2 1
*4
GY SG
RD
28-6
28-5
28-4
28-3
28-2
28-1
11 10 9 8 7 6
11 10 9 8 7 6
B
B
11 10 9 8 7 6
1 2 3 4 5 6
GY DM LOCK
24V
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
B
B
23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GY DM CLK
WE
CN18 CN17 CN16
GY DM REM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
GY PG
6 5 4 3 2 1
GY 5V
5 4 3 2 1
GY PG
LDPCB
GY PG
BDPCB
GY 24VR2
GY SIG
HUMSENS
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY 24VR2
Key card
PM
BE PG
LSU
PK SIG
5V
Bypass
GN REM
1 2 3 4
4-13
4-12
RCL
10-1
10-5
10-6
10-4
RD 24V
GY RCL
DM
GY 24V
GY SG
BYPPFCL
4-11
4-10
GY RSW
Bypass size
detection
PCB
GY 5V
1 2 3
3 2 1
GY CFM3 REM
YW
OSDS
RSW
GY CFM3 H/L
1 2 3
CFM3 CFM2 CFM1
GY 24V
3-6
3-7
3-8
12-10
12-11
12-12
12-13
12-14
12-15
12-16
12-17
12-18
4 3 2 1
GY CFM2 REM
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY CFM2 H/L
1 2 3
1 2 3
GY 24V
GY CFM1 REM
Key card
(Optional for
120 V specs only)
Key counter
(Option)
11-6
11-7
11-8
GY CFM1 H/L
2 1
1 2
CN31
40
80
1
80
(Option)
Printer board
CN3
DIMM
60
1
1
60
60
60
1
1
10Base-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
6-1
6-2
6-3
CF
GY TH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN1
40
Memory
board*1
CN19
Memory
(Option)
1
NCU PCB
DIMM
B
GY SG
2 1
1 2
12-1
12-2
GY HUM
GY 24V
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
11-2
GY 5V
4 3 2 1
2 1
1 2
24V
GY CL REM
Fax control PCB
Battery
LINE MOD
TEL MOD
HAND SET
Fax unit*2
(Option)
Operation unit
1 2
1 2
TFM
CL
Speaker
Fax operation unit
OPCB
LCD
GY
11-1
9 8 7 1 3 5 6
BE AG
PE 12V
CN1
CN2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13
1 2
CT
GY TFM2
7-4
7-3
7-2
7-1
CN29
GY PFCL-U
GY TFM1
12-3
12-4
40
GY 24V
TC
CN1
DIMM
GY SG
24V
GY
11-9
11-10
11-11
Network board (Option)
GY PSW-U
2 1
1 2
TC
4-15
4-14
GY 5V
1 2 BATT
G(5V)
2 1
10Base-T
3-11
3-10
3-9
1 1 SPEAKER
2 2 A.GND
Upper drawer
GY PSSW4-U
OE 5V
BE SG
GN RELAY REM
3-5
Relay PCB
1 5 4 3 2
GY
IEEE1284
PFCL-U
9-7
9-8
PSSW4-U PSSW3-U PSSW2-U PSSW1-U
GY SG
1 2 3 4 5
FSSOL
MPCB
Printer network board (Option)
PSW-U
GY PSSW3-U
CT
GY SG
9-5
9-6
1 2
CT
GY PSSW2-U
1 2
CT
9-3
9-4
1 2
CT
GY SG
3 2 1
CT
GY PSSW1-U
2 1
1 2
Vdd
Vee
UD3
UD2
UD1
UD0
CP
FLM
LEDENB
LP
Vo
GND
F.GND
GY SG
9-1
9-2
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
10-7
YW 24VR2 10-3
GY 24V
GY MSW REM
3-4
GY HEATER REM
GY 12V
GY SG(12V)
BE SG(3.3V)
BE SG
BN 3.3V
OE 5V
BE SG
OE 5V
BE PG
RD 24V
BE PG
RD 24V
27-1
27-2
27-3
27-4
27-5
27-6
27-7
27-8
27-9
27-10
27-11
27-12
27-13
32-3
RD 24VR1
Key card
1-10
1-9
1-8
1-7
1-6
1-5
1-4
1-3
1-2
1-1
3-1
3-2
3-3
LEDON4
LEDON3
SCAN7
SCAN6
SCAN5
SCAN4
SCAN3
SCAN2
SCAN1
SCAN0
24V 32-1
DUPPCSW1 DUPPCSW2
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
SSW1
4
KEY0
KEY1
KEY2
KEY3
KEY4
KEY5
KEY6
KEY7
LEDON0
LEDON1
LEDON2
RD 24V
PK
RD 24VR1
Duplex unit for finisher*2(Option)
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
13-1
13-2
13-3
13-4
13-5
13-6
13-7
13-8
NEUTRAL TB3
LIVE(OUT)
LIVE
(IN)
TB5
3-2
3-1
3-8
3-7
3-6
3-5
3-4
3-3
3-9
3-10
4-3
4-2
4-1
TB4
FTH
MSW
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
PE
12-8
1 3
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
GY FTH
2 3 1 4 5 6 9 10 7 12
12-9
BE SG
5V
BE SG
PK WT DET
GY
220-240V
specs only
PSPCB
1 2 3 2 3
1 2 3
(220-240V 910W)
Phase
control
26-1
26-2
26-3
26-4
26-5
26-6
26-7
26-8
26-9
26-10
26-11
26-12
26-13
26-14
26-15
26-16
26-17
26-18
26-19
26-20
26-21
26-22
FSSOL FSESW
1 2 3
BE SG
BN CON.DET
CN2-3
FSOFSW
HVTPCB
FH
850W
120V
JOFSW
FSSOL
PE TNSCONT
TB2
COM
24VT
MDPCB
WTDSW
PE SG
Heater
control
circuit
Noise filter
TNS
Job separator
(Option)
FTS
CN2-1
TB1
GY
GY TNS
LIVE
INLET
GY ESW
DUP
OCSW
FSW
16-12
16-13
16-14
16-15
16-16
18-1
18-2
18-3
18-4
18-5
18-6
18-7
18-8
18-9
18-10
18-11
18-12
16-3
16-4
16-5
SSW2
220-240V
12-7
12-6
SG
12-5
24V
GRID
MC TC
5V
PE K
COM
GY
3 2 1
5-2
5-1
LIVE
ESW
L
N
24VT
24VT
A
A
B
B
3
4
1
2
6
5
PE RET
PE ACT
PE 24V
PE 5V
PE SIG
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
GY
NC
NC
NC
G(5V)
G(5V)
5.1V
5.1V
G(24V)
G(24V)
24V
24V
14-1A
14-2A
14-3A
14-4A
14-5A
14-6A
14-7A
14-8A
14-9A
14-10A
14-11A
STDF
(Option)

*3 : Standard for 20 cpm copier/optional for 15 cpm copier.
*4 : For 20 cpm copier only.
2-4-16
STDF-3
3A7
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
Part names and their functions ............................................................................................................
Machine cross section ..........................................................................................................................
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Troubleshooting
1-3-1 Original misfeed detection ....................................................................................................................
(1) Original misfeed indication ............................................................................................................
(2) Original misfeed detection condition .............................................................................................
(3) Original misfeeds ..........................................................................................................................
(1) An original jams when the main switch is turned on. .............................................................
(2) An original jams during continuous copying of multiple originals. .........................................
(3) An original jams in the DF during copying (no original feed). ................................................
(4) An original jams in the DF during copying (an original jam in the original feed
and conveying sections). .......................................................................................................
(5) Original jams frequently. ........................................................................................................
1-3-2 Image formation problems ...................................................................................................................
(1) There is a regular error between the centers of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ....................................................................................................................
(2) There is a regular error between the leading edges of the original and copy image
when the DF is used. ....................................................................................................................
1-3-3 Electrical problems ...............................................................................................................................
(1) The original feed motor does not operate. ....................................................................................
(2) The original conveying motor does not operate. ...........................................................................
(3) The copier scans the contact glass when originals are loaded on the DF. ...................................
(4) An original jams when the main switch is turned on. ....................................................................
1-3-4 Mechanical problems ...........................................................................................................................
(1) No primary original feed. ...............................................................................................................
(2) No secondary original feed. ..........................................................................................................
(3) Originals jam. ................................................................................................................................
1-3-1
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-5
1-3-5
1-3-6
1-3-6
1-3-6
1-3-6
1-3-6
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-7
1-3-7

1-4-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly ......................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Precautions ................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1
1-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly ........................................................................................... 1-4-2
(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF original feed pulley .............................. 1-4-2
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley .......................................................................... 1-4-3
(3) Adjusting the lateral squareness of the DF ................................................................................... 1-4-4
(4) Adjusting the DF magnification ..................................................................................................... 1-4-5
(5) Adjusting the DF center line .......................................................................................................... 1-4-7
(6) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is used ........................................................... 1-4-9
(6-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration .......................................................................... 1-4-9
(6-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration ......................................................................... 1-4-11
(7) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF ...................................................... 1-4-13

2-1-1 Mechanical construction ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-1
(1) Original feed mechanism ..............................................................................................................
2-1-1
1-1-1
(2) Original feed timing ....................................................................................................................... 2-1-3

2-2-2 Electrical parts layout ........................................................................................................................... 2-2-1
3A7

2-3-1 DF driver PCB ...................................................................................................................................... 2-3-1
2-3-2 Original size detection PCB ................................................................................................................. 2-3-4
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ..........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 2 ..........................................................................................................................................
Periodic maintenance procedures ..................................................................................................................
Wiring diagram ...............................................................................................................................................
1-1-2
2-4-1
2-4-2
2-4-3
2-4-4
3A7
Original feed system ...................... Automatic feed
Originals ......................................... Sheets
Original weights .............................. 35 160 g/m2
Original sizes .................................. A3 A5R, folio/11" 17" 51/2" 81/2"
Number of originals ........................ Up to 70 sheets (A4 or smaller paper of 80 g/m2, or 11" 81/2" or smaller paper of
75 g/m2)
Up to 50 sheets (B4, folio or larger paper of 80 g/m2, or 81/2" 14" or larger paper of
75 g/m2)
Up to 30 sheets in the auto selection mode
Thermal and art paper must be fed individually.
Power source ................................. Electrically connected to the copier
Machine dimensions ...................... 553 (W) 478 (D) 121 (H) mm
213/4" (W) 1813/16" (D) 43/4" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approx. 6.9 kg/15.18 lbs
1-1-1
3A7
1-1-2 Part names and their functions

2
4
Figure 1-1-1
1
2
3
4
5
1-1-2
Original table
Original insertion guides
DF open/close handle
Original eject cover
DF original cover
3A7
Original path
Figure 1-1-2
Machine cross section
1-1-3
3A7
1-1-4 Drive system

7
8
6
0
1
9
4
&
@
#
Figure 1-1-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1-1-4
Original feed motor gear

Gear 42/29
Lift gear 38
Idle gear 20
Original feed gear 30
Original feed pulley
Forwarding belt
Forwarding pulley 20
Original conveying motor gear
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
Idle gear Z45/B16

Original conveying belt 92
Tension pulley
Registration pulley 19
Original conveying pulley 24
Original conveying belt 190
Tension pulley
Original conveying pulley 24
3A7
1-2-1 Unpacking
5
2 3
7
1
4
6
8
Figure 1-2-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Unpacking
Sheet through DF
Installation manual
Plastic bag
Bottom pads
Upper pad
Outer case
Plastic sheet
Bar-code labels
Plastic bag
1-2-1
3A7
1-3-1 Original misfeed detection

(1) Original misfeed indication
When an original jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of an original jam is indicated on the
copier operation panel.
To remove the jammed original, open the DF or the DF original cover.
To reset the original misfeed detection, open and close the DF or the DF original cover to turn DF safety switch 1 or 2 off and
on.
,
DFTSW
Figure 1-3-1
Original misfeed detection
1-3-1
3A7
(2) Original misfeed detection condition
No original feed (jam code 70)
During the primary feed of the second or later original, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn on within 1410 original
feed motor (OFM) pulses of the start of forward rotation of the original feed motor (OFM). After up to five retries, the DF
timing switch (DFTSW) still fails to turn on.
Off
OFM
On (Fwd.)
Off
DFTSW
1410 P*
On
* Burst of OFM pulses
Timing chart 1-3-1

An original jam in the original feed and conveying sections (jam code 73)
During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) does not turn off within 10200 original conveying motor
(OCM) pulses of the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turning on.
Off
DFTSW
10200 P*
On
* Burst of OCM pulses
Timing chart 1-3-2

During the secondary original feed, the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turns off within 1764 original conveying motor (OCM)
pulses of the DF timing switch (DFTSW) turning on.
Off
DFTSW
1764 P*
On
* Burst of OCM pulses
Timing chart 1-3-3
1-3-2
3A7
(3) Original misfeeds
Problem
(1)
An original jams
when the main
Causes

Remove any found.
an original is caught around
the actuator of the original
size detection PCB.
detection PCB.
With 5 V DC present at CN5-8 on the DF driver PCB, check if

CN5-3 on the DF driver PCB remains low when the actuator on
the machine front side of the original size detection PCB is turned
on and off. If it does, replace the original size detection PCB.

Remove any found.
the DF timing switch.
Defective DF timing switch.

CN5-1 on the DF driver PCB remains low when the DF timing
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the DF timing
switch.
(2)
An original jams
during continuous
copying of multiple
originals.

detection PCB.

Check if the original feed

motor or original conveying
motor is malfunctioning.
Check and remedy.
(3)
An original jams in
the DF during
copying (no original
feed).

CN5-1 on the DF driver PCB remains high when the DF timing
switch.
Check if the original feed

motor is malfunctioning.
Check and remedy.
Check if the DF forwarding

pulley, DF original feed
pulley or DF separation
pulley is deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages

1-4-2 and 3).

CN5-1 on the DF driver PCB remains high or low when the DF
timing switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the DF timing
switch.
Check if the DF forwarding

pulley, DF original feed
pulley or DF separation
pulley is deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed (see pages

1-4-2 and 3).
Check if the upper or lower

DF registration roller is
deformed.
Check visually and replace the roller if deformed.
An original outside the

specifications is used.
Use only originals conforming to the specifications.
The DF forwarding pulley,

DF original feed pulley or
DF separation pulley is
soiled with paper powder.
The DF original feed pulley

and DF separation pulley
do not contact correctly.
Remedy.
(4)
An original jams in
the DF during
copying (an original
jam in the original
feed and conveying
sections).
(5)
Original jams
frequently.
1-3-3
3A7
1-3-2 Image formation problems

(1) There is a regular error
between the centers of
the original and copy
image when the DF is
used.
See page 1-3-5.
1-3-4

between the leading
edges of the original
and copy image when
the DF is used.
See page 1-3-5.
3A7
between the centers of
the original and copy
image when the DF is
used.
Causes
1. Misadjusted DF center line.
Causes
1. Misadjusted DF center line.

between the leading
edges of the original
and copy image when
the DF is used.
Readjust the DF center line (see page 1-4-7).
Causes
1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start position.
Causes
1. Misadjusted DF original scanning start
position.

Readjust the DF original scanning start position (see page 1-4-9).
1-3-5
3A7

Problem
(1)
The original feed
motor does not
operate.
(2)
The original
conveying motor
does not operate.
(3)
The copier scans the
contact glass when
originals are loaded
on the DF.
(4)
An original jams
when the main
Causes
Broken original feed motor

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
feed motor.
The connector terminals of

the original feed motor
make poor contact.

Defective DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil and connector terminals of

the original feed motor. If present, replace the DF driver PCB.
Broken original conveying

motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the original
conveying motor.

the original conveying
motor make poor contact.

Defective DF driver PCB.
Check for continuity across the coil and connector terminals of

the original conveying motor. If present, replace the DF driver
PCB.

DF safety switch 1 make
poor contact.

Defective DF safety
switch 1.
Check for continuity across the contacts of DF safety switch 1. If

none when the switch is on, replace DF safety switch 1.

detection PCB.

CN5-3 on the DF driver PCB remains high when the actuator on
Remove any found.

the actuator of the original
size detection PCB.
detection PCB.

Remove any found.

the DF timing switch.
1-3-6

CN5-1 on the DF driver PCB remains low when the DF timing
switch.
3A7

Problem
Corrective measures
(1)
No primary original feed.
The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulley, DF

original feed pulley or DF separation pulley
are soiled with paper powder.
Check and clean them with isopropyl

alcohol if they are soiled.
Check if the DF forwarding pulley, DF original

feed pulley or DF separation pulley is
deformed.
Check visually and replace the deformed

pulley (see pages 1-4-2 and 3).
Electrical problem with the original feed

motor.
See page 1-3-6.
(2)
No secondary original
feed.
The upper and lower DF registration rollers

do not contact each other correctly.
Remedy.
Electrical problem with the original conveying

motor.
See page 1-3-6.
(3)
Originals jam.
Originals outside the specifications are used.
Use only originals conforming to the

specifications.
The surfaces of the DF forwarding pulley, DF

original feed pulley or DF separation pulley
are soiled with paper powder.
Check and clean them with isopropyl

alcohol if they are soiled.
The DF original feed pulley and DF

separation pulley, or the upper and lower DF
eject roller do not contact each other
correctly.
Remedy.
1-3-7
3A7

(1) Precautions
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
1-4-1
3A7
1-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly

(1) Detaching and refitting the DF forwarding pulley and DF original feed pulley
Clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley and DF original feed pulley as follows.
Procedure
1. Open the DF original cover.
2. Remove the original feed pulley guide.
Original feed
pulley guide
Figure 1-4-1
Detaching the DF forwarding pulley
3. Remove the stop ring at the machine front.
4. Pull the forwarding shaft out and remove
the DF forwarding pulley.
Stop ring
DF forwarding pulley
Forwarding shaft
Figure 1-4-2
Detaching the DF original feed pulley
5. Remove the stop ring at the machine front and
remove the bushing.
6. Pull the original feed shaft toward the machine
rear and shift the rear bushing toward the
machine rear.
7. Remove the DF original feed pulley.
8. Clean or replace the DF forwarding pulley and
DF original feed pulley.
Stop ring
Bushing
DF original feed pulley
Original feed shaft
Figure 1-4-3
1-4-2
Bushing
3A7
(2) Detaching and refitting the DF separation pulley
Clean or replace the DF separation pulley as follows.
Procedure
1. Open the DF original cover.
2. Remove the screw securing the original feed
guide and then the guide.
Original feed guide
Figure 1-4-4
3. Remove the stop ring, pull the separation shaft
out and remove the DF separation pulley.
4. Clean or replace the DF separation pulley.
Stop ring
DF separation
pulley
Separation shaft
Figure 1-4-5
1-4-3
3A7
(3) Adjusting the lateral squareness of the DF
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge or trailing edge of the copy image is laterally skewed (lateral
Caution:
Before adjusting the lateral squareness of the DF, adjust the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller and
scanner image lateral squareness at the copier first and check the lateral squareness of the copy image by copying using
the DF. If squareness is still not obtained, perform the following adjustment.
Procedure
Start
Place an original on the DF

Original
Yes
End
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-6
No
Copy
example 1
Remove the three screws and DF

lower front cover. See Figure 1-4-7.
Loosen the two screws and adjust the
position of the original feed unit using
the center of the scale as the reference.
See Figure 1-4-7.
For copy example 1, turn the
adjustment pin and move the original
feed unit toward the machine left (b).
For copy example 2, turn the
adjustment pin and move the original
feed unit toward the machine right
(e).
Tighten the two screws.

Refit the DF lower front cover.
Adjustment pin
DF lower
front cover
Screws
Original feed unit
Figure 1-4-7
1-4-4
3A7
(4) Adjusting the DF magnification
Adjust magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction if magnification is incorrect when the DF is used.
U053
U034
U402
U065
U066
U403
U070
U071
(P. 1-4-9)
U404
(P. 1-4-13)
Caution:
Procedure
20 cpm copier
Main scanning
direction
Start
Auxiliary
scanning
direction
Enter 070 using

the numeric keys.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-8


Yes
No
Change the setting using the

cursor left/right keys.
the value to make the copy
image longer.
image shorter.
Setting range: 25 to +25
Reference: 0
End
1-4-5
3A7
15 cpm copier
Main scanning
direction
Start
Auxiliary
scanning
direction
Enter 070 using

the numeric keys.
Original
Figure 1-4-9


Yes
End
1-4-6
Copy
example 1
No

zoom +/ keys.
image longer.
image shorter.
Reference: 0
Copy
example 2
3A7
(5) Adjusting the DF center line
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the
DF is used.
U402
U034
U067
U403
U404
(P. 1-4-13)
U072
Caution:
Procedure
20 cpm copier
Start
Reference
Enter 072 using the numeric

keys and press the start key.
Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-10
The new setting

is stored.
Yes
No

the value.
the value.
Changing the value by 1 moves the center line
by 0.17 mm.
Reference: 0
End
1-4-7
3A7
15 cpm copier
Start
Reference

Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-4-11
The new setting

is stored.
Yes
End
1-4-8
No

zoom +/ keys.
the value.
the value.
Changing the value by 1 moves the center line
by 0.17 mm.
Reference: 0
Copy
example 2
3A7
(6) Adjusting the scanning start position when the DF is used
Perform the following adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy
image.
U402
U034
U066
U403
U071
U404
(P. 1-4-13)
Caution:
(6-1) Adjusting the DF leading edge registration
Procedure
20 cpm copier
Start

Original
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-12
Select LEAD EDGE ADJ
using the cursor up/down
keys.

Place an original on the

DF and make a test copy.
Yes
End
No
For copy example 1,

increase the value using
the cursor right key.
For copy example 2,
decrease the value using
the cursor left key.
Reference: 0
the copy image by 0.19 mm.
Increasing the value moves the copy
image backward, and decreasing it
moves the image forward.
1-4-9
3A7
15 cpm copier
Start

Original
Copy
example 1
Figure 1-4-13
Light the copy exposure indicator
exp. 1 using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.

Place an original on the

DF and make a test copy.
Yes
End
1-4-10
No
For copy example 1,

the zoom + key.
For copy example 2,
the zoom key.
Reference: 0
Increasing the value moves the copy
image backward, and decreasing it
moves the image forward.
Copy
example 2
3A7
(6-2) Adjusting the DF trailing edge registration
Perform the following adjustment if the original scanning end position is not correct.
Caution:
If the copies look like copy example 2, clean the DF original scanning section.
Procedure
20 cpm copier
Start
Original
Select TRAIL EDGE ADJ

using the cursor up/down
keys.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-14

Yes
End
No
For copy example 1,

the cursor right key.
For copy example 2,
the cursor left key.
Reference: 0
Increasing the value moves the trailing
edge of the copy image backward,
and decreasing it moves the trailing
edge of the image forward.
1-4-11
3A7
15 cpm copier
Start
Original
Light the copy exposure indicator
exp. 2 using the copy exposure
adjustment keys.
Figure 1-4-15

Yes
End
1-4-12
Copy
example 1
No
For copy example 1,

the zoom + key.
For copy example 2,
the zoom key.
Reference: 0
Increasing the value moves the trailing
edge of the copy image backward,
and decreasing it moves the trailing
edge of the image forward.
Copy
example 2
3A7
(7) Adjusting the margins for scanning the original from the DF
Perform the following adjustment if margins are not correct.
U403
U402
U404
Caution:
Procedure
20 cpm copier
Start

using the cursor up/down keys.
Adjustment items
A MGN: DF left margin
B MGN: DF leading edge margin
C MGN: DF right margin
D MGN: DF trailing edge margin



Yes
Yes

No
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the
cursor right key makes the
margin wider.
cursor left key makes the
margin narrower.
DF left margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)
DF leading edge margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (3)
DF right margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)
DF trailing edge margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)

Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(2.5+1.5
2.0 mm)
DF right margin
(2.5+1.5
2.0 mm)
End

(3 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-4-16
1-4-13
3A7
15 cpm copier
Start

Adjustment items (copy exposure indicator)
Exp. 1: DF left margin
Exp. 2: DF leading edge margin
Exp. 3: DF right margin
Exp. 4: DF trailing edge margin



Yes
Yes

No
No
Change the setting.

Increasing the value using the
zoom + key makes the margin
wider.
zoom key makes the margin
narrower.
DF left margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)
DF leading edge margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (3)
DF right margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)
DF trailing edge margin: 0.0 to 10.0 (2)

Ejection direction
(reference)
DF left margin
(2.5+1.5
2.0 mm)
DF right margin
(2.5+1.5
2.0 mm)
End

(3 2.5 mm)
Figure 1-4-17
1-4-14
3A7
2-1-1 Mechanical construction

(1) Original feed mechanism
The DF consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It conveys the original across the DF contact glass in synchronization with the copier scanning operation.
During primary original feed, the original feed motor (OFM) turns on and the lift cam starts rotating, moving the lift guide up
until the originals make contact with the DF forwarding pulley. The DF forwarding pulley feeds the originals one by one and
the DF original feed pulley conveys the original further into the DF. During secondary original feed, the original conveying
motor (OCM) turns on and the DF upper registration roller and DF lower registration roller convey the original onto the DF
contact glass. The DF upper eject roller and DF lower eject roller then eject the original to the original eject cover.
#
9
$
*
!
@
&
)
Figure 2-1-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Original feed mechanism
Original table
DF separation pulley
Original feed pulley guide
Original feed guide
Lift guide
Lift cam
Lift lever
Lift spring
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
)
DF upper registration roller

DF lower registration roller
DF upper eject roller
DF lower eject roller
Original conveying guide
Scanning guide
Upper eject guide
Lower eject guide
DF contact glass (copier)
2-1-1
2-1-2
OSDPCB
OCM
OFM
CN4B-1
CN4B-6
CN1-8
CN1-6
CN1-5
CN1-4
CN1-3
CN1-2
DFTSW
CN4A-3
CN4A-8
CN5-1
CN5-3
CN5-4
CN5-5
CN5-6
CN5-7
CN2-2
3A7
DFDPCB
Figure 2-1-2 DF block diagram
3A7
(2) Original feed timing
DF start signal
DFTSW
Fwd. rotation
300 P1
OFM
450 P1
192 P1
Rev. rotation
192 P1
3606/3329 P2*
1260/1129 P2*
Fwd. rotation
OCM
2300 P2
Rev. rotation
F
Original: A4R/11" 81/2"
P1: Burst of OFM pulses
P2: Burst of OCM pulses
* Metric/inch
Timing chart 2-1-1

A When the DF start signal turns on, the original feed motor (OFM) starts rotating forward, driving the DF forwarding
pulley and DF paper feed pulley to start primary original feed.
B 300 OFM pulses after the leading edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) on, the original feed motor
(OFM) turns off to complete the primary original feed.
C The original conveying motor (OCM) starts rotating forward, driving the DF upper registration roller and DF upper
eject roller to start secondary original feed.
D 1260/1129 OCM pulses after the original conveying motor (OCM) turns on, the original feed motor (OFM) rotates
forward for 192 pulses.
E 3606/3329 OCM pulses after the original conveying motor (OCM) turns on, the original feed motor (OFM) rotates in
reverse direction for 192 pulses.
F 2300 OCM pulses after the trailing edge of the original turns the DF timing switch (DFTSW) off, the original conveying
motor (OCM) turns off to complete the secondary original feed. At the same time, the original feed motor (OFM) starts
rotating in reverse direction for 450 pulses.
2-1-3
3A7

,
,
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1
1. DF driver PCB (DFDPCB) ........................... Controls electrical components.

2. DF safety switch 1 (DFSSW1) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF original cover is opened; resets
original jam detection.
3. DF safety switch 2 (DFSSW2) ..................... Breaks the safety circuit when the DF is opened; resets original jam
detection.
4. Original size detection PCB (OSDPCB) ...... Detects the presence and width of the original.
5. Original size length switch (OSLSW) ........... Detects the length of the original.
6. DF timing switch (DFTSW) .......................... Detects the original scanning timing.
7. Original feed motor (OFM) ........................... Drives the original feed section.
8. Original conveying motor (OCM) ................. Drives the original conveying section.
2-2-1
3A7
2-3-1 DF driver PCB
DF driver PCB
24 V DC
IC
24 V DC
OCM A
OCM B
OCM A
OCM B
Motor
driver IC
OCM
24 V DC
Copier
Motor
driver IC
24 V DC
OFM A
OFM B
OFM A
OFM B
OFM
Switches
Figure 2-3-1 DF driver PCB block diagram

The DF driver PCB (DFDPCB) consists mainly of the motor driver ICs. It drives the original feed motor (OFM) and original
conveying motor (OCM) with control signals from the copier. It also relays 5 V DC supply and signals to each switch.
2-3-1
CN2
22
21
Figure 2-3-2
2
1
C4
DF driver PCB silk-screen diagram
1
CN1
2
1
CN3
L9
L10
10
9
A8
CN4
C3
CN6
3
2-3-2
A1
C2
IC2
IC1
CN5
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
L6
L7
L8
B1
12
C1
B8
3A7
3A7
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-3, 4
1-2
1-3, 4
1-7
1-9, 10
1-8
1-9, 10
2-1
1-3, 4
2-2
1-9, 10
2-4
1-9, 10
2-5
1-9, 10
2-6
1-9, 10
2-7
1-9, 10
2-8
1-9, 10
2-9
1-9, 10
2-10
1-9, 10
2-11
1-9, 10
2-12
1-9, 10
2-16
1-9, 10
2-17
1-9, 10
2-18
1-9, 10
2-19
1-9, 10
2-20
1-9, 10
2-21
1-9, 10
2-22
1-9, 10
3-1
3-2
4-A3
1-9, 10
4-A4
1-9, 10
4-A5
1-9, 10
4-A6
1-9, 10
4-A7
1-9, 10
4-A8
1-9, 10
4-B1
1-9, 10
4-B2
1-9, 10
4-B3
1-9, 10
4-B4
1-9, 10
4-B5
1-9, 10
4-B6
1-9, 10
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-2
5-4
5-2
5-5
5-2
5-6
5-2
5-7
5-2
5-8
5-2
5-10
5-9
5-11
5-9
6-2
6-1
6-3
6-1
Voltage
24 V DC
24 V DC
5 V DC
5 V DC
24/0 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
5/0 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
24 V DC supply, input
DFSSW2 off/on, output
DFSSW1 off/on, output
OFM ENABLE signal, input
OFM energization mode signal, input (OFM RET)
OFM drive clock pulse, input
OFM rotational direction switching signal, input
OCM ENABLE signal, input
OCM energization mode signal, input (OCM M1)
OCM drive clock pulse, input
OCM rotational direction switching signal, input
OCM current control voltage, input
OSLSW original size detection (length) signal, output
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, output (B)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, output (C)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, output (D)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, output (E)
OSDPCB original present/not present detection signal, output
DFTSW on/off, output
DFSSW2 off/on, input
24 V DC supply for OCM, output (A)
24 V DC supply for OCM, output (B)
OCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
OCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
OCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
OCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
24 V DC supply for OFM, output (A)
24 V DC supply for OFM, output (B)
OFM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
OFM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
OFM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
OFM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
DFTSW on/off, input
OSDPCB original present/not present detection signal, input
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, input (B)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, input (C)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, input (D)
OSDPCB original size detection (width) signal, input (E)
5 V DC supply for OSDPCB, output
DFSSW1 off/on, input
5 V DC supply for DFSSW1, output
OSLSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for OSLSW, output
2-3-3
3A7
2-3-2 Original size detection PCB

5V
CN2-1
PI1
PI2
PI3
PI4
PI5
CN1-1
5V
CN1-2
PI1
CN1-3
PI2
CN1-4
PI3
CN1-5
PI4
CN1-6
PI5
GND
CN2-3
CN1-7
GND
DFTSW
CN2-2
CN1-8
DFTSW
Figure 2-3-3
Original size detection circuit
The original size detection PCB (OSDPCB) consists of five transmission-type photointerrupters, the original set switch (PI5)
and original size width switches B to E (PI4 to PI1). It determines the presence of the original on the original table by the on/
off status of the original set switch (PI5) and the width of the original by the combination of the on/off status of original size
width switches B to E (PI4 to PI1), and then sends these detection signals to the DF driver PCB (DFDPCB).
2-3-4
3A7
Original size width switches B to E (PI4 to PI1) are arranged from the inner side to the outer side of the PCB as shown in
Figure 2-3-4. When an original is placed on the original table, the original size is determined by the turning on of the original
size width switches and the on/off status of the original size length switch (OSLSW) on the original table.
Outer side
CN1
PI1
PI2
PI3
CN2
PI4
PI5
Inner side
Figure 2-3-4 Original size detection PCB
Table 2-3-1
Original size width switch
Original size
A3
11" 15"
B4
Folio
A4R
B5R
A4
A5R
B5
Original size length switch
B (PI4)
C (PI3)
D (PI2)
E (PI1)
OSLSW
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Inch specifications
Original size width switch
Original size
11" 17"
11" 15"
81/2" 14"R
81/2" 11"
11" 81/2"
51/2" 81/2"R
Original size length switch
B (PI4)
C (PI3)
D (PI2)
E (PI1)
OSLSW
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
2-3-5
Timing chart No. 1
OCM
OFM
Fwd.
CN4A-5, rotation
6, 7, 8 Rev.
rotation
Fwd.
CN4B-3, rotation
4, 5, 6 Rev.
rotation
DFTSW CN5-1
DF start signal
Feeding an A4R/81/2" 11" original
300 P1

* Metric/inch
192 P1
1260/
1129 P2*
3606/3329 P2*
Secondary original feed start
Primary original feed end
192 P1
2300 P2
450 P1
3A7
2-4-1
2-4-2
OCM
OFM
Fwd.
CN4A-5, rotation
6, 7, 8 Rev.
rotation
Fwd.
CN4B-3, rotation
4, 5, 6 Rev.
rotation
DFTSW CN5-1
T iming chart No. 2
DF start signal
300 P1
192 P1
1260/
1129 P2*
3606/3329 P2*
Secondary original feed start
Primary original feed end
192 P1
800 P2
325 ms

* Metric/inch
192 P1
1260/
1129 P2*
3606/3329 P2*
Start of secondary feed

for next original
300 P1
Start of primary feed

for next original
Feeding two A4R/81/2" 11" originals continuously
192 P1
2300 P2
450 P1
3A7
3A7

Section
Original feed
section
Section
Original
conveying
section
Section
Original eject
section
Section
Covers
Section
Others
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions

and DF separation pulley
Replace
Every service
Replace
Every service

PCB
Clean
Every service
Airbrush.
DF timing switch
Clean
Every service
Airbrush.
Original feed lift friction

plate
Check and replace
Every service
Replace if damaged.
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
1-4-2,
3
1-4-2
Points and cautions
DF upper registration
roller
Clean
Every service
DF lower registration
roller
Clean
Every service
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
DF upper eject roller
Clean
Every service
DF lower eject roller
Clean
Every service
Eject section static

eliminator
Check and replace
Every service
Replace if damaged.
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
DF contact glass
Clean
Every service
Clean both sides of the glass

with alcohol or a dry cloth.
Covers
Clean
Every service
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Page
Points and cautions
Original holder sheet
Clean
Every service
Scanning sheet
Clean
Every service
Indication plate sponge
Clean
Every service
Page
Page
Page
Page
2-4-3
2-4-4
8
DFTSW
OE
YW
BE
Wiring diagram
DFSSW2
C
P1
C5-8 GY
C5-7 GY
C5-6 GY
C5-5 GY
C5-4 GY
C5-3 GY
C5-2 GY
C5-1 GY
DFSSW2 1 C3-1 RD
2 C3-2 RD
24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
C14
5V
OSDPCB E
OSDPCB D
OSDPCB C
OSDPCB B
SET SW
PG
DFTSW
OFM
C13
1
2
3
4
5
6
C12
OCM ACOM
OCM BCOM
OCM A
OCM B
OCM A
OCM B
6
5
4
3
2
1
C4 (A-3) RD
C4 (A-4) GY
C4 (A-5) GY
C4 (A-6) GY
C4 (A-7) GY
C4 (A-8) RD
BK
WE
RD
BE
YW
OE
OCM
OSDPCB
1 5V
2 DFTSW
3 SG
C15
BK
WE
RD
BE
YW
OE
C11
1
2
3
4
5
6
C10
OFM ACOM
OFM BCOM
OFM A
OFM B
OFM A
OFM B
6
5
4
3
2
1
C4 (B-1) RD
C4 (B-2) GY
C4 (B-3) GY
C4 (B-4) GY
C4 (B-5) GY
C4 (B-6) GY
P1-2 RD
P1-1 RD
C6-8
C6-9
C6-10
C6-11
C6-4
C6-5
C6-6
C6-7
C6-1 GN
C6-2 GN
C3
PG
PG
24V
24V
C1
(CN1)
SG
SG
5V
5V
(CN3)
2 24V
1 DFSSW2
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
M1
C8
Wire color Symbol

Black
BK
Yellow
YW
Blue
BE
Red
RD
Orange
OE
Gray
GY
C7
C12-6 RD
C12-5 GY
C12-4 GY
C12-3 GY
C12-2 GY
C12-1 GY
DFDPCB
Mi2 (11P) RED
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
OCM A
OCM B
OCM A
OCM B
OCM BCOM
OCM ACOM
C17
OFM RET
OFM CLK
OFM CWB
OCM ENABLE
OCM CLK
OCM CWB
OCM Vref
OCM M1
OFM ENABLE
OSDPCB E
OSDPCB D
SET SW
OSDPCB C
OSDPCB B
DF SHORT
DFSSW2
DFSSW1
OSLSW
DFTSW
FG
FG
SG
SG
5V
5V
PG
PG
24V
24V
C5
C9
(CN6)
(CN5)
DFTSW
PG
SET SW
OSDPCB B
OSDPCB C
OSDPCB D
OSDPCB E
5V
SG
DFSSW1
5V
DFSSW1
C14-8 GY
1
C14-7 GY
2
C14-6 GY
3
C14-5 GY
4
C14-4 GY
5
C14-3 GY
6
C14-2 GY
7
C14-1 GY
8
C18-3 GY
9
C18-2 GY
10
C18-1 GY
11
12
C9-3 GY
1
C9-2 GY
2
C9-1 GY
3
1 5V
2 DFSSW1
3 SG
5V
OSLSW
SG
C5-11 GY
C5-10 GY
C5-9 GY
C18
C10-1 GY
C10-2 GY
C10-3 GY
C10-4 GY
C10-5 GY
C10-6 RD
C2
(CN2)
Mi2 (11P) WHITE
OSLSW
OFM BCOM
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
C6
OFM ACOM
OFM B
OFM A
OFM B
OFM A
(CN4)
C4
Mi2 (12P) WHITE
C7-9
C7-10
C9-12
C8-1
C8-2
C8-3
C8-4
C8-11
C8-6
C8-7
C8-8
B-11
B-10
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
A-23
A-22
A-21
A-20
A-19
A-18
A-17
A-16
A-15
A-14
A-13
A-12
A-11
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
C2-5
1
C2-6
2
C2-7
3
C2-8
4
5
C2-10
6
C2-11
7
C2-12
8
9
10
C2-9
11
C2-4
1
C2-20
2
C2-19
3
C2-21
4
C2-18
5
C2-17
6
C2-15
7
8
C2-1
9
C2-2
10
C2-16
11
C2-22
12
M1 GN
1
M1 GN
2
3
C1-10
4
C1-9
5
C1-8
6
C1-7
7
C1-4
8
C1-3
9
C1-2
10
C1-1
11
C7-7
C7-11
C7-6
C7-5
C7-3
C7-2
C7-4
C7-12
OFM ENABLE
OCM ENABLE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
DFSSW2
DFSSW1
OFM RET
OFM CLK
OFM CWB
OCM M1
OCM CLK
OCM CWB
OCM Vref
DF SHORT
OSLSW
OSDPCB B
OSDPCB C
OSDPCB D
OSDPCB E
SET SW
DFTSW
C17-3
1
C17-2
2
C17-1
3
SG
OSLSW
5V
3A7
J-1302
3A8
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Troubleshooting
1-3-1 Paper misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...............................................................................................................
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................
(3) Paper misfeeds .............................................................................................................................
(1) Paper jams when the main switch is turned on. ....................................................................
(2) Paper jams in the job separator during copying (jam in job separator eject section). ...........
(1) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................
(1) Paper jams. ...................................................................................................................................
(2) Abnormal noise is heard. ..............................................................................................................
1-3-1
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-4
1-3-5
1-3-5
1-3-5

2-1-1 Construction of each section ................................................................................................................ 2-1-1
(1) Switching the paper path .............................................................................................................. 2-1-2

2-3 Appendixes
Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
1-1-1
3A8
Type ............................................... Enclosed
Tray capacity .................................. 100 sheets of 64 80 g/m2 paper
Paper .............................................. Plain paper: 75 80 g/m2
Special paper: colored paper
Paper sizes .................................... A3 A5R, folio/11" 17" 51/2" 81/2"
2011/16" (W) 171/2" (D) 31/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approximately 1.6 kg/3.52 lbs
1-1-1
3A8
Figure 1-1-1
1 Job separator tray
2 LED
1-1-2
3A8
Paper path
Figure 1-1-2
1-1-3
3A8
1-1-4 Drive system
4
3
1
Figure 1-1-3
1
2
3
4
1-1-4
Gear 20
Gear 14
Gear 21
Eject roller gear
3A8
1-2-1 Unpacking
4
#
8
67
$
1
2
3
4
5
!
&
&
Figure 1-2-1
Unpacking
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
Job separator
Right eject cover
Job separator tray
Pin
Two (2) cross-head bronze binding screws
BMV3 05
Jam correction label
Installation manual
Plastic bag
Upper pad
Spacer
Bottom pad
Outer case
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Bar-code labels
1-2-1
3A8

When paper jams, the machine immediately stops operation and the occurrence of a paper jam is indicated on the copier
operation panel.
To remove the jammed paper, open the copier left cover.
To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the copier left cover to turn safety switch 2 off and on.
JBESW
ESW
Figure 1-3-1
Paper misfeed detection
1-3-1
3A8
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition
Jam in job separator eject section (jam code 51)
The job separator eject switch (JBESW) does not turn off within 1260 ms of the copier eject switch (ESW) turning off.
Off
ESW (copier)
On
Off
JBESW
1260 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-1
1-3-2
3A8
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem
(1)
Paper jams when the
main switch is turned
on.
Corrective measures

around the job separator
eject switch.
Remove any found.
Defective job separator

eject switch.
With 5 V DC present at CN16-6 on the copier main PCB, check if

CN16-7 on the main PCB remains low when the job separator
eject switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the job
separator eject switch.
(2)
Defective job separator
Paper jams in the job eject switch.
separator during
copying (jam in job
separator eject
Check if the job eject pulley
section).
or job eject roller is
deformed.

CN16-7 on the main PCB remains high when the job separator
eject switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the job
separator eject switch.
Check visually and replace the pulley if deformed.
1-3-3
3A8

Problem
(1)
The feedshift
solenoid does not
operate.
1-3-4
Causes
Broken feedshift solenoid

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the feedshift
solenoid.
Poor contact of the

feedshift solenoid

Defective main PCB.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN16-4 and CN16-5

on the copier main PCB go low. If not, replace the main PCB.
3A8

Problem
Corrective measures
(1)
Paper jams.
Check if the contact between the job eject

pulley and job eject roller is correct.
Check and remedy.
(2)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
Check if the job eject pulley, job eject roller

and gears operate smoothly.
Grease the bushings and gears.
1-3-5
3A8
2-1-1 Construction of each section

The job separator consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the paper path to eject copied paper to the
job separator tray.
4 3 1
6
8
2
7
Figure 2-1-1
Job eject pulley

Job eject roller
Upper guide
Lower right guide
5
6
7
8
Lower left guide

Job separator tray
Job separator eject switch (JBESW)
Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)
EPDSW
JBESW
CN16-13
CN16-4, 5
FSSOL
CN16-7
1
2
3
4
Job separator
MPCB (copier)
Figure 2-1-2
Job separator block diagram
2-1-1
3A8
(1) Switching the paper path
If the job separator is selected for the copy eject location, when a copy is made, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and
the feedshift guide of the copier operates to switch the paper path to the job separator. The copied paper is conveyed to the
job separator and then ejected to the job separator tray.
Job separator tray
Feedshift guide
(FSSOL: ON)
Figure 2-1-3
2-1-2
,
,
2
3A8
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Job separator eject switch (JBESW) ........... Detects a paper jam in the job separator.
Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW) ... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
Feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) ........................ Operates the feedshift guide of the copier.
LED .............................................................. Indicates that the ejected paper reached the limit.
2-2-1
3A8

Section
Paper
conveying
section
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Job eject roller
Clean
Every service
Job separator tray
Clean
Every service
Spray air onto the black pad.
Page
2-3-1
AD-61
3A6
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
Drive system ........................................................................................................................................
(1) Feedshift section ...........................................................................................................................
(2) Duplex unit ....................................................................................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-4
1-1-5
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Troubleshooting
1-3-1 Paper misfeed detection ......................................................................................................................
(1) Paper misfeed indication ...............................................................................................................
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions ..............................................................................................
(3) Paper misfeeds .............................................................................................................................
(1) Paper jams in the duplex unit when the main switch is turned on. ........................................
(2) Paper jams in the feedshift section during copying (jam in feedshift section). ......................
(3) Paper jams in the duplex unit during copying (jam in duplex paper conveying
section 1). ..............................................................................................................................
(4) Paper jams in the duplex unit during copying (jam in duplex paper conveying
section 2). ..............................................................................................................................
(1) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. ......................................................................................
(2) The feedshift motor does not operate. ..........................................................................................
(1) Paper jams. ...................................................................................................................................
(2) Abnormal noise is heard. ..............................................................................................................
1-3-1
1-3-1
1-3-2
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-3
1-3-4
1-3-4
1-3-4
1-3-5
1-3-5
1-3-5

1-4-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly .........................................................................................
(1) Precautions ...................................................................................................................................
1-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly ...........................................................................................
(1) Adjusting the margin for printing ...................................................................................................
(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration roller .................................................................
(3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ....................................................................................
1-4-1
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-2
1-4-3
1-4-4

2-1-1 Feedshift section .................................................................................................................................. 2-1-1
(1) Paper conveying operation in the feedshift section ...................................................................... 2-1-2
2-1-2 Duplex unit ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1-3

2-3 Appendixes
Periodic maintenance procedures .................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
1-1-1
3A6
Type ............................................... Outboard
17/8" (W) 1711/16" (D) 155/8" (H)
1-1-1
3A6
Figure 1-1-1
1 Duplex handle
2 Open/close guide
1-1-2
3A6

2
Paper path
Figure 1-1-2
1 Feedshift section
2 Duplex unit
1-1-3
3A6
1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Feedshift section
3
2
Figure 1-1-3
1
2
3
4
1-1-4
Feedshift motor gear

Gear 19/38
Gear 23
Gear 19
5 Gear 30
6 Gear 19/21
7 Gear 25
3A6
(2) Duplex unit
2
1
4
5
Figure 1-1-4
1
2
3
4
5
Gear 20
Gear 20
Gear 16
Gear 16
Gear 25
6
7
8
9
Gear 25
Pulley 20
Duplex belt
Pulley 20
1-1-5
3A6
1-2-1 Unpacking
(
%^
0$
&*
@
)
fi
fl
fl
46
9
Figure 1-2-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
Feedshift unit
Duplex unit
Duplex joint
Front duplex fulcrum plate
Rear duplex fulcrum plate
Front fulcrum hook
Duplex stopper
Left cover
Entry guide
Two (2) stoppers 5
Right eject cover
Job separator tray
Pin
Two (2) cross-head bronze binding
screws BVM3 05
Unpacking
% Seven (7) cross head chrome binding

screws M3 14
^ One (1) cross-head chrome TP-A
screw M3 05
& One (1) cross-head tap-tight P chrome
TP-A screw M3 08
* One (1) cross-head tap-tight P chrome
TP-A screw M4 12
( Clamp
) Jam correction label
Eject section static eliminator
Installation manual
Upper pad
Spacer
fi Plastic bag
fl
Bottom pad
Spacers
Upper pad
Outer case
Spacer
Bottom pad
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Plastic bags
Plastic bag
Product cover
Air-padded bag
Bar-code label
Air-padded bag
Plastic bag
1-2-1
3A6

operation panel.
To remove the jammed paper, open the duplex unit.
To reset the paper misfeed detection, open and close the duplex unit to turn the duplex open/close switch off and on.
DUPPCSW1
DUPPCSW2
RSW
Figure 1-3-1
1-3-1
3A6
(2) Paper misfeed detection conditions
Jam in feedshift section (jam code 51)
Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does not turn on within 1640 ms of the start of reverse rotation of the
feedshift motor (FSM).
Off
FSM
Rev. rotation
On
Off
DUPPCSW1
1640 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-1

Jam in duplex paper conveying section 1 (jam code 60)
Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not turn on within 3360 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) turning on.
Off
DUPPCSW1
On
Off
DUPPCSW2
3360 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-2

Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not turn off within 3360 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) turning off.
Off
DUPPCSW1
On
DUPPCSW2
3360 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 1-3-3

The registration switch (RSW) of the copier does not turn on within 3300 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2
Off
DUPPCSW2
On
Off
RSW (copier)
3300 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-4
1-3-2
3A6
(3) Paper misfeeds
Problem
(1)
Paper jams in the
duplex unit when the
on.
(2)
Paper jams in the
feedshift section
during copying (jam
in feedshift section).
Causes

around duplex paper
conveying switch 1 or 2.
Remove any found.
Defective duplex paper

conveying switch 1.

CN5-10 on the main PCB remains low when duplex paper
conveying switch 1 is turned on and off. If it does, replace duplex
paper conveying switch 1.

conveying switch 2.


conveying switch 1.

CN5-10 on the main PCB remains high when duplex paper
Check if the right eject

pulley or right eject roller is
deformed.
Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.
(3)
Paper jams in the
conveying switch 2.
duplex unit during
copying (jam in
duplex paper
Check if the duplex pulley
conveying section 1).
or upper duplex roller is
deformed.

(4)
Paper jams in the
conveying switch 2.
duplex unit during
copying (jam in
duplex paper
Defective copier
registration switch.


or lower duplex roller is
deformed.

CN3-7 on the main PCB remains high when the registration
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the registration
switch.
1-3-3
3A6

Problem
(1)
The feedshift
solenoid does not
operate.
(2)
The feedshift motor
does not operate.
1-3-4
Causes

coil.
solenoid.
Poor contact of the

feedshift solenoid

Defective main PCB.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN16-4 and CN16-5

on the copier main PCB go low. If not, replace the main PCB.
Broken feedshift motor coil.
motor.
Poor contact of the

feedshift motor connector
terminals.

Defective copier main PCB.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if CN18-7 on the copier

main PCB goes low. If not, replace the main PCB.
Defective motor driver

PCB.
Run maintenance item U030 and check if motor drive coil

energization signal is output at CN2-1, CN2-2, CN2-6 and CN2-5
on the motor driver PCB. If not, replace the motor driver PCB.
3A6

Problem
(1)
Paper jams.
Corrective measures
Check if the contact between the right eject

pulley and right eject roller is correct.
Check and remedy.
Check if the contact between the left eject

pulley and left eject roller is correct.
Check and remedy.
Check if the duplex pulley, upper duplex roller Check visually and replace the pulley or
or lower duplex roller is deformed.
roller if deformed.
(2)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly.
Apply grease to the bushings and gears.
1-3-5
3A6

(1) Precautions
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
1-4-1
3A6
1-4-2 Procedure for assembly and disassembly

(1) Adjusting the margin for printing
Perform the following adjustment if the printer leading edge margin for duplex copying (second face) is not correct.
Procedure
for duplex copying
(second face, 3 2.5 mm)
Start

keys.
Figure 1-4-1
Select TRAIL 2 using the

Press the start key to
output a test pattern.
No
Is the margin correct?
Yes
End
1-4-2
Change the value using the

Setting range: 5.0 to +10.0
Reference: 4.5
Changing the value by 1 moves the margin by
0.5 mm.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider
and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
3A6
(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration roller
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded during duplex copying.
Procedure
Start
Original

keys.
Copy
example 1
Copy
example 2
Figure 1-4-2
Select DUPLEX using the


Make a test copy in duplex mode.
Is the leading
or varying randomly
(copy example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the

cursor right key.
Yes
Decrease the value using the

cursor left key.
No
Is the copy paper

Z-folded (copy example 2)?
No
End

Reference: 0
Changing the value by 1
changes the amount of slack
by 0.1 mm.
Initial setting: 0
the smaller the value,
the smaller the amount of slack
1-4-3
3A6
(3) Adjusting the center line of image printing
copying using the duplex unit.
Procedure
Start
Enter 034 using

the numeric keys.
Correct image
Figure 1-4-3
Select ADJ. LSU OUT TIMING

using the cursor up/down keys
Select LSU DUP using


No

the value using the cursor right
key.
Yes
Press the stop/clear key
to exit maintenance mode.
End
1-4-4
Output
example 1

center line by 0.1 mm.
Initial setting: 0
Output
example 2
3A6
2-1-1 Feedshift section

The feedshift section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the path for the paper conveyed from
the copier during duplex copying.
5 61
0
9
Figure 2-1-1
Right eject pulley
Right eject roller
Left eject pulley
Left eject roller
Upper guide
6
7
8
9
0
Lower right guide

Lower left guide
Job separator tray
Feedshift eject switch (FSESW)
Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW)
EPDSW
MDPCB
CN2-1
CN2-6
FSM
FSESW
CN1-1
CN1-10
CN6-13
CN16-4, 5
FSSOL
CN16-7
1
2
3
4
5
Feedshift section
CN18-1
CN18-10
MPCB (copier)
Figure 2-1-2
Feedshift section block diagram
2-1-1
3A6
(1) Paper conveying operation in the feedshift section
In duplex mode, when the reverse face of the paper is copied, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and the feedshift
guide of the copier operates to switch the paper path to the feedshift section. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the
paper conveying switch (PCSW), the feedshift motor (FSM) reverses, rotating the right eject roller in the reverse direction to
switch back the paper into the duplex unit.
If the job separator tray is selected for the copy eject location, copied paper is conveyed through the feedshift section to the
job separator tray without being switched back.
PCSW: ON
Right eject roller

(FSM: Fwd. rotation)
Feedshift guide
(FSSOL: ON)
PCSW: OFF
Figure 2-1-3
2-1-2
Right eject roller

(FSM: Rev. rotation)
3A6
2-1-2 Duplex unit

The duplex unit consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-4. In duplex mode, after copying on to the reverse face of
the paper, the paper is reversed in the feedshift section and conveyed to the duplex unit. The paper is then conveyed to the
copier paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex rollers.
7
1
2
4
8
6
Figure 2-1-4 Duplex unit

1
2
3
4
Duplex feedshift guide

Upper duplex roller
Lower duplex roller
Duplex pulley
5
6
7
8
Open/close guide
Entry guide
Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1)
DUPPCSW1
CN5-10
DUPPCSW2
CN5-7
MPCB
(copier)
Figure 2-1-5 Duplex unit block diagram
2-1-3

4
2
1
3A6
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-2-1 Feedshift unit
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Motor driver PCB (MDPCB) ......................... Controls the feedshift motor.

Duplex open/close switch (DUPOCSW) ...... Detects if the duplex unit is opened/closed.
Feedshift eject switch (FSESW) .................. Detects a paper jam in the feedshift unit.
Ejected paper detection switch (EPDSW) ... Detects the presence of paper on the job separator tray.
Feedshift motor (FSM) ................................. Drives the feedshift section.
LED .............................................................. Indicates when the job separator tray is full.
2-2-1
3A6
,
,
,
1
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
1. Duplex paper conveying switch 1

(DUPPCSW1) .............................................. Detects a paper jam in the duplex unit.
2-2-2
3A6

Section
Paper
conveying
section
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Points and cautions
Upper duplex roller
Clean
Every service
Lower duplex roller
Clean
Every service
Job separator tray
Clean
Every service
Spray air onto the black pad.
Page
2-3-1
F-2205/AD-62
3BN/3A4
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
1-1-2 Part names and their functions ............................................................................................................
(1) Finisher .........................................................................................................................................
(2) Duplex unit ....................................................................................................................................
1-1-3 Machine cross section ..........................................................................................................................
(1) Finisher .........................................................................................................................................
(2) Duplex unit ....................................................................................................................................
1-1-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................................
(1) Finisher .........................................................................................................................................
(2) Duplex unit ....................................................................................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-2
1-1-3
1-1-4
1-1-4
1-1-5
1-1-6
1-1-6
1-1-7
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................ 1-2-1
1-3 Troubleshooting
1-3-1 Paper misfeed detection ...................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Paper misfeed indication ............................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition ................................................................................................ 1-3-2
(2-1) Finisher ................................................................................................................................. 1-3-2
(2-2) Duplex unit ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-3
(3) Paper misfeeds ............................................................................................................................. 1-3-4
(3-1) Finisher ................................................................................................................................. 1-3-4
(1) Paper jams in the finisher when the main switch is turned on. ..................................... 1-3-4
(2) Paper jams in the finisher during copying (jam during paper conveying for
batch ejection 1). ........................................................................................................... 1-3-4
(3) Paper jams in the finisher during copying (jam during paper conveying for
batch ejection 2). ........................................................................................................... 1-3-4
(3-2) Duplex unit ........................................................................................................................... 1-3-5
(1) Paper jams in the duplex unit when the main switch is turned on. ............................... 1-3-5
(2) Paper jams in the feedshift section during copying (jam in feedshift section). .............. 1-3-5
(3) Paper jams in the duplex unit during copying (jam in duplex paper
conveying section 1). .................................................................................................... 1-3-5
(4) Paper jams in the duplex unit during copying (jam in duplex paper
conveying section 2). .................................................................................................... 1-3-5
1-3-2 Self-diagnosis ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3-6
(1) Self-diagnostic function ................................................................................................................. 1-3-6
(2) Self-diagnostic codes .................................................................................................................... 1-3-7
1-3-3 Electrical problems ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-9
(1) Finisher ......................................................................................................................................... 1-3-9
(1) The paper conveying motor does not operate. ...................................................................... 1-3-9
(2) The feedshift solenoid does not operate. .............................................................................. 1-3-9
(3) The switchback solenoid does not operate. .......................................................................... 1-3-9
(4) The pickup solenoid does not operate. .................................................................................. 1-3-9
(5) The front side registration motor does not operate. ............................................................... 1-3-9
(6) Rear side registration motor does not operate. ..................................................................... 1-3-9
(7) Trailing edge registration motor does not operate. .............................................................. 1-3-10
(2) Duplex unit .................................................................................................................................. 1-3-11
(1) The duplex feedshift solenoid does not operate. ................................................................. 1-3-11
1-3-4 Mechanical problems ......................................................................................................................... 1-3-12
(1) Finisher ....................................................................................................................................... 1-3-12
(1) Paper jams. ......................................................................................................................... 1-3-12
1-1-1
(2) Abnormal noise is heard. .....................................................................................................
1-3-12
(2) Duplex unit .................................................................................................................................. 1-3-13
(1) Paper jams. ......................................................................................................................... 1-3-13
(2) Abnormal noise is heard. ..................................................................................................... 1-3-13
3BN/3A4

1-4-1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly .........................................................................................
(1) Precautions ...................................................................................................................................
1-4-2 Finisher ................................................................................................................................................
(1) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor
and trailing edge registration cursor (reference) ...........................................................................
(2) Cleaning the stapler ......................................................................................................................
(3) Adjusting the tension of the front and rear side registration belts .................................................
1-4-3 Duplex unit ...........................................................................................................................................
(1) Adjusting the margin for printing ...................................................................................................
(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration roller .................................................................
(3) Adjusting the center line of image printing ....................................................................................
1-4-1
1-4-1
1-4-2
1-4-2
1-4-3
1-4-4
1-4-5
1-4-5
1-4-6
1-4-7

2-1-1 Feedshift section ..................................................................................................................................
(1) Paper conveying operation in sort mode ......................................................................................
(2) Switchback operation in duplex mode ..........................................................................................
2-1-2 Intermediate tray section ......................................................................................................................
(1) Paper registration on the intermediate tray ...................................................................................
2-1-3 Eject section .........................................................................................................................................
2-1-4 Stapler section .....................................................................................................................................
2-1-5 Duplex unit ...........................................................................................................................................
(1) Switching the paper path in the duplex unit ..................................................................................
2-1-1
2-1-2
2-1-3
2-1-4
2-1-5
2-1-6
2-1-7
2-1-8
2-1-9

(1) Finisher ......................................................................................................................................... 2-2-1
(2) Duplex unit .................................................................................................................................... 2-2-4

2-3-1 Main PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-3-1
2-4 Appendixes
Timing chart No. 1 ...........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 2 ...........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 3 ...........................................................................................................................................
Timing chart No. 4 ...........................................................................................................................................
Periodic maintenance procedure ....................................................................................................................
Wiring diagram ................................................................................................................................................
1-1-2
2-4-1
2-4-2
2-4-3
2-4-4
2-4-5
2-4-6
3BN/3A4
Finisher
Type ............................................... Built-in
Number of trays .............................. 1 (intermediate tray)
Stapling limit ................................... A4/11" 81/2" or smaller: 30 sheets
Other sizes than above: 20 sheets
273/8" (W) 245/16" (D) 111/16" (H)
Weight ............................................ Approximately 11 kg/24.2 lbs
Duplex unit
Type ............................................... Outboard
11/8" (W) 1711/16" (D) 155/8" (H)
1-1-1
3BN/3A4

(1) Finisher
3
2
Figure 1-1-1
1
2
3
4
1-1-2
Intermediate tray
JAM release lever
Stapler
Eject tray
3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
Figure 1-1-2
1 Duplex lever
2 Open/close guide
1-1-3
3BN/3A4

(1) Finisher
Paper path
Figure 1-1-3
Machine cross section (finisher)
1 Feedshift section
2 Intermediate tray section
3 Eject section
1-1-4
3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
Paper path
Figure 1-1-4 Machine cross section (duplex unit)
1-1-5
3BN/3A4
1-1-4 Drive system

(1) Finisher
%$#
43
67
5
(
*
9
&
Figure 1-1-5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1-1-6
Paper conveying motor gear

Gear 18/38
Gear 18
Central gear
Gear 15
Central gear (front)
Gear 21 (rear)
Lift clutch gear
Clutch cam
Stopper gear
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
*
(
Gear 32
Stopper gear 26
One-way gear 18 (rear)
Gear 21 (front)
Central gear (middle)
Gear 25
Gear 18
Gear 16
Gear 25
3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
2
3
1
4
5
Figure 1-1-5
1
2
3
4
5
Gear 20
Gear 20
Gear 16
Gear 16
Gear 25
6
7
8
9
Gear 25
Pulley 20
Duplex belt
Pulley 20
1-1-7
3BN/3A4
1-2-1 Unpacking
%
$
6
fl
fi
0
!
&
9
8
7
Figure 1-2-1 Unpacking (finisher)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
!
@
#
$
%
^
Intermediate tray unit

Feedshift unit
Eject unit
Eject tray unit
Stapler cover
Staple cartridge
Upper paper conveying cover F
Upper eject cover F
Upper eject cover D
Two (2) cross-head bronze binding screws BVM3 05
Two (2) cross-head chrome TP-A screws M3 05
Installation manual
Instruction handbook
Plastic bag
Unit spacer
Cursor spacer
&
*
(
)
fi
fl
Outer case
Eject tray spacer
Spacer B
Spacer C
Intermediate tray pad
Stapler pad
Cover pad
Bar-code labels
Plastic sheet
Product cover
Air-padded bag
Plastic bag
Air-padded bag
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
Plastic bag
1-2-1
3BN/3A4
90!
@#*
%
$
35
&
8
Figure 1-2-2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Duplex unit
Duplex joint
Front duplex fulcrum plate
Rear duplex fulcrum plate
Front fulcrum hook
Duplex stopper
Left cover
Entry guide
Two (2) stoppers 5
Seven (7) cross-head chrome binding screws
M3 14
! One (1) cross-head chrome TP-A screw M3 05
@ One (1) cross-head tap-tight P chrome TP-A screw
M3 08
1-2-2
Unpacking (duplex unit)

# One (1) cross-head tap-tight P chrome TP-A screw
M4 12
$ Bottom pads
% Spacers
^ Upper pad
& Outer case
* Plastic bag
( Plastic bag
) Product cover
Air-padded bag
Bar-code label
Air-padded bag
3BN/3A4

operation panel.
To remove the jammed paper, lower the intermediate tray or open the duplex unit.
To reset the paper misfeed detection, detach and refit the intermediate tray to turn the tray open/close switch off and on or
open and close the duplex unit to turn the duplex open/close switch off and on.
DUPPCSW1
PCSW
DUPPCSW2
RSW
Figure 1-3-1
1-3-1
3BN/3A4
(2) Paper misfeed detection condition
(2-1) Finisher
Jam between the finisher and copier (jam code 80)
No signal indicating the completion of paper ejection is output from the finisher within 15 s of the paper conveying switch
(PCSW) turning off.
Jam during batch ejection standby (jam code 81)
No signal requesting batch ejection is output from the finisher within 15 s of the ejection of the last sheet to the
intermediate tray.
Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 1 (jam code 82)
When ejecting a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn on within 1250 ms of the start of forward
rotation of the paper conveying motor (PCM).
Off
PCM
Fwd. rotation
On
Off
PCSW
1250 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-1

When ejecting a stack of paper, the paper conveying switch (PCSW) does not turn off within 6320 ms of turning on.
PCSW
6320 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 1-3-2

Jam during paper conveying for batch ejection 2 (jam code 83)
When ejecting a stack of paper, duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does not turn on within 1250 ms of the
paper conveying switch (PCSW) turning on.
Off
PCSW
On
Off
DUPPCSW1
1250 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-3

When ejecting a stack of paper, duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does not turn off within 1640 ms of turning
on.
DUPPCSW1
1640 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 1-3-4
1-3-2
3BN/3A4
(2-2) Duplex unit
Jam in feedshift section (jam code 51)
Duplex paper conveying switch 1 (DUPPCSW1) does not turn on within 1640 ms of the start of reverse rotation of the
paper conveying motor (PCM).
Off
PCM
Rev. rotation
On
Off
DUPPCSW1
1640 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-5

Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not turn on within 3360 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
Off
DUPPCSW1
On
Off
DUPPCSW2
3360 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-6

Duplex paper conveying switch 2 (DUPPCSW2) does not turn off within 3360 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 1
(DUPPCSW1) turning off.
Off
DUPPCSW1
On
DUPPCSW2
3360 ms
Off
On
Timing chart 1-3-7

The registration switch (RSW) of the copier does not turn on within 3300 ms of duplex paper conveying switch 2
Off
DUPPCSW2
On
Off
RSW (copier)
3300 ms
On
Timing chart 1-3-8
1-3-3
3BN/3A4
(3) Paper misfeeds
(3-1) Finisher
Problem
Causes
(1)
Paper jams in the
finisher when the
on.

around the paper
conveying switch.
Remove any found.
Defective paper conveying

switch.

on the main PCB remains low when the paper conveying switch
is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper conveying
switch.
(2)
Paper jams in the
finisher during
copying (jam during
paper conveying for
batch ejection 1).
Defective paper conveying

switch.

on the main PCB remains high or low when the paper conveying
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the paper
conveying switch.
Check if the feedshift roller

or press roller is deformed.
(3)
Paper jams in the
finisher during
copying (jam during
paper conveying for
batch ejection 2).

conveying switch 1 in the
duplex unit.

CN5-10 on the copier main PCB remains high or low when
duplex paper conveying switch 1 is turned on and off. If it does,
replace duplex paper conveying switch 1.
Check if the eject pulley or

eject roller is deformed.
1-3-4
3BN/3A4
(3-2) Duplex unit
Problem
(1)
Paper jams in the
duplex unit when the
on.
(2)
Paper jams in the
feedshift section
during copying (jam
in feedshift section).
Causes

around duplex paper
conveying switch 1 or 2.
Remove any found.

conveying switch 1.


conveying switch 2.


conveying switch 1.

Check if the feedshift pulley Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed.
or feedshift roller is
deformed.
(3)
Paper jams in the
conveying switch 2.
duplex unit during
copying (jam in
duplex paper
Check if the duplex roller or
upper duplex roller is
deformed.

(4)
Paper jams in the
conveying switch 2.
duplex unit during
copying (jam in
duplex paper
Defective copier
registration switch.


or lower duplex roller is
deformed.

CN3-7 on the main PCB remains high when the registration
switch is turned on and off. If it does, replace the registration
switch.
1-3-5
3BN/3A4
(1) Self-diagnostic function
This unit is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, copying is disabled and the problem
displayed as a code consisting of C followed by a number between 034 and 821, indicating the nature of the problem.
A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service.
After removing the problem, the self-diagnostic function can be reset by turning the tray open/close switch or copier safety
switch 1, 2 or 3 off and back on.
1-3-6
3BN/3A4
(2) Self-diagnostic codes
Code
C034
C817
C818
Contents
Finisher communication problem
During the serial communication
between the copier and finisher, when
there is no reply to the command from
the copier from the finisher, serial
communication does not recover after
5 retries.
Front side registration motor problem

When the side registration front home
position sensor is on during initialization,
the sensor does not turn off within
570 ms of the start of initialization.
When the side registration front home
position sensor is off during initialization,
the sensor does not turn on within
Rear side registration motor problem

When the side registration rear home
position sensor is on during initialization,
the sensor does not turn off within
When the side registration rear home
position sensor is off during initialization,
the sensor does not turn on within
Remarks
Causes
Check procedure/corrective measures
The connector
makes poor
contact.

on the copier main PCB and CN1 on the
finisher main PCB, and the continuity
across the connector terminals. Remedy or
Defective copier
main PCB.
Replace the copier main PCB and check for

correct operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.

The front side

registration motor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective front
side registration
motor.
Replace the front side registration motor

and check for correct operation.
The side registration front home

position sensor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective side
registration front
home position
sensor.
Replace the side registration front home

position sensor and check for correct
operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.

The rear side

registration motor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective rear side

registration motor.
Replace the rear side registration motor and

check for correct operation.
The side registration rear home

position sensor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective side
registration rear
home position
sensor.
Replace the side registration rear home

operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.

1-3-7
3BN/3A4
Code
Contents
C819
Trailing edge registration motor

problem
When the trailing edge registration
home position sensor is on during
initialization, the sensor does not turn off
within 570 ms of the start of initialization.
When the trailing edge registration
home position sensor is off during
initialization, the sensor does not turn on
within 4550 ms of the start of
initialization.
1-3
C821
1-3-8
Stapler motor problem

When the stapler home position sensor
is off during stapler initialization, the
sensor does not turn on within 600 ms
of the start of the stapler motor forward
rotation and then it fails to turn on again
within 600 ms of the start of the stapler
motor reverse rotation.
The stapler home position sensor does
not turn off within 200 ms of the start of
stapling.
During stapling, the stapler home
position sensor does not turn on within
600 ms of turning off.
The stapler home position sensor does
not turn off within 200 ms of the start of
self-priming.
During self-priming, the stapler home
position sensor does not turn on within
600 ms of turning off.
Remarks
Causes
Check procedure/corrective measures
The trailing edge

registration motor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective trailing
edge registration
motor.
Replace the trailing edge registration motor

and check for correct operation.
The trailing edge

registration home
position sensor
connector makes
poor contact.

Defective trailing
edge registration
home position
sensor.
Replace the trailing edge registration home

operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.

The stapler motor

connector makes
poor contact.

The stapler
malfunctions.
a) The stapler is
blocked with a
staple.
b) The stapler is
broken.
a) Remove the staple cartridge and check

the cartridge and the stapling section of
the stapler.
b) Replace the stapler and check for correct
operation.
Defective finisher
main PCB.

3BN/3A4

(1) Finisher
Problem
(1)
The paper conveying
motor does not
operate.
(2)
The feedshift
solenoid does not
operate.
(3)
The switchback
solenoid does not
operate.
(4)
The pickup solenoid
does not operate.
(5)
The front side
registration motor
does not operate.
(6)
Rear side
registration motor
does not operate.
Causes
Broken paper conveying

motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the paper
conveying motor.
Poor contact of the paper

conveying motor connector
terminals.

Defective finisher main

PCB.
Check if a motor drive coil energization signal is output at CN9-9,

CN9-10, CN9-11 and CN9-12 on the finisher main PCB. If not,
replace the finisher main PCB.

coil.
solenoid.
Poor contact of the

feedshift solenoid


PCB.
Check if CN4-2 and CN4-4 on the finisher main PCB go low. If

not, replace the finisher main PCB.
Broken switchback
solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the

switchback solenoid.
Poor contact of the

switchback solenoid


PCB.
Check if CN4-6 and CN4-8 on the finisher main PCB go low. If

not, replace the finisher main PCB.
Broken pickup solenoid

coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the pickup
solenoid.
Poor contact of the pickup

solenoid connector
terminals.


PCB.
Check if CN4-7 on the finisher main PCB goes low. If not, replace
the finisher main PCB.
Broken front side

registration motor coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the front side
registration motor.
Poor contact of the front

side registration motor


PCB.

Broken rear side

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the rear side
registration motor.
Poor contact of the rear

side registration motor


PCB.

1-3-9
3BN/3A4
Problem
(7)
Trailing edge
registration motor
does not operate.
1-3-10
Causes
Broken trailing edge

Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the trailing
edge registration motor.
Poor contact of the trailing

edge registration motor


PCB.

3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
Problem
(1)
The duplex feedshift
solenoid does not
operate.
Causes
Broken duplex feedshift

solenoid coil.
Check for continuity across the coil. If none, replace the duplex
feedshift solenoid.
Poor contact of the duplex

feedshift solenoid

Defective copier main PCB.
Run maintenance item U033 and check if CN5-3 and CN5-4 on

the copier main PCB go low. If not, replace the main PCB.
1-3-11
3BN/3A4

(1) Finisher
Problem
(1)
Paper jams.
(2)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
1-3-12
Corrective measures
Check if the contact between the feedshift

pulley and feedshift roller is correct.
Check and remedy.
Check if the contact between the feedshift

roller and press roller is correct.
Check and remedy.
Check if the rollers and gears operate

smoothly.
Grease the bushings and gears.
3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
Problem
Corrective measures
(1)
Paper jams.
Check if the duplex pulley, upper duplex roller Check visually and replace the pulley or
roller if deformed.
or lower duplex roller is deformed.
(2)
Abnormal noise is
heard.
Check if rollers and gears operate smoothly.
Apply grease to the bushings and gears.
1-3-13
3BN/3A4

(1) Precautions
Hioki 3200
Sanwa MD-180C
Sanwa YX-360TR
Beckman TECH300
Beckman DM45
Beckman 330*
Beckman 3030*
Beckman DM850*
Fluke 8060A*
Arlec DMM1050
Arlec YF1030C
1-4-1
3BN/3A4
1-4-2 Finisher
(1) Adjusting the positions of the front side registration cursor, rear side registration cursor and trailing edge
registration cursor (reference)
Perform the following adjustment if paper registration is poor or stapling is made outside the specified area.
Procedure
Stapler
Start
5 2.5 mm
Make a test copy

in staple-sort mode.
Is the paper registration

good?
5 2.5 mm
No
Yes
Figure 1-4-1 Stapling position
Is the stapling
position correct?
See Figure 1-4-1.
Yes
End
No

keys.
using the cursor up/down keys.
The new setting
is stored.
ADJUST FRONT JOGGER: Stop position of the

front side registration cursor
ADJUST REAR JOGGER: Stop position of the rear
side registration cursor
ADJUST END JOGGER: Stop position of the
trailing edge registration cursor
Reference: 4
Increasing the value moves the front or rear side
registration cursor or trailing edge registration
cursor outward (a); decreasing the value moves
each cursor inward (e). See Figure 1-4-2.
Rear side registration cursor
Trailing edge
registration cursor
Front side
registration cursor
Figure 1-4-2
1-4-2
3BN/3A4
(2) Cleaning the stapler
During periodic maintenance, remove all the staples remaining inside the machine due to failure of stapling.
Procedure
1. Open the front cover of the copier.
2. Remove the staple cartridge.
3. Remove the screw securing the stapler cover
and then the cover.
4. Remove the staples attracted to the magnet on
the inside of the stapler cover.
Magnet
Staple
Stapler cover
Staple cartridge
Figure 1-4-3
1-4-3
3BN/3A4
(3) Adjusting the tension of the front and rear side registration belts
Adjust the tension of each belt during periodic maintenance.
Procedure
1. Remove the intermediate tray unit from the
copier.
2. Loosen the tension adjustment screws for the
front and rear side registration belts. The
tension of the tension spring will be applied to
the belts.
3. Retighten the screws. Each belt will be
secured with the tension applied.
Intermediate tray unit
For adjusting the tension

of the front side
registration belt
For adjusting the tension of

the rear side registration belt
Figure 1-4-4
1-4-4
3BN/3A4
1-4-3 Duplex unit

(1) Adjusting the margin for printing
Perform the following adjustment if the printer leading edge margin for duplex copying (second face) is not correct.
Procedure
for duplex copying
(second face, 3 2.5 mm)
Start

keys.
Figure 1-4-5
Select TRAIL 2 using the

No
Is the margin correct?
Yes
Change the value using the

Reference: 4.5
Changing the value by 1 moves the margin by
0.5 mm.
Increasing the value makes the margin wider
and decreasing it makes the margin narrower.
End
1-4-5
3BN/3A4
(2) Adjusting the amount of slack at the registration roller
Perform the following adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly, or if the copy paper is
Z-folded during duplex copying.
Procedure
Start

keys.
Original
Figure 1-4-6
Select DUPLEX using the


Make a test copy in duplex mode.
Is the leading
or varying randomly
(copy example 1)?
Yes
Increase the value using the

cursor right key.
Yes
Decrease the value using the

cursor left key.
No
Is the copy paper

Z-folded (copy example 2)?
No
End
1-4-6
Copy
example 1

Reference: 0
Changing the value by 1
changes the amount of slack
by 0.1 mm.
Initial setting: 0
the smaller the value,
the smaller the amount of slack
Copy
example 2
3BN/3A4
(3) Adjusting the center line of image printing
copying using the duplex unit.
Procedure
Start
Enter 034 using

the numeric keys.
Correct image
Output
example 1
Output
example 2
Figure 1-4-7
Select ADJ. LSU OUT TIMING

using the cursor up/down keys
Select LSU DUP using


No

the value using the cursor right
key.
Yes
Press the stop/clear key
to exit maintenance mode.

center line by 0.1 mm.
Initial setting: 0
End
1-4-7
3BN/3A4
2-1-1 Feedshift section

The feedshift section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-1. It switches the path for the paper conveyed from
the copier in sort and duplex modes.
6
2
3
5
7
Figure 2-1-1
5 Stopper
6 Feedshift claw
7 Paper conveying switch (PCSW)
PCM
PCSW
CN4-10
SBSOL
PUSOL
CN4-6, 8
CN4-2, 4
FSSOL
CN4-7
Feedshift pulley
Feedshift roller
Press roller
Press roller lift
CN6-7
CN6-12
1
2
3
4
Feedshift section
MPCB
Figure 2-1-2
Feedshift section block diagram
2-1-1
3BN/3A4
(1) Paper conveying operation in sort mode
When a copy is made in the sort mode, the feedshift solenoid (FSSOL) turns on and the feedshift guide of the copier
operates to switch the paper path to the feedshift section. The switchback solenoid (SBSOL) then turns on to lower the
separation claw and the paper is conveyed to the intermediate tray by the feedshift roller. When the trailing edge registration
cursor of the intermediate tray shifts the paper stocked in the intermediate tray to the stopper, the pickup solenoid (PUSOL)
turns on to lift the press roller and release the stopper, and the switchback solenoid (SBSOL) turns off to lift the feedshift
claw. The stack of paper on the intermediate tray is then ejected to the eject tray by the feedshift roller.
Feedshift claw
(SBSOL: ON)
Feedshift pulley
To intermediate tray
Feedshift roller
Stocked paper
Press roller
Stopper (PUSOL: OFF)

Feedshift guide
(FSSOL: ON)
Feedshift claw
(SBSOL: OFF)
Feedshift pulley
Feedshift roller
Press roller
Stopper (PUSOL: ON)
Figure 2-1-3
2-1-2
3BN/3A4
(2) Switchback operation in duplex mode
In duplex mode, when the rear face of the paper is copied, the paper is conveyed to the feedshift section in the same
manner as in sort mode. When the trailing edge of the paper passes the paper conveying switch (PCSW), the paper
conveying motor (PCM) reverses, rotating the feedshift roller in the reverse direction to switch back the paper into the
duplex unit.
Feedshift roller
(PCM: Fwd. rotation)
PCSW: ON
Feedshift roller
(PCM: Rev. rotation)
PCSW: OFF
Figure 2-1-4
2-1-3
3BN/3A4
2-1-2 Intermediate tray section

The intermediate tray section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-5. It stores and evens up the paper conveyed
from the feedshift section and returns the stack of paper to the feedshift section.
3
4
Intermediate tray section
1 Intermediate tray
2 Front side registration cursor
3 Rear side registration cursor

4 Trailing edge registration cursor
TERHPS
TERM
CN4-26
RSRM
CN4-14
FSRM
CN5-6
CN5-10
SRRHPS
CN5-1
CN5-5
CN4-12
SRFHPS
CN6-1
CN6-4
Figure 2-1-5
MPCB
Figure 2-1-6
2-1-4
Intermediate tray section block diagram
3BN/3A4
(1) Paper registration on the intermediate tray
In sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors move to the size of the paper used to even up the sides of the stack
of paper and the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the paper to the feedshift section.
In staple-sort mode, the front and rear side registration cursors even up the sides of the stack of paper and shift the stack
toward the machine front, and then the trailing edge registration cursor shifts the stack to the stapling position.
Home positions
Trailing edge registration cursor
Rear side registration cursor
Front side
registration cursor
Paper registration
Shifting the paper to

the stapling position
Figure 2-1-7
2-1-5
3BN/3A4
2-1-3 Eject section

The eject section consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-8. It ejects paper to the eject tray.
2
1
3
4
Figure 2-1-8
1 Eject tray
2 Eject pulley
2-1-6
Eject section
3 Eject roller
4 Lower eject guide
3BN/3A4
2-1-4 Stapler section

In staple-sort mode, paper stocked on the intermediate tray is stapled by the stapler.
The stapler motor (STM) drives the stapler cam via the stapler drive gear to staple paper.
Stapler drive gear
Stapler motor
Stapler self-priming
sensor
Stapler cam
Figure 2-1-9
STES
Stapler cam
Stapler section
STCS
CN4-20
CN4-22
STHPS
CN4-16
STM
STSPS
CN6-13
CN6-16
CN4-24
MPCB
Figure 2-1-10
Stapler section block diagram
2-1-7
3BN/3A4
2-1-5 Duplex unit

The duplex unit consists of the components shown in Figure 2-1-11. In duplex mode, it refeeds paper switched back in the
feedshift section to the copier paper feed section.
1
2
4
5
8
4
6

1
2
3
4

Upper duplex roller
Lower duplex roller
Duplex pulley
5
6
7
8
Open/close guide
Entry guide
DUPPCSW1
CN5-10
DUPFSSOL
CN5-3, 4
DUPPCSW2
CN5-7
MPCB
(copier)
Figure 2-1-12
2-1-8
Duplex unit block diagram
3BN/3A4
(1) Switching the paper path in the duplex unit
In duplex mode, when the reverse face of the paper is copied, the paper is switched back in the feedshift section and
conveyed to the duplex unit. The paper is then conveyed to the paper conveying section of the copier by the upper and
lower duplex rollers.
When ejecting paper to the eject tray, the duplex feedshift solenoid (DUPFSSOL) turns on to operate the duplex feedshift
guide to switch the paper path to the eject tray.
Eject tray
Figure 2-1-13
2-1-9
3BN/3A4

(1) Finisher

3
Machine front
Machine inside
Figure 2-2-1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Machine rear
Feedshift section
Left cover switch (LCSW) ............................ Detects if the copier left cover is opened or closed.
Paper conveying switch (PCSW) ................. Detects a paper jam in the finisher.
Paper conveying motor (PCM) .................... Drives the feedshift section.
Switchback solenoid (SBSOL) ..................... Operates the feedshift claw.
Pickup solenoid (PUSOL) ............................ Operates the press roller.
2-2-1
3BN/3A4

,,,

,
,

6
4
8
Machine front
Figure 2-2-2
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Machine inside
Machine rear
Intermediate tray section
Main PCB (MPCB) ....................................... Controls electrical components.

Tray open/close switch (TOCSW) ................ Detects if the intermediate tray is opened or closed.
Intermediate tray sensor (ITS) ..................... Detects the presence of paper on the intermediate tray.
Side registration front home position
sensor (SRFHPS) ........................................ Detects the front side registration cursor in the home position.
Side registration rear home position
sensor (SRRHPS) ........................................ Detects the rear side registration cursor in the home position.
Trailing edge registration home position
sensor (TERHPS) ........................................ Detects the trailing edge registration cursor in the home position.
Front side registration motor (FSRM) .......... Drives the front side registration cursor.
Rear side registration motor (RSRM) .......... Drives the rear side registration cursor.
Trailing edge registration motor (TERM) ...... Drives the trailing edge registration cursor.
2-2-2
3BN/3A4
,
,

,,

,

,
1
Machine front
Machine inside
Figure 2-2-3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Machine rear
Stapler section
Stapler empty sensor (STES) ...................... Detects the presence of staples.

Staple cartridge sensor (STCS) ................... Detects the presence of the staple cartridge.
Stapler home position sensor (STHPS) ....... Detects the stapler in the home position.
Stapler self-priming sensor (STSPS) ........... Detects the pre-stapling state of the stapler.
Stapler motor (STM) .................................... Drives the stapler.
2-2-3
3BN/3A4
(2) Duplex unit
,
,
,
2
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
1. Duplex feedshift solenoid (DUPFSSOL) ...... Operates the duplex feedshift guide.
2-2-4
3BN/3A4
2-3-1 Main PCB

Paper conveying
motor,
feedshift solenoid,
switchback
solenoid
Solenoids
Main PCB
Driver drive
circuit
Motors
CPU (IC5)
Switches
and
sensors
RXD
TXD
Buffer IC12,
IC13, IC14
Copier
Figure 2-3-1 Main PCB block diagram

The main PCB (MPCB) consists mainly of the CPU IC5 and driver drive circuit.
The CPU IC5 detects the condition of the switches and sensors and controls the motors and solenoids by serially
communicating with the copier. The paper conveying motor (PCM), switchback solenoid (SBSOL) and feedshift solenoid
(FSSOL) operate with the control signals from the copier.
2-3-1
3BN/3A4
CN8
10
1
IC13
9
TR1
IC14
1
8
8
TP5
IC18
IC17
D4
IC19
1
D3
TR5
TR6
Figure 2-3-2
IC16
TR2
CN7
2 TR4
TR3
CN1
C13
JP2
TP4
F1
CN2
1
2
8
CN3
2-3-2
16
15
IC12
L3
CN4
C12
IC15
1
ZD1 D2
1 IC10
C10
18
R9
IC11
D1
9
C9
R6
10
1 IC9
11
R5
12
C11
L2
L1
TP3
IC7
18
R8
31
32
31
30
IC6
1
R7
TP1
TP2
100 1
C8
IC8 16
5
C7
Main PCB silk-screen diagram
IC20
IC3
C6
C5
C14
12
IC4
C1
81
R4
R2
X1
JP1
R1
IC2
51 1
50
R3
CN6
2
1
80 IC5
18
C2
C3
C4
CN5
IC1
1
3BN/3A4
Terminals (CN)
1-2
1-7
1-3
1-9
1-4
1-7
1-5
1-7
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-7
2-1
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-7
2-11
2-9
2-12
2-10
3-1
3-4
3-2
3-4
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-4
3-6
3-4
3-7
3-4
3-8
3-4
3-9
3-4
4-1
4-29
4-2
4-29
4-3
4-29
4-4
4-29
4-5
4-29
4-6
4-29
4-7
4-29
4-8
4-29
4-9
4-29
4-10
4-29
4-11
4-23
4-12
4-23
4-13
4-25
4-14
4-25
4-15
4-27
4-16
4-27
4-17
4-21
4-18
4-21
4-19
4-28
4-20
4-27
4-22
4-27
4-24
4-27
4-26
4-28
5-1
3-4
5-2
3-4
5-3
3-4
5-4
3-4
5-5
3-4
5-6
3-4
5-7
3-4
5-8
3-4
5-9
3-4
5-10
3-4
6-1
3-4
6-2
3-4
6-3
3-4
Voltage
0/5 V DC
5/0 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC (pulse)
0/5 V DC (pulse)
5 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/5 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
PCM control signal (MODE), input
TOCSW on/off, output
PCM on/off, input
PCM control signal CWB, input
PCM clock signal, input
RESET signal, input
Serial signal TXD, input
Serial signal RXD, output
SBSOL release signal, input
SBSOL latch-on signal, input
24 V DC supply for SBSOL, input
PCSW on/off, output
5 V DC supply for PCSW, input
FSSOL release signal, input
FSSOL latch-on signal, input
24 V DC supply for FSSOL, input
24 V DC supply for FSSOL, output
FSSOL latch-on signal, output
24 V DC supply for SBSOL, output
FSSOL release signal, output
24 V DC supply for PUSOL, output
SBSOL latch-on signal, output
PUSOL on/off, output
SBSOL release signal, output
5 V DC supply for PCSW, output
PCSW on/off, input
5 V DC supply for SRFHPS, output
SRFHPS on/off, input
5 V DC supply for SRRHPS, output
SRRHPS on/off, input
5 V DC supply for stapler, output
STHPS on/off, input
5 V DC supply for ITS, output
ITS on/off, input
5 V DC supply for TERHPS, output
STCS on/off, input
STES on/off, input
STSPS on/off, input
TERHPS on/off, input
FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
24 V DC supply for FSRM, output
FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
FSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
24 V DC supply for RSRM, output
RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
RSRM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
2-3-3
3BN/3A4
Terminals (CN)
6-4
3-4
6-5
3-4
6-7
3-4
6-8
3-4
6-9
3-4
6-10
3-4
6-11
3-4
6-12
3-4
6-13
3-4
6-14
3-4
6-15
3-4
6-16
3-4
7-3
3-4
7-6
3-4
7-7
3-4
7-8
3-4
2-3-4
Voltage
0/24 V DC (pulse)
24 V DC
24 V DC
24 V DC
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC (pulse)
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
0/24 V DC
24/0 V DC
24/0 V DC
24 V DC
24/0 V DC
Remarks
TERM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
24 V DC supply for TERM, output
24 V DC supply for PCM, output
24 V DC supply for PCM, output
PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (A)
PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
PCM motor coil energization pulse, output (B)
STM forward rotation drive signal (F), output
STM forward rotation drive signal (F), output
STM reverse rotation drive signal (R), output
STM reverse rotation drive signal (R), output
TOCSW on/off, input
LCSW on/off, output
24 V DC supply for LCSW, output
LCSW on/off, input
CN5-1, 2, 3, 5
CN5-6, 8, 9, 10
CN6-9, 10, 11, 12
PCM
P1
81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
367
438
521
398
510
No. of
pulses
P2
Pulse
P2
Paper sizes
81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
0
71
154
31
143
No. of
pulses
Paper entry
P3
Pulse
T1
300 ms
Standby for paper entry
A3, A4
B4, B5
A4R
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
P3
P1
Positioning for side registration
Initialization start
A3, A4
B4, B5
A4R
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
Paper sizes
CN4-10
PCSW
Pulse
CN6-1, 2, 3, 4
TERM
TERHPS CN4-26
RSRM
SRRHPS CN4-14
FSRM
SRFHPS CN4-12
1 Operation start
Timing chart No. 1
81/2" 11"
11" 81/2"
A3
B4
A4R
A4
B5
11" 17"
81/2" 14"
Paper sizes
55 P
35 P
42
240
476
784
883
0
269
539
763
T1
Timer
1000 mm/s
No. of
pulses
100 ms
100 ms
Other sizes
A3, 11" 17"
B4, A4R, 81/2" 11", 81/2" 14"
A4, B5, 11" 81/2"
Paper sizes
T1
300 ms
850 ms
950 ms
1050 ms
550 ms
Timer
value
Finisher operation sequence

Simplex copying
Sort mode: 1 3 or 4 5 or 6
Staple-sort mode: 1 2 5 or 6
Duplex copying
Sort mode: 1 3 or 4 7 or 8
Staple-sort mode: 1 2 7 or 8
Sort end
3BN/3A4
2-4-1
2-4-2
CN5-1,
2, 3, 5
P5
Pulse
P4
Pulse
11" 17", 11" 81/2"

81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
A3, A4
B4, B5
A4R
594
Rear-shift ejection
Paper sizes
No. of pulses
A3, A4
380
B4, B5
521
A4R
604
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
411
P6
No. of
pulses
53
A3, A4
18
B4, B5
18
A4R
53
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
18
Paper sizes
292
415
498
323
488 81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
Front-shift ejection
Paper sizes
No. of pulses
No. of
pulses
367
A3, A4
438
B4, B5
521
A4R
398
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
510
Paper sizes
CN4-16
STHPS
Pulse
CN6-13,
14, 15, 16
CN6-1,
2, 3, 4
STM
CN5-6,
8, 9, 10
TERM
300 ms
RSRM
CN6-1,
2, 3, 4
P5
SRRHPS CN4-14
P7
Pulse
P6
150 ms
Paper sizes
CN5-6,
8, 9, 10
No. of
pulses
18
A3, A4
88
B4, B5
88
A4R
18
11" 17", 11" 81/2"
88
81/2" 14", 81/2" 11"
TERM
CN6-1,
2, 3, 4
TERHPS CN4-26
RSRM
SRRHPS CN4-14
CN5-1,
2, 3, 5
FSRM
CN5-1,
2, 3, 5
FSRM
P7
P7
150 ms
Moving to
shift-eject
position
Sort end
To batch
ejection
4 Non-stapling operation (for rear-shift ejection)
SRFHPS CN4-12
P6
To batch
ejection
SRFHPS CN4-12
Moving to
shift-eject
position
Sort end
3 Non-stapling operation (for front-shift ejection)
TERM
P4
P5
Moving to
shift-eject
position
To batch
ejection
TERHPS CN4-26
CN5-6,
8, 9, 10
150 ms
P4
Moving to stapling position

Stapling
Sort end
TERHPS CN4-26
RSRM
SRRHPS CN4-14
FSRM
SRFHPS CN4-12
2 Stapling operation
Timing chart No. 2
3BN/3A4
Large paper: others
500 ms
300 mm/s
200 mm/s
2s
CN4-7
PUSOL
100 mm/s
CN6-9,
10, 11, 12
PCM
100 mm/s
CN4-10
PCSW
PUSOL
PCM
PCSW
TERM
CN6-1,
2, 3, 4
TERM
CN4-7
CN6-9,
10, 11, 12
CN4-10
CN6-1,
2, 3, 4
TERHPS CN4-26
TERHPS CN4-26
CN5-6,
8, 9, 10
RSRM
RSRM
CN5-6,
8, 9, 10
SRRHPS CN4-14
SRRHPS CN4-14
CN5-1,
2, 3, 5
FSRM
FSRM
CN5-1,
2, 3, 5
SRFHPS CN4-12
300 mm/s
100 mm/s
500 ms
330 ms
Batch ejection start
200 mm/s
6 Batch ejection 2 (simplex copying onto small paper)
SRFHPS CN4-12
5 Batch ejection 1 (simplex copying onto large paper)
Small paper: A4, B5, 11" 81/2"
Timing chart No. 3
100 mm/s
2s
3BN/3A4
2-4-3
2-4-4
CN5-1, 2,
3, 5
CN4-14
CN5-6, 8,
9, 10
CN4-26
CN6-1, 2,
3, 4
CN4-10
FSRM
SRRHPS
RSRM
TERHPS
TERM
PCSW
CN6-9, 10,
11, 12
CN4-7
PCM
PUSOL
DUPPCSW1 CN5-10
CN4-12
SRFHPS
100 mm/s
500 ms
300 mm/s
7 Batch ejection 3 (duplex copying onto large paper)
Small paper: A4, B5, 11" 81/2" Large paper: others
Timing chart No. 4
100 mm/s
200 mm/s
2s
CN4-10
CN6-1, 2,
3, 4
CN4-26
CN5-6, 8,
9, 10
CN4-14
CN5-1, 2,
3, 5
CN4-12
CN6-9, 10,
11, 12
CN4-7
PCM
PUSOL
DUPPCSW1 CN5-10
PCSW
TERM
TERHPS
RSRM
SRRHPS
FSRM
SRFHPS
100 mm/s
500 ms
300 mm/s
330 ms
200 mm/s
8 Batch ejection 4 (duplex copying onto small paper)
100 mm/s
2s
3BN/3A4
3BN/3A4

Finisher
Section
Stapler section
Maintenance
part/location
Magnet
Method
Clean
Maintenance cycle
Every service
Points and cautions
Page
Remove the staples attracted to

the magnet inside the stapler
cover.
1-4-3
Points and cautions
Page
Duplex unit
Section
Paper
conveying
section
Maintenance
part/location
Method
Maintenance cycle
Upper duplex roller
Clean
Every service
Lower duplex roller
Clean
Every service
2-4-5
PG
5V
SG
PCM CLOCK
PCM CWB
PCM
TOCSW
PCM MODE
SET
24V
24V
PG
PG
5V
SG
RXD
SG
TXD
SG
SET
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
SET
N.C
FSSOL 24V
FSSOL A
FSSOL R
PCSW 5V
PCSW
SG
SBSOL 24V
SBSOL A
SBSOL R
C103
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
C102
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
C101
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Wire color Symbol

Yellow
YW
Blue
BE
Red
RD
Orange
OE
Gray
GY
GY C003-11
GY C003-10
GY C003-9
GY C003-8
GY C003-7
GY C003-6
GY C003-5
GY C003-4
GY C003-3
GY C003-2
GY C003-1
GY C002-12
GY C002-11
GY C002-10
GY C002-9
GY C002-8
GY C002-7
GY C002-6
GY C002-5
GY C002-4
GY C002-3
GY C002-2
GY C002-1
GY C001-9
GY C001-8
GY C001-7
GY C001-6
GY C001-5
GY C001-4
GY C001-3
GY C001-2
GY C001-1
GY C103-11
GY C103-10
GY C103-9
GY C103-8
GY C103-7
GY C103-6
GY C103-5
GY C103-4
GY C103-3
GY C103-2
GY C103-1
GY C102-12
GY C102-11
GY C102-10
GY C102-9
GY C102-8
GY C102-7
GY C102-6
GY C102-5
GY C102-4
GY C102-3
GY C102-2
GY C102-1
GY C101-10
GY C101-9
GY C101-8
GY C101-7
GY C101-6
GY C101-5
GY C101-4
GY C101-3
GY C101-2
SET
PCM MODE
TOCSW
PCM
PCM CWB
PCM CLOCK
SG
5V
PG
RESET
SET
SG
TXD
SG
RXD
SG
5V
PG
PG
24V
24V
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MPCB
SBSOL R
SBSOL A
SBSOL 24V
PCSW SG
PCSW
PCSW 5V
FSSOL R
FSSOL A
FSSOL 24V
N.C
SET
CN-3: C003
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
CN-2: C002
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
CN-1: C001
TOCSW
N.C
N.C
TOCSW 24V
LCSW 24V
LCSW
CN-7: C007
FSRM A
24V
FSRM B
FSRM B
FSRM A
RSRM A
24V
RSRM B
RSRM B
RSRM A
CN-5: C005
TERM A
TERM B
TERM B
TERM A
24V
N.C
24V
24V
PCM A
PCM A
PCM B
PCM B
STM F
STM F
STM R
STM R
CN-6: C006
FSSOL 24V
FSSOL A
SBSOL 24V
FSSOL R
PUSOL 24V
SBSOL A
PUSOL
SBSOL R
PCSW 5V
PCSW
SRFHPS 5V
SRFHPS
SRRHPS 5V
SRRHPS
ST 5V
STHPS
ITS 5V
ITS
TERHPS 5V
STCS
ITS SG
STES
SRFHPS SG
STSPS
SRRHPS SG
TERHPS
ST SG
TERHPS SG
PCSW SG
N.C
CN-4: C004
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
RD C105-3
RD C104-31
RD C104-32
RD
RD
RD C105-1
GY C108-1
RD C108-2
GY C108-3
GY C108-4
GY C108-5
GY C106-1
RD C106-2
GY C106-3
GY C106-4
GY C106-5
RD C104-9
RD C104-10
GY C104-11
GY C104-12
GY C104-13
GY C104-14
RD C104-15
RD C104-16
BE C104-17
BE C104-18
GY C111-1
GY C111-3
GY C111-4
GY C111-5
RD C111-2
RD C104-1
GY C104-2
RD C104-4
GY C104-3
RD C104-7
GY C104-5
GY C104-8
GY C104-6
OE C104-19
YW C104-20
OE C109-3
YW C109-2
OE C107-3
YW C107-2
OE C104-22
YW C104-23
OE C110-1
YW C110-2
OE C112-1
YW C104-24
BE C110-3
YW C104-25
BE C109-1
YW C104-26
BE C107-1
YW C112-2
BE C104-27
BE C112-3
BE C104-21
TOCSW
C104
RD C007-7
RD C007-8
RD C004-1
GY C004-2
GY C004-4
RD C004-3
GY C004-6
GY C004-8
RD C004-5
GY C004-7
RD C006-7
RD C006-8
GY C006-9
GY C006-10
GY C006-11
GY C006-12
RD C006-13
RD C006-14
BE C006-15
BE C006-16
OE C004-9
YW C004-10
BE C004-29
OE C004-15
YW C004-16
YW C004-20
YW C004-22
YW C004-24
BE C004-27
C201
TERM
RD C205-3
RD C205-1
RD C207-1
GY C207-2
GY C207-3
RD C208-1
GY C208-2
GY C208-3
RD C203-1
GY C203-3
RD C202-2
RD C202-5
GY C202-4
GY C202-6
GY C202-3
GY C202-1
RD C206-4
RD C206-5
BE C206-1
BE C206-2
OE C204-1
YW C204-2
BE C204-3
OE C206-12
YW C206-9
YW C206-7
YW C206-8
YW C206-13
BE C206-11
SBSOL
PCM
3 SBSOL R
2 SBSOL A
1 R24V
C111
C106
RSRM
FSSOL
FSRM
3 FSSOL R
2 FSSOL A
1 R24V
C105
RD C007-6
3 1 TOCSW 24V
2 2
1 3 TOCSW
RD C007-3
TERM A
R24V
TERM B
TERM B
TERM A
1
2
3
4
5
GY C006-1
RD C006-5
GY C006-2
GY C006-3
GY C006-4
C208
GY C201-5
GY C201-6
RD C201-3
C202
C207
PCM B
R24V
PCM B
PCM A
R24V
PCM A
1
2
3
4
5
6
STM R
STM R
PUSOL
BE C201-18
BE C201-17
RD C201-7
GY C201-4
GY C201-1
RD C201-2
C108
STM F
STM F
RD C201-16
RD C201-15
Stapler
PCSW
LCSW
SRFHPS
SRRHPS
TERHPS
3 PUSOL
2
1 R24V
RD C201-8
C112
GY C201-13
RD C201-10
GY C201-14
GY C201-12
RD C201-9
GY C201-11
RSRM A
R24V
RSRM B
RSRM B
RSRM A
1
2
3
4
5
GY C005-6
RD C005-7
GY C005-8
GY C005-9
GY C005-10
C107
C206
GY C005-1
RD C005-2
GY C005-3
GY C005-4
GY C005-5
STCS
STHPS
STHPS
YW C201-23
YW C201-26
YW C201-24
C204 C301 C302

3 SG
2 TERHPS
1 5V
C109
C203
FSRM A
R24V
FSRM B
FSRM B
FSRM A
SG
5V
STSPS
BE C201-28
OE C201-21
YW C201-25
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
BE C004-28
YW C004-26
OE C004-19
C110
3 SG
2 PCSW
1 5V
BE C201-22
3 1
YW C201-19
2 2
OE C201-20
1 3
3 1 5V
2 2 SRRHPS
1 3 SG
OE C004-13
YW C004-14
BE C004-25
1
2
3
4
5
C205
RD C201-32
3 1 LCSW 24V
2 2
1 3 LCSW
RD C201-31
3 1 5V
2 2 SRFHPS
1 3 SG
OE C004-11
YW C004-12
BE C004-23
ITS
3 SG
2 ITS
1 5V
2-4-6
J
BE C004-21
YW C004-18
OE C004-17
Wiring diagram
3BN/3A4
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fax System (B)
3B1
CONTENTS
1-1 Specifications
1-1-1 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions ...........................................................................................................
(1) Copier ...........................................................................................................................................
(2) Operation panel ............................................................................................................................
1-1-3 Machanical construction .......................................................................................................................
1-1-1
1-1-2
1-1-4
1-1-5
1-1-8
1-2 Installation
1-2-1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................................
1-2-2 Setting and registering data .................................................................................................................
(1) Settings .........................................................................................................................................
(2) Registration ...................................................................................................................................
1-2-3 Installing the optional add-on memory .................................................................................................
1-2-4 Installing the handset (optional for 120 V specifications only) .............................................................
1-2-1
1-2-2
1-2-2
1-2-4
1-2-5
1-2-6
1-3 Maintenance Mode

1-3-1 Maintenance mode ............................................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(1) Maintenance mode item list .......................................................................................................... 1-3-1
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items .......................................................................................... 1-3-4
1-4 Error Code

1-4-1 Error codes ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(1) Error code ..................................................................................................................................... 1-4-1
(2) Table of general classification ....................................................................................................... 1-4-2
(2-1) U004XX error code table ...................................................................................................... 1-4-4
(2-7) U017XX error code table .................................................................................................... 1-4-10
1-5 Self Diagnosis

1-5-1 Self-diagnosis ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5-1
(1) Self diagnostic codes .................................................................................................................... 1-5-1
1-6 Requirements on PCB Replacement

1-6-1 Updating the firmware ........................................................................................................................... 1-6-1
(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB .............................................................................. 1-6-1


2-2-1
2-2-2
2-2-3
2-2-4
Fax control PCB ................................................................................................................................... 2-2-1

NCU PCB ............................................................................................................................................. 2-2-5
Fax operation unit PCB ........................................................................................................................ 2-2-9
Auxiliary power source PCB ............................................................................................................... 2-2-11
1-1-1
3B1
Line requirements .......................... Subscription telephone line

Compatibility ................................... G3
Transmission .................................. Half-duplex system
Modulation ..................................... TCM, QAM and RhM
Modem speed ................................ 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/
4800/2400 (bps)
Encoding ........................................ MMR, MR, MH
Error correction .............................. ECM
Scanning line density ..................... Main auxiliary
Normal (8 dots/mm 3.85 lines/mm)
Fine (8 dots/mm 7.7 lines/mm)
Super fine (8 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm)
Ultra fine (16 dots/mm 15.4 lines/mm)
Document width ............................. 148 to 297 mm
Document length ............................ 148 to 1600 mm
Recording resolution ...................... 600 600 dpi
Minimum transmission time ............ 10 ms/line in normal mode, 5 ms/line in fine mode
Transmission time .......................... Within 4 s (33600 bps, memory transmission, ECM, ITU-T#1 chart, no TTI)
Image memory capacity ................. 4 MB (supplied as standard)
Bitmap memory capacity ................ 4 MB (supplied as standard)
Image modes ................................. Normal, fine, super fine, ultra fine*1 and half-tone modes
Gray scale ...................................... 256 levels
Options ........................................... Add-on memory (8 MB), handset*2
Functions ........................................ See pages 1-1-2 and 3.
*1: Available only when an add-on memory is installed.
1-1-1
3B1
Reception functions
Manual reception
Automatic reception
Fax/telephone auto selection
TAD reception
D.R.D. reception*1
Remote switching
Transmission functions
Abbreviated dialing (up to 100 numbers can be stored)

One-touch dialing*2
Program dialing*2
Group dialing*2
Chain dialing*2
Redialing (manual/automatic)
Dial confirmation
Communication functions
Direct feed transmission

Memory transmission
Direct reception
Memory reception (F-coded confidential reception and relay broadcast
reception)
Additional communication functions
Broadcast transmission (up to 132 numbers)

Polling communication
Encrypted communication (no compatibility with models before the
facsimile kit for 23/31 cpm copier)
Password check communication
Memory fax forwarding
Reserved transmission
Timer transmission
Interrupt transmission
Short protocol
ECM
F-coded transmission
F-coded confidential reception
F-coded bulletin board communication
F-coded relay broadcast
Supplementary communication functions Printing out from F-coded confidential box

Manual transmission
Telephone directory
Transmission destination display
Tone transmission
Memory back-up (60 min.*3)
Entry into F-coded bulletin board
Entry into F-coded confidential box
Communication result display
Supplementary transmission functions
Batch transmission
TTI transmission
Bulletin board
Rotation transmission
Duplex transmission*4
Initial communication speed setting
Supplementary reception functions
Memory reception
2-in-1 reception
Rotation reception
Duplex reception*5
Recording paper setting (auto selection, fixed size or fixed cassette)
During-reception copying
Reception date and time recording
1-1-2
3B1
Reports
Activity report
Transmission report
Reception report
Power failure report
Delayed communication report
Confirmation report
User settings list
Encryption key list
Management report
Department list
Abbreviated dial list
One-touch key list
Telephone directory list
Program dial list
Group dial list
Others
Memory editing
Remote diagnosis
Department control for faxes
*1: For 120 V specifications only.

*2: To be registered under one-touch keys. Up to 32 one-touch keys can be used for one-touch dialing, program dialing,
group dialing and chain dialing.
*3: When an optional add-on memory is installed.
*4: Available only when SRDF is installed.
*5: Available only when a duplex unit is installed.
1-1-3
3B1
1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

(1) Copier
2
1
3
5
Figure 1-1-1
1 Operation panel ............ Use the operation panel to operate the

machine.
2 Cover plate .................... Flipping up the cover plate will change the
number assigned to each one-touch key.
3 Telephone jack .............. Use the telephone jack to connect a
telephone or optional handset*.
4 Line jack ........................ Use the line jack to connect a modular
connector cable from the telephone line.
5 Main switch ................... Turn the main switch on when performing
copy or fax operations.
*120 V specifications only.
1-1-4
3B1
(2) Operation panel
Inch
(Left portion)
@ 0
4 ! $%
7 8# & 9 )
^* (

(Right portion, with

cover plate raised)
Metric
2
(Left portion)
@ 0
4 ! $%
78# & 9 )
^* (

(Right portion, with

cover plate raised)

Figure 1-1-2
1-1-5
3B1
1 Message display ....................... The message display shows the date, time, operation procedures and operational
errors.
2 Cursor keys ............................... Press the cursor keys to select a function or item while making settings.
3 Enter key ................................... Press the enter key to proceed to the next item or to store the data registered or set
for each function.
4 Interrupt key (indicator) ............. Press the interrupt key to make copies while receiving faxes. When the machine
enters the interrupt copy mode, the indicator lights.
5 Numeric keys ............................ Use the numeric keys to enter a destination fax number. Numeric characters can be
transmitted as tone signals even if a pulse line is used. Press the key after
connecting to the destination number: numeric characters pressed from then on will
be transmitted as tone signals.
6 Reset key .................................. Press the reset key to cancel an operation or return to the initial mode.
7 Stop/clear key ........................... Press the stop/clear key to return to the previous step in order to correct the entered
data.
8 Start key .................................... Press the start key to start fax communication.
9 COPY/FAX switching key/
COPY & FAX indicators ............ Press the COPY/FAX switching key to switch between the copy operation and fax
operation modes. When the copy indicator is lit, the machine is in the copy operation
mode; when the fax indicator is lit, the machine is in the fax operation mode.
0 Communication
error indicator ............................ The communication error indicator lights when a communication error occurs.
! Communicating indicator .......... The communicating indicator lights during communication.
@ Document in memory
indicator .................................... The document in memory indicator lights when data is saved in the memory to be
printed or to be transmitted at a programmed time.
# Memory Tx. indicator ................. The memory Tx. indicator lights when the machine is in the memory transmission
mode.
$ Memory Tx. key ........................ Press the memory Tx. key to switch between the memory transmission and direct
feed transmission modes.
% On-hook key .............................. Press the on-hook key to make a call without lifting the telephone receiver.
^ On-hook indicator ...................... The on-hook indicator lights when the machine is in the on-hook mode.
& TAD indicator ............................ The TAD indicator lights when the machine is in the TAD reception mode.
* Auto Rx. indicator*1 ......................... The auto Rx. indicator lights when the machine is in the automatic reception mode.
Manual Rx. indicator*2 ................... The manual Rx. indicator lights when the machine is in the manual reception mode.
( Pause/redial key ........................ Press the pause/redial key in the direct feed transmission mode to redial the most
recently dialed number. Also, press the pause/redial key while entering a destination
number to insert a few seconds of pause in-between numbers.
) Abbr./directory key ..................... Press the abbr./directory key when using the abbreviated dialing function or directory
function.
One-touch keys (1 to 32) ........... Use the one-touch keys when transmitting documents by one-touch dialing or when
entering characters. Fax (telephone) numbers for group dialing, chain dialing and
program dialing can also be registered under the one-touch keys. When the cover
plate is closed, these keys are used as one-touch keys 1 to 20; when the cover plate
is open, these keys are used as one-touch keys 21 to 32.
Resolution select key ................ Press the resolution select key to select the image quality of the transmitting
document.
Resolution indicators ................. The resolution indicators are, from the top down, the fine indicator, super fine
indicator, ultra fine indicator and half-tone indicator. Select a resolution mode and
thereby light an indicator by pressing the resolution select key. When all the
indicators are turned off, the normal mode is selected.
Contrast select keys .................. Press the contrast select keys to adjust the scanning density.
Contrast indicators .................... The contrast indicators light when the contrast select key is pressed to adjust the
scanning density. Usually, the middle indicator will be lit.
Machine Error indicator ............. When the machine error indicator is lit, a paper jam or a mechanical error has
occurred.
Configure key ............................ Press the confuigure key to configure settings related to facsimile use.
Register key .............................. Press the register key to register information related to facsimile use.
1-1-6
3B1
TAD/Auto Rx. key*1 ......................... Press the TAD/auto Rx. key to change the reception mode. When the TAD indicator
is lit, the fax is in the TAD reception mode. When the auto Rx. indicator is lit, the fax
is in the auto fax reception mode. When both indicators are turned off, the fax is in
the manual fax reception mode.
TAD/manual Rx. key*2 ................... Press the TAD/manual Rx. key to change the reception mode. When the TAD
indicator is lit, the fax is in the TAD reception mode. When the manual Rx. indicator is
lit, the fax is in the manual fax reception mode. When both indicators are turned off,
the fax is in the auto fax reception mode.
Duplex Tx. key .......................... Press the duplex Tx. key to transmit double-sided documents.
Broadcast key ........................... Press the broadcast key to start broadcast transmission.
Print reports key ........................ Press the print reports key to output reports and lists.
Information key .......................... Press the information key to check transmission and reception results. The last 10
communication results can be checked on the message display. Also press this key
to cancel or change the details of programmed transmission that are stored in the
memory.
Polling key ................................. Press the polling key to start polling communication.
Confidential key ......................... Press the confidential key to enter documents into an F-code confidential box or print
out documents from an F-code confidential box or an encryption box.
Delayed Tx. key ........................ Press the delayed Tx. key to perform timer transmission.
F-code key ................................ Press the F-code key to start F-code based communication.
Alternate display key ................. Pressing the alternate display key in the dual access mode enables monitoring of
background operation. The screen on the message display switches to that for
background operation while the alternate display key is held down.
*1 : For 120 V specifications.
*2 : For 220-240 V specifications.
1-1-7
3B1
1-1-3 Mechanical construction
TB3
TB5
LIVE(OUT)
LIVE
(IN)
TB4
PSPCB
RELAY OUT
TB2
Add-on memory
(option)
CN4
CN19
FCPCB
CN1
TEL/Handset
(option*)
6-1
1 2 BATT
G(3.3V)
6-2
2 1
CN3
BUBAT
LINE
1 1 SPEAKER 7-1
2 2 A.GND 7-2
NCUPCB
12V 1-3
GND 1-2
8-6
8-5
8-3
8-1
8-7
8-8
8-9
SP
1-1
FOPCB
OPCB
APSPCB
5.2V 1-5
GND 1-4
24V
RELAY IN
TB1
NEUTRAL IN
TB3
RELAY REM
MPCB
3-5
3-4
MSW REM
MSW
*Optional for 120 V specifications only.
Figure 1-1-3
The fax system consists of the fax control PCB (FCPCB), NCU PCB (NCUPCB), auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB),
fax operation unit PCB (FOPCB), speaker (SP), backup battery (BUBAT) and optional add-on memory.
1-1-8
3B1
1-2-1 Unpacking
*()
&
1
#
9
@
9
3
Figure 1-2-1
1 NCU PCB assembly
2 Antistatic air-padded bags
3 Fax operation unit
4 Fax control PCB assembly
5 Antistatic air-padded bag
6 Auxiliary power source PCB
7 Speaker unit
8 Lower fax retainer
9 Plastic bags
0 Fax cable
! NCU cable
@ Instruction handbook*1
# Installation manual
$ One-touch key sticker
% Fax shield cover
^ Plastic bag
& Modular connector cover
* Modular jack cover
( Bronze binding screw BVM3 05
) TP screw M3 05
Spacers
Fax unit label sheet
FCC68 label*2
FCC68C label*2
IC line label*2
Language indication label*3
Modular connector cable B*2
Core 7-15 18*3
Core 27-31 12*3
Board supports
Plastic bag
Outer case
Right pad
Left pad
Front pad
Rear pad
Upper spacer
Lower spacer
Barcode labels
*1: For 120 V specifications and Asia and
Oceania specifications only.
*3: For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
1-2-1
3B1
1-2-2 Setting and registering data

After setting up the machine, set or register the following data.
(1) Settings
Setting the type of telephone line*1
Select the setting (pulse or tone) according to the type of telephone line to be used.
Setting the document size for scanning from the document feeder
Select the setting (Standard size original or Long original) for scanning the original fed from the DF.
Setting the paper feed selection mode
Select the paper feed mode (Auto Selection mode, Fixed Size mode or Fixed Cassette mode) for printing received
fax or reports.
Setting 2-in-1 reception
Select whether or not to output two successively-received A5/81/2" 51/2" documents onto one A4R/81/2" 11" page.
Setting the reception mode
Select an automatic reception mode (automatic fax reception, fax/telephone auto selection or D.R.D. reception*1).
Setting the memory fax forwarding
Select whether or not to perform memory fax forwarding.
Setting report output condition
Select the output condition for the management report (output or not output by department).
Select the output condition for the activity report (output or not output after every 50 communications)
Select the output condition for the transmission report (output or not output after each transmission)
Select the output condition for the reception report (output or not output after each reception)
Select the output condition for the timer communication report (output or not output after each timer programming).
Setting the TTI transmission
Select whether or not to add the transmit terminal identifier (TTI) to the transmitting document.
Setting reception date and time recording
Select whether or not to record the date and time on received documents.
Setting the password check communication
Select whether or not to perform password check communication.
Setting the speaker volume
Set the volume of the speaker in the on-hook mode (4 levels).
Setting the alarm buzzer volume
Set the volume of the alarm that sounds during events such as when an error occurs (3 levels).
Setting the monitoring volume
Set the volume for the sounds from the speaker (4 levels).
Setting the bulletin board
Select whether or not to use the bulletin board during polling transmission.
Setting duplex reception*2
Select whether or not to print received documents on both sides of the paper.
Setting the number of rings for automatic reception
Select the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the auto reception
mode.
Setting the number of rings for TAD reception
Set the number of rings (1 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the TAD reception
mode.
Setting the number of rings for fax/telephone auto select mode*1
Set the number of rings (0 to 15) that sound after call reception until fax data reception starts in the fax/telephone auto
select mode.
Setting remote diagnosis
Set to take advantage of our remote diagnosis system.
Setting the dial confirmation
Set whether or not to display information such as destination names, with functions that use one-touch keys (one-touch
dialing, group dialing and program dialing).
Setting the default transmission mode
Select the transmission mode (memory transmission or direct feed transmission) to be used in the initial mode.
*2: When an optional duplex unit is installed.
1-2-2
3B1
Setting the destination code
1. Enter maintenance mode.
2. Execute maintenance item U601.
Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the destination
code).
INI. KEEP DATA
COUNTRY CODE:XXX
3. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed (there is no need to change the default).
INI. KEEP DATA
OEM CODE:000

INI. KEEP DATA
COMPLETED XXX 000
INI. KEEP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00
5. Execute maintenance item U602.
INI. SHIP DATA
COMPLETED XXX 000
INI. SHIP DATA

COMPLETED V1.00
1-2-3
3B1
(2) Registration
Date and time
Set the current date and time.
Self station information
Register the self telephone number, self station name and self station ID.
One-touch dialing
Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under one-touch keys. Up to 32 entries can be registered.
Abbreviated dialing
Register destination fax (telephone) numbers and names to desired abbreviated numbers (00 to 99). Up to 100 entries
can be registered.
Group dialing
Register multiple destination fax (telephone) numbers and names under a one-touch key for group dialing. Up to 32
entries can be registered.
Program dialing
Register frequently used communication modes or fax numbers under one-touch keys. Up to 32 entries can be
registered.
Chain dialing
Register chain numbers and names under one-touch keys. Up to 32 entries can be registered.
Remote switching number
Change the remote switching number, which is set to 55 at the factory, for receiving faxes using the telephone
connected to the machine.
Management password
Register a 4-digit password, which is set to 6482 at the factory, for encrypted communication.
Cipher key password
Register a 16-digit cipher key password for encrypted communication.
Encryption boxes
Register encryption boxes for receiving encrypted transmissions. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
Permit telephone numbers and IDs
Register the password (permit telephone number or ID) for password check communication.
F-code confidential boxes
Register F-code confidential boxes for F-code based confidential communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
F-code relay boxes
Register F-code relay box for F-code based relay broadcast communication. Up to 15 boxes can be registered.
Access codes
Register access codes for restricted access. Up to 50 codes can be registered.
1-2-4
3B1
1-2-3 Installing the optional add-on memory

Add-on memory installation on the fax control PCB assembly requires the following parts:
8 MB add-on memory (P/N: 2AW6001)
<Procedure>
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power
plug from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover and
then the cover.
3. Remove the five screws holding the fax shield cover
and then the cover.
4. Insert the add-on memory into CN4 on the fax control
PCB.
*Holding the add-on memory by the sides, insert it
into the socket as shown in the diagram, and then
push it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks into
place.
Fax control PCB
Add-on memory
CN4
Figure 1-2-2
5. Refit all removed parts.
1-2-5
3B1
1-2-4 Installing the handset (optional for 120 V specifications only)

<Procedure>
1. Fit the handset retainer to the handset holder using
the two M3 5 cross-head chrome binding screws.
Handset holder
Handset retainer
Screws
(M3 5 cross-head chrome
binding screws)
Figure 1-2-3
2. Secure the handset retainer to the right cover using
the two M3 10 cross-head TP-A chrome screws.
3. Place the handset on the handset holder.
Handset
Handset holder
Screws
(M3 10 cross-head
TP-A chrome screws)
Handset retainer
Figure 1-2-4
1-2-6
3B1
1-3-1 Maintenance mode

(1) Maintenance mode item list
Section
Fax
Item
No.
Initial
setting*
U600 Initializing all data

U601 Initializing permanent data
U602 Setting factory defaults
U603 Setting the user registration data

Setting the self telephone number
Setting the type of telephone line
Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode
Setting remote diagnostic transmission
U604 Clearing data

Clearing transmission history
Initializing the cipher key password
Initializing the F-code confidential box ID
Initializes the F-code relay box ID
Initializes the encription box ID
U605 Setting the system (operational)

Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full
during memory transmission
Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed
Setting the addition of an image to the report
Setting the error report display format
Setting the line-monitoring period
Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching
Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching
Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
U606 Setting the system (operation unit and display)

Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off
Setting the date format
Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized
Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized
Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers
and one-touch key numbers on the list
U607 Setting the system (communication 1)

Setting the auto redialing interval
Setting the number of times of auto redialing
Setting the communication starting speed
Setting the reception speed
Setting the mode for remote switching
Setting the transmission intervals
Sets the loop current detection before dialing
Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes
U608 Setting transmission

Setting the method to process errors
Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception
Setting the reference for RTN signal output
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the sender
Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problem at the receiver
Setting ECM transmission
Setting ECM reception
Setting the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1
Setting the frequency of the CED signal
U609 Setting communication time

Setting the T0 time-out time
Setting the Ta time-out time
Setting the Tb1 time-out time
Setting the Tc time-out time
Setting the Td time-out time
69
30
20
80
60
1-3-1
3B1
Section
Fax
Item
No.
U610 Setting the modem output level
Setting the modem output level
Adjusting the modem output level
U611 G3 cable equalizer

Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer
Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer
U612 Setting the modem detection level
U613 Setting the DTMF output level

Setting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level
Setting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level

Adjusting the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level
Adjusting the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level
U615 Setting the NCU

Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN
Setting PSTN dial tone detection
Setting busy tone detection
Setting for a PBX
U616 Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses

Make time (10 PPS)
Make time (20 PPS)
U617 Outputting lists

Settings list
Action list
Monitor list
Own-status report
Protocol list
Abbreviated dialing ECM setting list
One-touch dialing ECM setting list
U650 Setting the system 1

Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax
at 100% magnification
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax
in the auto reduction mode
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter)
in the auto reduction mode
Setting the recording width for inch specifications
Setting automatic printing of the protocol list
1-3-2
Initial
setting
3
3
3

Setting the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction
for rotation reception
Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when A4 paper is set
when letter size paper is set
26

Setting the short protocol transmission
Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission
Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/ telephone auto select mode
Turning ECM for abbreviated dialing on/off
Turning ECM for one-touch dialing on/off

Setting if V.34 transmission is available
Setting the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz)
U680 Displaying the fax board ROM version
3
7
22
3B1
Section
Fax
Others
Item
No.
U894 Performing board test
Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM
Performing tests on optional memory
U914 Switching between fax/copier modes
U992 Checking or clearing the printer/fax count
1-3-3
Initial
setting
copier
3B1
(2) Contents of maintenance mode items
Maintenance
item No.
U600
Description
Description
Initializes software switches and all data in the SRAM on the fax control PCB, according to the destination and
OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax control PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.
Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the
destination code).
INI.
ALL DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
ALL DATA
OEM CODE:000
3. Press the start key. Data initialization starts. To cancel data initialization, press the stop/clear key.
4. After data initialization, the entered destination and OEM codes are displayed, and the ROM version is
displayed two seconds later.
INI.
ALL DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
ALL DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
Caution
If initialized with "000" (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C082 (fax control
PCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C082 (fax control PCB problem)
is detected, press the COPY/FAX switching key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover and
then execute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.
1-3-4
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U600 Destination code list
(cont.)
Code
Destination
000
009
032
070
080
084
088
108
126
136
137
152
156
159
169
181
242
243
U601
Japan
Australia
Canada
Greece
Hong Kong
Indonesia
Israel
Malaysia
New Zealand
Peru
Philippines
Middle East
Singapore
South Africa
Thailand
U.S.A.
South America
Saudi Arabia
Description
Code
Destination
253
CTR21 (European nations)

Italy
Germany
Spain
U.K.
Netherlands
Sweden
France
Austria
Switzerland
Belgium
Denmark
Finland
Portugal
Ireland
Norway
Taiwan
254
Initializing permanent data

Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data on the fax control PCB according to the
destination and OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax control PCB without changing user registration data and factory settings.
Method
1. Press the start key. The screen for entering the destination code is displayed.
Enter a destination code using the numeric keys (refer to the destination code list on page 1-3-5 for the
destination code).
INI.
KEEP DATA
COUNTRY CODE:000
2. Press the start key. The screen for entering the OEM code is displayed.
There is no operation necessary on this screen.
INI.
KEEP DATA
OEM CODE:000
INI.
KEEP DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
KEEP DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
Caution
If initialized with "000" (code for Japan) entered as the destination code, service call code C082 (fax control
PCB problem) will be detected. Be sure to enter the correct destination code. If C082 (fax control PCB problem)
is detected, press the COPY/FAX switching key to put the machine in the copy mode, open the front cover and
then execute this maintenance item again to enter the correct destination code and initialize data.
1-3-5
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U602 Setting factory defaults
Description
Description
Initializes software switches other than that for machine data and the SRAM on the fax control PCB, according
to the destination and OEM.
Purpose
Used to initialize the fax control PCB to the factory default.
Method
INI.
SHIP DATA
COMPLETED 000 000
INI.
SHIP DATA
COMPLETED V1.00
1-3-6
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U603 Setting the user registration data
Description
Description
Makes user settings to enable the use of the copier as a fax.
Purpose
To be run after installation of the facsimile kit if necessary.
Start
2. Select an item using the cursor up/down keys.
Display
Description
SELF TEL No.

LINE TYPE
RINGS (F/T) #
REMOTE DIAG
Sets the self telephone number.

Sets the type of telephone line.
Sets the number of rings in fax/telephone auto select mode.
Sets remote diagnostic transmission.
Setting the self telephone number

1. Enter the telephone number using the numeric keys.
Up to 20 digits can be entered.
To correct the entered telephone number or to delete the stored telephone number, reset by pressing the
stop/clear key.
Setting the type of telephone line
1. Change the setting using the numeric keys.
Display
1: DTMF
2: 10
3: 20
Description
DTMF
10 PPS
20 PPS

Setting the number of rings in the fax/telephone auto select mode
According to the user request, used to increase or decrease the time required to switch to a fax.
Setting range
Description
Number of fax/telephone rings
0 to 15
When set to 0, a fax is selected immediately after receiving a ring tone. Never set the number of fax/
telephone rings to 0 on European specification models.
Setting remote diagnostic transmission
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to select if remote diagnostic transmission is to be enabled.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Remote diagnostic transmission is enabled.
Remote diagnostic transmission is disabled.

Completion
Press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is
displayed.
1-3-7
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U604 Clearing data
Description
Description
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history and IDs.
Purpose
Used to clear the transmission history or if an ID has been forgotten.
Method
Display
Description
COMM. REC
Clears the activity report, error list, action list, transmission history
of each department as listed on the department control report,
transmission history for displaying the transmission results,
document number, timer program information, protocol list, and
other transmission history such as image data, excluding items
regarding the machine variation adjustment.
MANAGE PW
Initializes the cipher key password.
F-CONFI BOX ID Initializes the F-code confidential box ID.
F-RELAY BOX ID Initializes the F-code relay box ID.
ENCRIPT BOX ID Initializes the encription box ID.
3. Press the start key. Initialization starts. When initialized, COMPLETED is displayed.
Completion
displayed.
U605
Setting the system (operational)

Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding operation.
Start
Display
MEM. FULL
FIN. ALARM
AUTO REDU
ADD IMAGE
ERR. CODE
MONITOR
TIME (ONE)
TIME (CON)
RESOLUT
Description
Sets how to proceed if memory becomes full
during memory transmission.
Sets an alarm for when reception is completed.
Selects if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction
is to be performed.
Sets for the addition of an image to the report.
Sets the error report display format.
Sets the line-monitoring period.
Sets the one-shot detection time for remote switching.
Sets the continuous detection time for remote switching.
Sets the initial condition of fax image scanning quality.
Setting how to proceed if memory becomes full during memory transmission

Used to select whether to send only stored data or to display an error indication and cancel transmission if
memory becomes full during memory transmission.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: CONT
2: STOP
Description
Whether to continue memory transmission or to
clear the memory can be selected by the user.
Memory is forcibly cleared.

1-3-8
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U605 Setting an alarm for when reception is completed
(cont.) 1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the setting.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
An alarm rings.
An alarm does not ring.

Selecting if auto reduction in the auxiliary direction is to be performed
Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the auxiliary direction or at 100%
magnification.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Auto reduction is performed if the received
document is longer than the fax paper.
Auto reduction is not performed.

Setting the addition of an image to the report
Selects if an image is to be added to the transmission report.
Display
Description
1: ON
2: OFF
Image added.
Image not added.

Setting the error report display format
Selects the format of the transmission report when a transmission error occurs.
Display
1: WORDS
2: CODE
3: MIX
Description
Records an error message (BUSY, OK, ERROR or STOP).
Records a six-digit error code.
Records either an error message or code.

Setting the line-monitoring period
Sets the period to monitor the line. By monitoring a transmission from the start to the end, it can be checked
whether the transmission was correct or not.
Display
1: END
2: DIS
Description
Until transmission is completed.
After dialing is completed until reception of a DIS signal.

Setting the one-shot detection time for remote switching
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be
displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.)
Description
Setting range
One-shot detection time for remote switching 0 to 255 ms

1-3-9
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U605 Setting the continuous detection time for remote switching
(cont.) Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching. (This setting item will be
displayed, but the setting made is ineffective.)
Setting range
Description
Continuous detection time for remote switching
0 to 255 ms

Setting the initial condition of fax image scanning quality
Set to the resolution that is most frequently used by the user.
Display
1: S
2: F
3: SF
4: UF
Description
Standard
Fine
Super fine
Ultra fine

Completion
displayed.
U606
Setting the system (operation unit and display)

Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the operation unit and display.
Start
Display
Description
ALARM LED OFF

DATE PATTERN
RESO. LOCK
DENS. LOCK
REPORT SKIP
Sets the conditions under which an error indicator turns off.

Sets the date format.
Sets if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized.
Sets if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized.
Sets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers
and one-touch key numbers on the list.
Setting the conditions under which an error indicator turns off

Display
Description
1: RESET
An error indicator turns off only when the

reset key is pressed.
2: COMM
An error indicator turns off when any key is
pressed, an original is inserted or the next
transmission is started.
Setting the date format
Selects the date format on the respective reports and senders information record.
Display
1: YMD
2: MDY
3: DMY
Order
Year/month/day
Month/day/year
Day/month/year

1-3-10
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U606 Setting if the image scanning quality in fax mode is initialized
(cont.) Sets if the resolution is to be initialized when fax operation is complete.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Resolution is initialized.
Resolution is not initialized.

Setting if the scanning density in fax mode is initialized
Sets if the scanning density is initialized when fax operation is complete.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Density is initialized.
Density is not initialized.

Setting whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list
Sets whether to skip unregistered abbreviated numbers and one-touch key numbers on the list.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Unregistered numbers are skipped.
Unregistered numbers are not skipped.

Completion
displayed.
1-3-11
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Makes settings for fax transmission regarding the communication.
Start
Display
Description
INTERVAL
TIMES
TX SPEED
RX SPEED
REMOTE
CALL INT
DC LOOP DETECT
DIS 4BYTES FIXED
Sets the auto redialing interval.

Sets the number of times of auto redialing.
Sets the communication starting speed.
Sets the reception speed.
Sets the mode for remote switching.
Sets the transmission intervals.
Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Setting the auto redialing interval

Change the setting to prevent the following problems: fax transmission is not possible due to too short redial
interval, or fax transmission takes too much time to complete due to too long redial interval.
Description
Redialing interval
Setting range
1 to 9 min.

Setting the number of times of auto redialing
Description
Number of redialing
Setting range
0 to 9
When set to 0, no redialing is performed.

Setting the communication starting speed
Sets the initial communication speed when starting transmission. When the destination unit has V.34 capability,
V.34 is selected for transmission, regardless of this setting.
Display
1: 144
2: 96
3: 48
4: 24
Description
V.17, 14400 bps
V.17, 9600 bps
V.27ter, 4800 bps
V.27ter, 2400 bps

Setting the reception speed
Sets the reception speed that the sender is informed of using the DIS or NSF signal. When the destination unit
has V.34 capability, V.34 is selected, regardless of the setting.
Display
1: 144
2: 96
3: 48
4: 24
Description
V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
V.29, V.27ter
V.27ter
V.27ter (fallback only)

1-3-12
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U607 Setting the mode for remote switching
(cont.) Sets the signal detection method for remote switching. Be sure to change the setting according to the type of
telephone connected to the machine.
Display
1: ONE
2: CONT
Description
One-shot detection
Continuous detection

Setting the transmission intervals
Sets the minimum time required for connection to the line for the next transmission after the previous
transmission was completed. Change the setting if transmission problems occur during multi-transmission,
such as broadcasting and polling transmission, or reserved transmission.
Display
1: 10
2: 30
3: 70
4: 120
Description
10 s
30 s
70 s
120 s

Setting the loop current detection before dialing
Sets if the loop current detection is performed before dialing.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Performs loop current detection before dialing.
Does not perform loop current detection before dialing.

Setting the DIS signal to 4 bytes
Sets if bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Completion
displayed.
1-3-13
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U608 Setting transmission
Description
Description
Makes settings regarding fax transmission.
Start
Display
ERROR
DIS-2 RES
RTN CHECK
TX ECHO
RX ECHO
ECM TX
ECM RX
TCF CHECK
CED FREQ.
Description
Sets the method to process errors.
Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
Sets the reference for RTN signal output.
Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver.
Sets ECM transmission.
Sets ECM reception.
Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 1.
Sets the frequency of the CED signal.
Setting the method to process errors

Selects if transmission is to be treated as an error if an RTN or PIN signal is received. If it is treated as an error,
an alarm sounds and a transmission report is output.
Display
1: OK
2: ERROR
Description
Transmission is not treated as an error.
Transmission is treated as an error.

Setting the number of times of DIS signal reception
Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Used as one of the correction measures for
transmission errors and other problems.
Display
1: ONCE
2: TWICE
Description
Responds to the first signal.
Responds to the second signal.

Setting the reference for RTN signal output
Sets the error line rate as the reference for RTN signal output. If transmission errors occur frequently due to the
quality of the line, they can be reduced by lowering this setting.
Display
Description
1: 5
2: 10
3: 15
4: 20
Error line rate of 5%


1-3-14
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U608 Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender
(cont.) Sets the period before a DCS signal is sent after a DIS signal is received. Used when problems occur due to
echoes at the sender.
Display
1: 500
2: 300
Description
Sends a DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
Sends a DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.

Setting the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the receiver
Sets the period before an NSF, CSI or DIS signal is sent after a CED signal is received. Used when problems
occur due to echoes at the receiver.
Display
Description
1: 500
2: 75
Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 500 ms after receiving a CED.

Sends an NSF, CSI or DIS 75 ms after receiving a CED.

Setting ECM transmission
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM transmission is enabled.
ECM transmission is disabled.

Setting ECM reception
To be set to OFF when reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM reception is enabled.
ECM reception is disabled.

Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Used as a measure
to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Description
Setting range
Number of errors as a criterion for a TCF signal 0 to 255

1-3-15
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U608 Setting the frequency of the CED signal
(cont.) Sets the frequency of the CED signal. Used as one of the measures to improve transmission performance for
international communications.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric keys to change the frequency.
Display
Frequency of the CED signal
1: 2100
2: 1100
2100 Hz
1100 Hz

Completion
displayed.
U609
Setting communication time

Description
Sets the time-out time for fax transmission.
Purpose
Used mainly to improve transmission performance for international communications.
Start
Display
T0
T1
T2
Ta
Tb1
Tb2
Tc
Td
Description
Sets the T0 time-out time.
Sets the Ta time-out time.
Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Sets the Tc time-out time.
Sets the Td time-out time.

Sets the time before detecting a DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent. Depending on the quality of the
exchange, or when the auto select function is selected at the destination unit, a line can be disconnected.
Change the setting to prevent this problem.
Setting range
Description
T0 time-out time
30 to 90 s

Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception. No change is necessary for this
maintenance item.
Description
T1 time-out time
Setting range
30 to 90 s

1-3-16
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U609 Setting the T2 time-out time
(cont.) The T2 time-out time decides the following.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception
Description
T2 time-out time
1 to 255
69
100 ms

Setting the Ta time-out time
In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to continue ringing an operator through the connected
telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). A fax signal is received within the Ta set
time, or the fax mode is selected automatically when the time elapses. In fax/telephone auto select mode,
change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Description
Ta time-out time
1 to 255 s
30
Ta
Start of fax reception
Rings
Tb1
Ring back tone send start
Ring detection
Line connection
as a fax machine

Tb2
Figure 1-3-1 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time

In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as
a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In fax/telephone auto select mode, change the setting when fax reception is
unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Description
Tb1 time-out time

1 to 255
20
100 ms

In the fax/telephone auto select mode, sets the time to start ringing an operator through the connected
telephone after receiving a call as a fax machine (see figure 1-3-1). In the fax/telephone auto select mode,
change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Description
Tb2 time-out time

1 to 255
80
100 ms

1-3-17
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U609 Setting the Tc time-out time
(cont.) In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to fax reception after a connected
telephone receives a call. Only the telephone function is available if shifting is not made within the set Tc time.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call.
Description
Tc time-out time

1 to 255 s
60

Setting the Td time-out time
Sets the length of the time required to determine silent status (fax), one of the triggers for Tc time check. In the
TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a call. Be sure
not to set it too short; otherwise, the mode may be shifted to fax while the unit is being used as a telephone.
Description
Td time-out time
Setting range
1 to 255 s

Completion
displayed.
1-3-18
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U610 Setting the modem output level
Description
Description
Sets the modem output level.
Start
Display
Description
SGL LEVEL MODEM

SGL OUTPUT ADJ
Sets the modem output level.

Adjusts the modem output level.
Setting the modem output level

To be set when installing the machine in order to adapt to the line characteristics.
Description
Modem output level
Setting range
4 to 12

Adjusting the modem output level
No change is necessary from the factory default.
Setting
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
Output level
1.0 dBm
0.75 dBm
0.5 dBm
0.25 dBm
0 dBm
0.25 dBm
0.5 dBm
0.75 dBm
1.0 dBm

Completion
displayed.
1-3-19
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U611
G3 cable equalizer
Description
Description
Sets the G3 cable equalizer.
Start
Display
REG. G3 TX EQR
REG. G3 RX EQR
Description
Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
Setting the G3 transmission cable equalizer

Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
Display
1: 0
2: 18
3: 36
4: 72
Description
0 km
1.8 km
3.6 km
7.2 km

Setting the G3 reception cable equalizer
Perform the following adjustment to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics.
Display
1: 0
2: 18
3: 36
4: 72
Description
0 km
1.8 km
3.6 km
7.2 km

Completion
displayed.
1-3-20
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U612 Setting the modem detection level
Description
Description
Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Used to improve the transmission performance when a low quality line is used.
Method
Setting
Display
Description
1: 33
2: 38
3: 43
4: 47
33 dBm
38 dBm
43 dBm
47 dBm

Completion
U613
Setting the DTMF output level

Description
Sets the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.
Purpose
Used if problems occur when sending a signal with a push-button dial telephone.
Start
Display
Description
DTMF TX LEVEL (H)

DTMF TX LEVEL (L)
Sets the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.

Sets the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
Setting
Description
Setting range
DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level 0 to 255
E.g.: When set to 8, the DTMF output level is 8 dBm.

Completion
displayed.
1-3-21
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U614 Adjusting the DTMF output level
Description
Description
Adjusts the DTMF output level of a push-button dial telephone.
Purpose
No change is necessary from the factory default.
Start
Display
Description
SGL LVL DTMF (H)
SGL LVL DTMF (L)
Adjusts the DTMF (high-frequency group) output level.

Adjusts the DTMF (low-frequency group) output level.
Setting
Setting
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
DTMF (high-/low-frequency group) output level

2.0 dBm
1.5 dBm
1.0 dBm
0.5 dBm
0 dBm
0.5 dBm
1.0 dBm
1.5 dBm
2.0 dBm

Completion
displayed.
1-3-22
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U615 Setting the NCU
Description
Description
Makes setting regarding the network control unit (NCU).
Purpose
To be set when installing the facsimile kit.
Start
Display
Description
EXCHANGE
DIAL TONE
BUSY TONE
PBX SETTING
Sets the connection to PBX/PSTN.

Sets PSTN dial tone detection.
Sets busy tone detection.
Setting for a PBX.
Setting the connection to PBX/PSTN

Selects if a fax is to be connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Display
1: PSTN
2: PBX
Description
Connected to the public switched telephone network.
Connected to a PBX.

Setting PSTN dial tone detection
Selects if the dial tone is detected to check the telephone is off the hook when a fax is connected to a public
switched telephone network.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Detects the dial tone.
Does not detect the dial tone.

Setting busy tone detection
When a fax signal is sent, sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or
the busy tone is not detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time.
Fax transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When set to 2, this problem may be prevented.
However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is busy.
Display
Description
1: ON
2: OFF
Detects busy tone.

Does not detect busy tone.

1-3-23
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U615 Setting for a PBX
(cont.) Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Display
Description
1: EARTH
2: FLS
3: LOOP
Earth mode
Flashing mode
Code number mode

Completion
displayed.
U616
Adjusting the ratio of make-to-break of dial pulses

Description
Adjusts the ratio of make-to-break (ratio of make in pulse cycles) of dial pulses.
Purpose
Change the setting if dial pulse transmission problems occur. Note that 20 PPS is for Japanese specifications
only and no setting is necessary for other specifications.
Start
Display
Description
MAKE TIME (10 PPS) Make time (10 PPS)

MAKE TIME (20 PPS) Make time (20 PPS)
Setting
Description
Setting range
Make time in the pulse cycle (10 PPS) 1 to 99 (ms)

Make time in the pulse cycle (20 PPS) 1 to 49 (ms)

Completion
displayed.
1-3-24
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U617 Outputting lists
Description
Description
Outputs a list of data regarding fax transmissions.
Purpose
Used to check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the fax.
Method
Display
SETTING LIST
ACTION LIST
MONITOR LIST
SELF ST RPT
PROTOCOL LIST
ABBR DIAL ECM LIST
1TOUCH DIAL ECM LIST
Description
Outputs a list of software switches, self telephone number,
confidential boxes, ROM versions and other information.
Outputs a list of error history, transmission line details
and other information.
Outputs a list of transmission speeds, resolutions,
minimum transmission time and other information.
Outputs a list of settings in maintenance mode
(own-status report) regarding fax transmission only.
Outputs a list of transmission procedures.
Outputs a list of ECM settings for abbreviated dialing.
Outputs a list of ECM settings for one-touch dialing.
3. Press the start key. The selected list is output.
1-3-25
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Makes settings for fax reception regarding the sizes of the fax paper and received images and automatic
printing of the protocol list.
Start
Display
Description
CUT LINE (100%)
Sets the number of lines to be ignored when

receiving a fax at 100% magnification.
CUT LINE (AUTO)
receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode.
CUT LINE (A4)
receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction
mode.
RX WIDTH 11"
Sets the recording width for inch specifications.
PROTOCOL LIST PRT Sets the automatic printing of the protocol list.
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when recording the data at 100% magnification. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines
are ignored. If over the setting, they are recorded on the next page.
Description
Number of lines
to be ignored
when receiving
at 100%

0 to 22
6 lines
Increase the setting if a blank second page is received, and decrease it if the received image does not
include the entire transmitted data.
Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax in the auto reduction mode
Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode. If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those
lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on
the same page.
Description
Number of lines
0 to 22
to be ignored
when receiving in
the auto reduction mode
6 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge
margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
1-3-26
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U650 Setting the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R, letter) in the auto reduction mode
(cont.) Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or letter-size paper under the conditions below.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data on
a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
With A4R present and folio absent in the drawers
With letter-size paper present and legal-size paper absent in the drawers
Description
Number of lines
0 to 22
to be ignored
when receiving a
fax (A4R, letter) in
the auto reduction mode
6 lines
Increase the setting if a page received in the reduction mode is over-reduced and too much trailing edge
margin is left. Decrease it if the received image does not include all transmitted data.
Setting the recording width for inch specifications
Sets the maximum recording width and processing method when 11" width fax paper is loaded on an inchspecification machine.
Display
1: 11 17
2: B4
Description
Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as A3 width and
records at 100% magnifications.
Communicates to the destination unit 11" width as B4 width.

Setting the automatic printing of the protocol list
Sets if the protocol list is automatically printed out.
Display
1: OFF
2: ERROR
3: ON
Description
The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication
only if a communication error occurs.
The protocol list is automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
displayed.
1-3-27
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Sets the variation range in rotation reception and the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Start
Display
Description
ROTATION RX ERR
ADJ LINES
ADJ LINES (A4)
ADJ LINES (LT)
Sets the variation range in the auxiliary scanning direction

for rotation reception.
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when A4 paper is set.
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when letter size paper is set.
Setting the variations range in rotation reception

Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored when the received data exceeds the acceptable number of
lines in the rotation reception mode. If the number of excessive lines is smaller than the set value, those lines
are ignored and rotation reception is performed; if it is larger than the set value, rotation reception is not
performed.
Description
Number of variation lines in the auxiliary scanning direction
0 to 255
Even if rotation reception fails, it can be enabled by increasing this value, however, some parts of the
received image may not be printed.
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Description
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction

0 to 22

Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is set.
Description
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction
when A4 paper is set

0 to 22
22

Setting the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.
Description
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction 0 to 26

when letter size paper is set
26

Completion
displayed.
1-3-28
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Purpose
To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.
Start
Display
TCF CHECK 2
SHORT PROTOCOL TX
SHORT PROTOCOL RX
NUMBER OF CNG (F/T)
ABBR DIAL ECM SETTING
1-TOUCH DIAL ECM SETTING
Description
Sets the criteria for receiving a TCF signal 2.
Sets the short protocol transmission.
Sets the reception of short protocol transmission.
Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
Turns ECM for abbreviated dialing on/off.
Turns ECM for one-touch dialing on/off.

Sets the signal checking time as a criterion for a received TCF signal.
1. Enter 1 or 2 using the numeric key to change the setting.
Display
1: LONG
2: SHORT
Description
Checks for 1.0 s.
Checks for 0.8 s.

Setting the short protocol transmission
Sets if short protocol transmission is performed.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Short protocol transmission is performed.
Short protocol transmission is not performed.

Setting the reception of a short protocol transmission
Selects whether to receive or ignore transmission using short protocol.
If a short protocol transmission is received when an auto switching device is attached to the machine,
communication problems, including auto switching inability, sometimes occur. Change the setting to ignore
short protocol transmission to prevent such problems.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
Receives short protocol transmission.
Ignores short protocol transmission.
1-3-29
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U660
(cont.) Setting the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode
Sets the CNG detection times in the fax/telephone auto select mode.
Display
1: 1 TIME
2: 2 TIMES
Description
Detects CNG once.
Detects CNG twice.

Setting ECM for each abbreviated number
Turns ECM on/off for each abbreviated number.
1. Enter a registered two-digit abbreviated number and press the start key.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM communication is performed for all abbreviated numbers.
Disables the ECM for abbreviated numbers.
3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering an abbreviated number is displayed.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering an
abbreviated number.
Setting ECM for each one-touch key
Turns ECM on/off for each one-touch key.
1. Enter a registered two-digit one-touch key number and press the start key.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
ECM communication is performed for all one-touch keys.
Disables the ECM for one-touch keys.
3. Press the start key. The value is set. The screen for entering a one-touch key number is displayed.
To return to the screen for selecting an item, press the stop/clear key at the screen for entering a one-touch
key number.
Completion
displayed.
1-3-30
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
Description
Description
Purpose
To reduce transmission errors when a low quality line is used.
Start
Display
V.34 MODEM
V.34 SYMBOL 3429Hz
V.34 SYMBOL 3200Hz
V.34 SYMBOL 3000Hz
V.34 SYMBOL 2800 Hz
Description
Enables or disables V.34 communication.
Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
Enabling/disabling V.34 communication
Sets whether V.34 communication is enabled/disabled for transmission and reception.
Display
Description
1: ON
V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
2: TX
V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
3: RX
V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
4: OFF
V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.

Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description
V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.

Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description

Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description

1-3-31
3B1
Maintenance
Description
item No.
U670 Setting the V.34 symbol speed (2800 Hz)
(cont.) Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 2800 Hz is used.
Display
1: ON
2: OFF
Description

Completion
Press the stop clear key. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U680
Displaying the fax board ROM version

Description
Displays the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.
Purpose
Used to check the version of the ROM on the fax control PCB.
Method
1. Press the start key. The version of the ROM on the fax control PCB is displayed.
Completion
1-3-32
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U894 Performing board test
Description
Description
Performs tests on the SRAM, DRAM (image memory, bitmap memory) and optional memory on the fax control
PCB.
Purpose
Used to check if reading and writing are performed correctly in respective installed memories.
Start
Display
Description
BOARD MEMORY Performs tests on SRAM and DRAM.

BOARD OP. MEM Performs tests on optional memory.
Performing tests on SRAM and DRAM
1. Press the start key. The test is performed and the results displayed as follows.
When the test result is OK:
TEST MEMORY
OK
If the test result is NG:
TEST MEMORY
NG DRAM IMG 0x
******: address
DRAM IMG: DRAM (image memory) error

DRAM B.M: DRAM (bitmap memory) error
SRAM: SRAM error
Performing tests on optional memory
1. Press the start key. The test is performed and the result is displayed as follows.
When the test result is OK:
TEST OPTION MEMORY

OK
If the test result is NG:
TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG DRAM B.M 0x
******: address
If the test result is NG (memory is not installed):

TEST OPTION MEMORY
NG DRAM B.M
Completion
If the test result is OK, press the stop/clear key at the screen for selecting an item. The screen for selecting a
If the test result is NG, reset by turning the main switch off and on.
1-3-33
3B1
Maintenance
item No.
U914 Switching between fax/copier modes
Description
Description
Switches between fax and copier modes when the facsimile kit is installed to use the copier as a fax.
Purpose
To be set according to frequency of use: set to the more frequently used mode.
Method
Setting
1. Select the mode (copier or fax) to be given priority using the cursor up/down keys.
Completion
U992

Description
Displays, clears or changes the print count of the printer or fax when the printer board or facsimile kit is
installed.
Purpose
To check the condition of use of the printer or fax.
Method
Press the start key. The print count of the printer or fax is displayed.
Setting
1. Select the count to be changed using the cursor up/down keys.
2. Enter a six-digit numerical value using the numeric keys. To clear both of the printer and fax counts, press
the reset key.
3. Press the start key. The count is set.
Completion
1-3-34
3B1
1-4-1 Error codes

(1) Error code
Error codes are listed on the communication reports, activity report, etc. The codes consist of an error code indication "U"
followed by a 5-digit number.
The upper three of the five digits indicate general classification of the error and its cause, while the lower two indicate the
detailed classification. Items for which detailed classification is not necessary have "00" as the last two digits.
Error code
UXXXXX
Detailed classification of error code

General classification of error code
Error code indication
1-4-1
3B1
(2) Table of general classification
Error code
Description
U00000
U00100
No response or busy after the set number of redials.

Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200
U00300
Reception was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.

Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U004XX
A connection was made but interrupted during handshake with the receiver unit (refer to page 14-4 "U004XX error code table").
U00500
Multiple communication was interrupted and call was not made on destination units after
interruption.
U006XX
Communication was interrupted because of a machine problem (refer to page 1-4-4 "U006XX
error code table").
U00700
U008XX
Communication was interrupted because of a problem in the destination unit.

A page transmission error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 "U008XX error code table").
U009XX
U010XX
A page reception error occurred in G3 mode (refer to page 1-4-5 "U009XX error code table").
Transmission in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-6 "U010XX error
U011XX
code table").
Reception in G3 mode was interrupted by a signal error (refer to page 1-4-8 "U011XX error code
U012XX
table").
Not used.
U013XX
U01400
Not used.
An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500
U01600
A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.

A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U017XX
A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during transmission in V.34 mode
(refer to page 1-4-10 "U017XX error code table").
U018XX
A communication error occurred before starting T.30 protocol during reception in V.34 mode
(refer to page 1-4-10 "U018XX error code table").
U02200
F-code based relay broadcast transmission failed because the data registered in the F-code
relay box was deleted.
U02400
An interoffice F-code based relay transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in the
specified relay box number.
U03000
U03200
No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
In interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, data was not stored in the box specified by
U03300
the destination unit.

In polling reception from a unit of our make, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in
permit ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception,
operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permit ID or telephone number.
U03400
Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers (destination unit
is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500
In interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception, the specified F-code confidential box
number was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600
An interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in
the specified F-code confidential box number.
U03700
Interoffice F-code based bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had no Fcode based bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any F-code
U04000
confidential box in the destination unit.

In interoffice F-code based transmission mode, the specified F-code box number was not
U04100
registered in the destination unit.

F-code based transmission failed because the destination unit had no F-code based reception
capability.
1-4-2
3B1
Error code
Description
U04200
U04300
In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the destination unit.
Encrypted transmission failed because the destination unit had no encrypted communication
U044XX
capability.
Communication was interrupted because of an encryption key error during encrypted
U04500
transmission (refer to page 1-4-10 "U044XX error code table").

Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100
U05200
Password check transmission was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.
Password check reception was interrupted because the permit ID did not agree.
U05300
Destination unit in password check reception mode did not receive data because the permit ID
did not agree.
U09000
U12000
G3 communication was attempted but failed because the destination unit was a G2 machine.
In F-code based relay reception, memory overflowed.
U14000
U14100
In F-code based confidential reception, memory overflowed.

In interoffice F-code based transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000
U19100
Memory overflowed during memory reception.

Memory overflowed in the destination unit during transmission.
U19200
U19300
Memory transmission failed because a decoding error occurred.

Transmission failed because an error occurred during JBIG encoding.
U19400
Reception failed because an error occurred during JBIG decoding.
1-4-3
3B1
(2-1) U004XX error code table: interrupted phase B
Error code
Description
U00420
A relay request was received from the host center but interrupted because of a mismatch in
permit ID or telephone number.
U00421
F-code based relay reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in the specified F-code
relay box number.
U00430
A polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the
transmitting unit. Or, F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but
U00431
interrupted because of a mismatch in permit ID in the transmitting unit.

An F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified F-code
U00432
confidential box was not registered.

An F-code based bulletin board transmission was interrupted because of a mismatch in F-code
U00433
confidential box numbers.

F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but data was not present in the
U00435
F-code confidential box.

F-code based bulletin board transmission request was received but interrupted because the
U00440
specified F-code confidential box was being accessed.

F-code based confidential reception or F-code based relay reception was interrupted because
U00450
the specified F-code box was not registered.

The destination unit in password check transmission mode interrupted transmission because of
U00460
a mismatch in permit ID.

Encrypted reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number was not
U00462
registered.
Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the specified encryption box
was not registered.
(2-2) U006XX error code table: Problems with the unit

Error code
1-4-4
Description
U00600
U00601
The SRDF cover is open.

Document jam or the document length exceeds the maximum.
U00602
U00603
Image scanning section problem.

No document feed.
U00604
U00610
Document length exceeded the limit of the bitmap memory capacity.

Recording section cover is open.
U00655
U00656
CTS was not activated after RTS due to a modem error.

Data was not transmitted after CTS was activated due to a modem error.
U00670
U00677
Power was cut off during communication.

There was no file to transmit in the memory transmission mode.
U00690
System error.
3B1
(2-3) U008XX error code table: Page transmission error
Error code
U00800
U00810
Description
A page transmission error occurred because of reception of a RTN or PIN signal.
A page transmission error reoccurred after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
(2-4) U009XX error code table: Page reception error

Error code
Description
U00900
An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U00910
A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
1-4-5
3B1
(2-5) U010XX errror code table: G3 transmission
Error code
Description
U01000
An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after transmission at
U01001
2400 bps.
Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DIS signal.
U01010
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal, and the
preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01011
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01012
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal, and the
preset number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01013
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01014
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded.
U01015
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal, and the preset number of
U01016
An MCF signal was received but no DIS signal was received after transmission of an EOM
signal, and T1 timeout was detected.
U01017
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal, and the preset number of
U01018
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded.
U01019
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded (between units of our make).
U01020
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01021
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal, and the preset number
of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01022
No relevant signal was received after transmission of an RR signal, and the preset number of
command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01023
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.NULL signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01024
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PSS.MPS signal, and the preset number
U01025
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal, and the preset number
U01026
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal, and the preset number
U01027
No relevant signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal, and the preset
number of command retransfers was exceeded (ECM).
U01028
U01040
T5 timeout was detected during ECM transmission (ECM).

A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during standby for DIS signal reception.
U01041
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DNL (MPS or EOM) signal (between units of
our make).
U01042
U01043
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS, TCF signal.

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS1, NSS2 (TCF) signal (between units of
U01044
our make).
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an NSS3, TCF signal (between units of our
make).
1-4-6
3B1
Error code
Description
U01045
U01046
A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an MPS signal.
A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOM signal.
U01047
U01048
A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received after transmission of an EOP signal.
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PRI-EOP signal.
U01049
U01050
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CNC signal (between units of our make).
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTC signal (ECM).
U01051
U01052
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an EOR.Q signal (ECM).

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RR signal (ECM).
U01053
U01054
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal (ECM).

A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.MPS signal (ECM).
U01055
U01056
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOM signal (ECM).

A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.EOP signal (ECM).
U01057
U01070
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPS.PRI-EOP signal (ECM).

Polarity reversal was detected during handshake.
U01071
U01072
Polarity reversal was detected during message transmission.

A break in loop current was detected during transmission.
U01073
During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the receiver unit, a CM signal was not detected when
transmitting after reception.
U01080
U01091
A PIP signal was received after transmission of a PPS.NULL signal.

During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because a PPR signal was
received over 10 times even after reducing the communication speed to the minimum with the
symbol speed maintained at the level of connection.
U01092
During transmission in V.34 mode, communication was interrupted because of an impossible

combination of the symbol speed and communication speed.
1-4-7
3B1
(2-6) U011XX error code table: G3 reception
Error code
Description
U01100
U01101
Function of the unit differs from that indicated by a DCS signal.

Function of the unit (excl. communication mode select) differs from that indicated by an NSS
U01102
signal.
A DTC (NSC) signal was received when no transmission data was in the unit.
U01110
U01111
No response after transmission of a DIS signal.

No response after transmission of a DTC (NSC) signal.
U01112
U01113
No training reception after reception of a DCS or NSS signal.

No response after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01114
U01115
No message reception after transmission of a CFR signal.

No message reception after transmission of an MCF signal.
U01116
U01117
No message reception after transmission of a PPR signal.

No message reception after transmission of a CTR signal.
U01118
U01119
No message reception after transmission of an ERR signal.

No further signals were received after reception of a message.
U01120
U01121
No response after transmission of an MCF signal.

No response after transmission of an RTP signal.
U01122
U01123
No response after transmission of an RTN signal.

No response after transmission of a PIP signal.
U01124
U01125
No response after transmission of a PIN signal.

No response after transmission of a CNS signal (between units of our make).
U01126
U01127
No response after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

No response after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).
U01128
U01129
No response after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).

No response after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
U01140
U01141
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DIS signal.

A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DTC signal.
U01142
U01143
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a DCS or NSS signal.

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an FTT signal.
U01144
U01145
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CFR signal.

A DCN signal was received after reception of a message.
U01146
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an MCF signal (interoffice communication after
reception of an MPS, EOM signal or confidential interoffice communication).
U01147
U01148
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTP signal.

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RTN signal.
U01149
U01150
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIP signal.

A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PIN signal.
U01151
U01152
A DCN signal was received after transmission of a PPR signal (ECM).

A DCN signal was received after transmission of a CTR signal (ECM).
U01153
U01154
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an ERR signal (ECM).

A DCN signal was received after transmission of an RNR signal (ECM).
U01155
U01160
A DCN signal was received after transmission of an SPA signal (short protocol).
During message reception, transmission time exceeded the maximum transmission time per line.
U01161
U01162
Number of error lines exceeded limits during message reception.

A break in loop current was detected during message reception.
U01163
U01164
Polarity reversal was detected during message reception.

One page length exceeded the specified length during message reception.
U01170
U01172
A decoding error occurred during MMR message reception.

During reverse polling in V.34 mode at the transmitting unit, a JM signal was not detected after
transmission of a CM signal when receiving after transmission.
1-4-8
3B1
Error code
Description
U01191
Communication was interrupted because an error occurred during an image data reception
sequence in the V.34 mode.
U01199
A DIS signal with different FIF was received after transmission of a DIS signal.
1-4-9
3B1
(2-7) U017XX error code table: V.34 transmission
Error code
Description
U01700
U01720
A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).

A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01721
Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between
units.
U01700: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before
entering phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/A/Abar (B/Bbar, for polling
transmission)/INFOh was not detected.
U01720: A communication error that occurs at the transmitting unit in the period after initiating the control channel before
entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01721: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of
communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange; 1) a DCN signal was received from the
destination unit, and the line was cut; or 2) a DIS (NSF, CSI) signal was received from the destination unit and,
in response to the signal, the unit transmitted a DCN signal, and the line was cut.
(2-8) U018XX error code table: V.34 reception
Error code
Description
U01800
A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810
U01820
A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).

A communication error occurred in phase 4 (modem parameter exchange).
U01821
Operation was interrupted due to the absence of a common communication speed between
units.
U01800: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after transmission of INFO0 before entering
phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training). For example, INFO0/B/Bbar (A/Abar, for polling
reception)/probing tone was not detected.
U01810: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
For example, S/Sbar/PP/TRN was not detected.
U01820: A communication error that occurs at the receiver unit in the period after initiating the control channel before
entering the T.30 process. For example, PPh/ALT/MPh/E was not detected.
U01821: In the absence of a common communication speed between units (including when an impossible combination of
communication speed and symbol speed occurs) after MPh exchange, a DCN signal was transmitted to the
destination unit and the line was cut.
(2-9) U044XX error code table: Encrypted transmission

Error code
U04400
U04401
1-4-10
Description
Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
Calling failed during encrypted transmission because the encryption key was not registered.
3B1
(1) Self diagnostic codes
Code
Contents
C003
Remarks
Causes
Fax control PCB system problem

Processing with the fax software was
disabled due to a hardware or software problem.
Defective fax control PCB.
Replace the fax control PCB and check for

correct operation.
C005
Communication problem between

the operation unit PCB and fax control PCB
The operation unit PCB did not receive any key request command from
the fax control PCB within 1 minute of
the status change signal turning on.
Then, after resetting the fax machine,
the operation unit PCB again did not
receive any key request command
from the fax control PCB while the
status change signal was held on for
1 minute.
Abnormal data was received 5 times
in succession in response to the command from the fax control PCB.
An erroneous FAX READY signal
continued for 3 seconds and, after
resetting the fax machine, an erroneous FAX READY signal continued for
3 seconds again.

correct operation.
C006
Communication problem between

the main PCB and fax control PCB
When the facsimile is in the condition
given below, the correct status was not
received after 5 transmission retries.
When a communication error, such as
a parity error, occurs while receiving
status.
When no status is sent back within
100 ms of sending a command.
When the interval of status reception
data exceeds 30 ms.

correct operation.
C013
Fax control PCB software switch

checksum error
A checksum error occurred with the
software switch value stored in the
flash ROM on the fax control PCB.
Defective SRAM
on the fax control
PCB.

correct operation.
C082
Fax control PCB CG ROM checksum

error
CG ROM data in the flash ROM on
the fax control PCB.

correct operation.
1-5-1
3B1
Code
Contents
C083
Flash ROM program area checksum

error
program in the flash ROM on the fax
control PCB.
1-5-2
Remarks
Causes
Defective SRAM
on the fax control
PCB.

correct operation.
3B1
1-6-1 Updating the firmware

(1) Updating the firmware on the fax control PCB
Perform the steps below when updating the firmware in the Flash ROM on the fax control PCB.
Firmware updating requires the following tools:
Control ROM IC1 (P/N 2AW29310)
Control ROM IC2 (P/N 2AW29320)
Caution:
Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before disconnecting or inserting
connectors.
<Procedure>
1. Turn the main switch off and disconnect the power
plug from the wall outlet.
2. Remove the two screws holding the rear cover and
then the cover.
3. Remove the five screws holding the fax shield cover
and then the cover.
4. Fit control ROM IC1 and control ROM IC2 to the
Control ROM IC1

CN1
Control ROM IC2
Flash tool assembly
CN2
Figure 1-6-1
5. Insert connector CN1 (the one furthest from the

LEDs) on the flash tool assembly into connector CN5
on the fax control PCB.
Fax control PCB
CN1
CN5
Flash tool assembly
Figure 1-6-2
6. Connect the power plug into the wall outlet.
Upgrading of control ROM IC1 and 2 starts and LED
on the flash tool assembly flashes for 30 seconds.
The LED remains on when upgrading is complete.
7. Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
8. Remove the flash tool assembly from the fax control
PCB.
9. Refit the fax shield cover and rear cover.
1-6-1
3B1
2-2-1 Fax control PCB
PSPCB
BUBAT
ASIC
+5V DC
MPCB
CPU
+12V DC
CN6
CN1
CN8
Lithium
battery
BT101
28.224MHz
NCUPCB
Analog circuit
Modem
LSI
IC81
FLASH
ROM
IC51,52
CG
ROM
IC61
Back up
circuit 1
Back up
circuit 2
RTC
Crystal
oscillator
SRAM
IC62
IC63
Clock driver
IC12
CPU
IC11
CN3
ASIC
IC71
SDRAM
IC21
LVC
Flash tool
LVC
32-bit
16-bit
16-bit
32-bit
LVC
32-bit
32-bit
Data bus
CN4
CN5
LVC
Address bus
Figure 2-2-1 Fax control PCB block diagram
The fax control PCB (FCPCB) controls the overall fax operation.
To transmit a fax, image data scanned by the optical section of the copier is processed by the main PCB (MPCB) and then
sent to the fax control PCB (FCPCB). Received image data is first stored in the bitmap area of the SDRAM IC21 page by
page and compressed using the MH, MR or MMR method. The data is then stored in the image memory area of the SDRAM
IC21 and sent to the modem LSI IC81 to be modulated from digital signal to analog signal before it is sent to the telephone
line via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB).
To receive a fax, analog image data received from the telephone line via the NCU PCB (NCUPCB) is sent to the modem LSI
IC81 and, after demodulation into digital signals, stored in the image memory area of the SDRAM IC21. The image data is
then decompressed and converted into the bitmap area of the SDRAM IC21 page by page and sent to the ASIC IC71 for
resolution conversion and smoothing, and is passed to the main PCB (MPCB) as print image data.
2-2-1
Add-on memory
8-bit
Telephone
line
3B1
39
40
CN1
2
1
CN7
1 CN6
143
144
CN4
1
22
21
59
57
60
58
CN5
CN3
2
1
2
1
4
3
3B12801
9
CN8
Figure 2-2-2 Fax control PCB silk-screen diagram
2-2-2
3B1
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26
1-27
1-28
1-29
1-30
1-31
1-30
1-32
1-30
1-33
1-30
1-34
1-30
1-36
1-37
1-38
1-39
1-40
1-39
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-4
3-6
3-4
3-7
3-4
3-8
3-4
3-10
3-4
3-11
3-4
3-12
3-4
3-13
3-4
3-14
3-4
3-15
3-4
3-16
3-4
3-17
3-4
3-18
3-4
3-19
3-4
3-20
3-2
3-21
3-2
3-22
3-2
4-61
4-71, 73, 75
4-63
4-71, 73, 75
4-65, 67, 69 4-71, 73, 75
4-74
4-71, 73, 75
4-76
4-71, 73, 75
4-77
4-71, 73, 75
4-78
4-71, 73, 75
4-79
4-71, 73, 75
4-80
4-71, 73, 75
4-81
4-71, 73, 75
4-82
4-109, 113
4-83
4-71, 73, 75
4-84
4-71, 73, 75
4-85
4-71, 73, 75
4-86
4-71, 73, 75
Voltage
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
12 V DC
5 V DC
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
Analog
Analog
Analog
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3 V DC
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
3.3 V DC supply detection signal, input
FPVCLK signal, input
FVCLK signal, output
FMRE signal, output
FPVD signal, output
FPHSYNC signal, input
FPVSYNC signal, input
FOVSYNC signal, input
FOHSTHIN signal, input
FMIPOUT0 signal, input
FMREOUT signal, input
FFOCLK signal, input
MMISTS signal, input
FMMI_TXD2 signal, input
FMMI_RXD2 signal, output
FAXRESET signal, input
FAXREADY signal, output
PREQ signal, output
SREQ signal, output
MAINSTS signal, input
FMAIN_TXD0 signal, input
FMAIN_RXD0 signal, output
12 V DC supply, output
EXTRING1 signal, output
EXTRING2 signal, output
KMUTE signal, output
SHUNT signal, output
EARTH signal, output
TELSEL signal, output
FAXSEL signal, output
NCUTYPE2 signal, input
OFFHOOK signal, input
ONHOOK1 signal, input
ONHOOK2 signal, input
RINGDET signal, input
MODTXD signal, output
RXIN signal, input
MODRXD signal, input
OPTYPE1 signal, input
OPTYPE2 signal, input
3.3 V DC supply, input
DB (23) signal, input/output
DQM2 signal, output
AB (3) signal, output
2-2-3
3B1
Terminals (CN)
4-87
4-71, 73, 75
4-88
4-71, 73, 75
4-89
4-71, 73, 75
4-90
4-71, 73, 75
4-91
4-71, 73, 75
4-92
4-71, 73, 75
4-93
4-71, 73, 75
4-94
4-71, 73, 75
4-95
4-71, 73, 75
4-96
4-71, 73, 75
4-97
4-71, 73, 75
4-98
4-71, 73, 75
4-99
4-109, 113
4-100
4-71, 73, 75
4-101
4-71, 73, 75
4-102
4-71, 73, 75
4-103
4-71, 73, 75
4-104
4-71, 73, 75
4-105
4-71, 73, 75
4-106
4-109, 113
4-107
4-109, 113
4-108
4-109, 113
4-110
4-109, 113
4-111
4-109, 113
4-112
4-109, 113
4-114
4-109, 113
4-115
4-71, 73, 75
4-116
4-71, 73, 75
4-117
4-71, 73, 75
4-118
4-71, 73, 75
4-119
4-71, 73, 75
4-120
4-71, 73, 75
4-121
4-71, 73, 75
4-122
4-71, 73, 75
4-123
4-109, 113
4-124
4-71, 73, 75
4-125
4-71, 73, 75
4-126
4-71, 73, 75
4-127
4-71, 73, 75
4-128
4-71, 73, 75
4-129
4-71, 73, 75
4-130
4-71, 73, 75
4-131
4-71, 73, 75
4-139, 141, 143 4-133, 135, 137
6-1
6-2
7-1
7-2
8-1, 2
8-3, 4
8-5
8-6
8-7
8-3, 4
8-8
8-9
2-2-4
Voltage
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3 V DC
3 V DC
Analog
5 V DC
+12 V DC
5/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
DQM3 signal, output
_CS signal, output
CKE signal, output
_RAS signal, output
_CAS signal, output
CLK signal, output
RD/_WE signal, output
DQM1 signal, output
DQM0 signal, output
3.3 V DC supply, output
BUBAT backup power supply, input
SP alarm, output
+12 V DC supply, input
MRY signal, output
MSW signal, input
3B1
2-2-2 NCU PCB

120 V specifications
Destination
identification
circuit
JP20, JP21, JP22
NCUTYPE
1, 2, 3
/ONHOOK1
Loop current
detection/tone
signal reception
circuit IC30
LINE2
/ONHOOK2
RXIN
LINE1
FAXSEL
K70
MODRXD
Line
transformer
T70
MODTXD
SHUNT
K11
Ring signal
detection
circuit
PC60
DC loop/dial pulse
transmission circuit
PC80
PLSDIL
RNGDET
EARTH
K10
TEL L1
DCCONT
/OFFHOOK
External telephone
off-hook detection circuit
T40, PC40
TEL L2
EXTRING1
EXTRING2
TELSEL
220 - 240 V specifications
Destination
identification circuit
JP20, JP21, JP22
LINE2
NCUTYPE
1, 2, 3
/ONHOOK1
Loop current
detection/tone signal
reception circuit IC30
/ONHOOK2
RXIN
LINE1
FAXSEL
K70
TEL GND
Ground start
circuit PC10
MODRXD
Accounting
pulse elimination
circuit
L70
TEL2
K11
TEL1
Ring signal
detection
circuit
PC60
Line
transformer
T70
MODTXD
SHUNT
DC loop/dial pulse
transmission circuit PC80
PLSDIL
RNGDET
EARTH
K10
TEL L1
TEL L2
External telephone
off-hook detection circuit
T40, PC40
DCCONT
/OFFHOOK
EXTRING1
EXTRING2
TELSEL
Figure 2-2-3 NCU PCB block diagram
2-2-5
3B1
The NCU PCB (NCUPCB) mainly controls the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the circuits shown in the block
diagram.
The loop current detection/tone signal reception circuit IC30 detects the DC loop current formed at the DC loop/dial pulse
transmission circuit PC80 to determine the status of the telephone line. It also receives tone (DTMF) signals during remote
control. The ring signal detection circuit PC60 detects the ring signals from the telephone line to determine call reception.
The DC loop/dial pulse transmission circuit PC80 turns on and off the DC loop formed in the telephone line to send out dial
pulses (selection signals). The external telephone off-hook detection circuit (T40 and PC40) detects the off-hook state of the
telephone connected or the handset*1. The destination identification circuit (JP20, JP21 and JP22) is used by the fax control
PCB (FCPCB) to identify the destination of the NCU PCB (NCUPCB). The accounting pulse elimination circuit L70 removes
signals representing the communication charge information (accounting pulses) before they reach the modem when
telephone line is used.*2 This is because accounting pulses obstruct fax communications. The ground start circuit PC10
requests an outside connection to the private branch exchange (PBX) when calling via the PBX.*2
*1: Optional for 120 V specifications only.
*2: For 220 - 240 V specifications only.
2-2-6
3B1
J16
C210
D46
R412
+
C61
7
IC30 J47
THS-63F
D43
R31
R30
F10
TH10
C10
V11
C30
4
3
MCN1
MCN2
D40
D30
L30
F11
4
3
J15
E
CE
R415 B C
TR46
C403
C405
D31
D60
F12
J65
F13
J64
C400
J46
D32
L40
D41
V10
3B12803
J67
J66
TR47
J14
R409
J43
C402
R408
C401
1
PC30
J45
C404
J61
J59
K10 8
12
R400
ECB
5
4
5 PC31
R401
J62
T60 6
ECB
R410
ECB
DB70
C32
C408
TR44
R411
R801
TR80 TR41
D10
8
TR45
C410
C411
J31
C409
D48
R413
J13
R414
B CE
J29
R407
R402
J63
ECB
3 TR42
3
R403
J44
TR40
J53
J60
ECB
J56
J57
PC41
PC42
1
L41
C412
C414
C413
R60
R64
F14
J28
R804
R800
C62
R418
1 J32 R404
3 4
T40
D42
J52
J54
J58
J51
D47
J42
J39
PC80
J55
J33
J48
J38
5
1
D11
R10
TR10
J36
R803
12 1 T70 3
J37
D49
J30
PC40
1
J40
J41
D80
D62
J49
J27
R62
J34
1
C72
C80
J24
PC60
8D71
C406
R416
E
B
R805 R405
TR43
R406
3
3
E C B TR81
R802
J19
J23
C207
C208
J17
J18
J26
D72
+
ECB
C203
D45
C
E C B
J35
J50 1
K70
D70
R11
12 K11
TR11
C209
D44
22
JP20
JP22
6 J22
TR70
CN1 1
2
J20
R70
J9
J10
C202 J8
D61 C60
21
C407
J11
J12
C201
JP21
R71
J21
J7
J6
J25
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
C200
120 V specifications
J35
J34
C401 K10
R10
1
C402
PC40
+
8
R400
J54
E C B
TR40
C80
2
R807 J65
R800
C71
MCN2
F10
V11
J55
J63
D42
V10
C10
TH10
+
J62
F11
R803
F12
R801 E C B
D TR80
TR83
R812
R806
J60
4
3
2
1
6
5
J64
C
1
JP81
J61
F16
R A K
J58
L71
F13
R809
R811
JP80
DB70
IC80
DB10
C70
D43
R401 C405
E C B
F15
D80
R408
C400
TR41
J59
3B12804
DB1
TR84
E C B
D71
5
D82
J56
J57
TR82 C
E
B
R810 D72
1
12
K70
T40
R402
J48
J49
J47
8
R416
R413
R415
D45
D46
F14
J51
L70
8
J53
D64
D41
J52
TR46
TR47
C
B
L40
D40
J40
J43
12
1
5
D63
J42
D62
D49
C407
D10
J15
D44
PC10
C414
C413
J31
J38
C62
J44
J45
J46
PC80
R12
D11
12
J27
J29
3 T70
PC60
F24
D48
C409
TR10
E
C
F23
R412
+
+
C30 J41
IC30
THS-63F
J39
R63
J50
R62
J14
C406
TR12
J37
C72
+
J32
J33
R13
C412
J13
D70
6
C61
R72
C73
R71
R418
J10
J8
J28
J6
J7
C207
TR11
E
B
C
K11
R70
8
J25
JP20
JP22
C74
R804
F20
C32
J30
R61
J26
J16
R64
J19
J20
J21
J23
J22
J36
J24
TR70C E
21
22
R11
F22
F21
J17
R805
TR81
JP21
J11 L41
J3
CN1
1
2
J18
J9
C203
C202
J4
J5
J1
J2
J12
220 - 240 V specifications
R808
VR80
R802
MCN1
Figure 2-2-4 NUC PCB silk-screen diagram
2-2-7
3B1
Terminals (CN)
1-1
1-22
1-2
1-22
1-3
1-20
1-4
1-22
1-5
1-20
1-6
1-20
1-7
1-20
1-9
1-20
1-10
1-20
1-11
1-20
1-12
1-20
1-13
1-20
1-14
1-20
1-15
1-20
1-16
1-20
1-19
1-20
1-21
1-22
Voltage
Analog
Analog
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
Analog
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
3.3/0 V DC (pulse)
5 V DC
12 V DC
*For 220-240 V specifications.
2-2-8
Remarks
RXIN signal, output
MODRXD signal, output
RNGDET signal, output
MODTXD signal, input
ONHOOK1 signal, output
ONHOOK2 signal, output
OFFHOOK signal, output
NCUTYPE2 signal, output
NCUTYPE3 signal, output*
TELSEL signal, input
FAXSEL signal, input
PLSDIL signal, input
EARTH signal, input*
DCCONT signal, input
SHUNT signal, input
3B1
2-2-3 Fax operation unit PCB

FOPCB
MPCB
LED display matrix circuit
LEDON0-4
SCAN4-7
Keyboard matrix circuit
KEY SENS0-7
Figure 2-2-5 Fax operation unit PCB block diagram
The fax operation unit PCB (FOPCB) consists of an LED display matrix circuit and a keyboard matrix circuit. The scan
signals SCAN4 to SCAN7 are output to both matrix circuits from the main PCB (MPCB).
LED lighting signals LEDON0 to LEDON4 are also sent from the main PCB (MPCB) to the LED display matrix circuit. The
LEDs light when they are on the intersection of the lines of the scan signals SCAN4 to SCAN7 and LED lighting signals
LEDON0 to LEDON4.
When a key on the keyboard is pressed, it is identified by tracking the intersection of the lines of the scan signal (SCAN4 to
SCAN7) and the return signal (KEY SENS0 to KEY SENS7) to the main PCB (MPCB).
2-2-9
K39
K40
K45
K46
D7
K43
K44
K47
K48
K49
K50
K54
K55
K56
K60
K61
K62
2AW2401
K51
K52
K53
K57
K58
K59
JP8
JP10
L38
K42
D6
D8
D9
K41
JP2
JP1
17
CN1
JP3
JP4
JP5 18
K38
JP6
JP7
JP9
L37
L36 L35 L34 L33 L32 L31 L30
3B1
K37
JP11
Figure 2-2-6 Fax operation unit PCB silk-screen diagram
Terminals (CN)
1-2
GND
1-3
GND
1-4
GND
1-5
GND
1-6
GND
1-7
GND
1-8
GND
1-9
GND
1-10
GND
1-11
GND
1-12
GND
1-13
GND
1-14
GND
1-15
GND
1-16
GND
1-17
GND
1-18
GND
2-2-10
Voltage
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
5/0 V DC (pulse)
Remarks
_LEDON4 signal, input
_SCAN4 signal, input
KEY_SENS7 signal, output
3B1
2-2-4 Auxiliary power source PCB
D2
T1
AC input
D5
C15,91
C7
Q2
D6
C19
Switching
control circuit
5.2 V DC
output
circuit
IC1
Overvoltage
detection circuit
12 V DC
output circuit
IC2
5.2 V DC
GND
DC12V
C20
GND
Relay
PC1
Relay REM
PSPCB
Figure 2-2-7 Auxiliary power source PCB block diagram
The auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) is a switching regulator that converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12
V DC. It consists of a switching control circuit, 5.2 V DC output circuit and 12 V DC output circuit.
The rectifier circuit rectifies the full-wave of the AC input using the diode bridge D2. The smoothing capacitor C7 smoothes
out the pulsed current from the diode bridge.
The switching control circuit turns on/off the power MOSFET Q2 with the voltage induced in the controlling coil of the
transformer T1 to switch the current induced in the primary coil of the transformer T1.
The 5.2 V DC output circuit smoothes out the voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1
via the diode D5 and smoothing capacitors C15 and C91, and outputs a stable 5.2 V DC using the shunt regulator IC1. The
output status of the 5.2 V DC is fed back to the switching control circuit via the photo-coupler PC1. Based on the feedback,
the switching control circuit changes the duty cycle of the pulse that turns power MOSFET Q2 on/off in order to adjust the
5.2 V DC.
The 12 V DC output circuit smoothes out voltage from the current induced in the secondary coil of the transformer T1 via the
diode D6 and smoothing capacitor C19, and generates a stable 12 V DC using the 3-pin regulator IC2.
The relay turns on/off the AC supply to the power source PCB (PSPCB) based on the remote signal from the fax control
PCB (FCPCB).
2-2-11
3B1
TB1
TB3
R22
TB2
C3
R23
C1
SCR
3
L1
C2
RY
F1
C18
HS
R24
ZD2
ZD1
C6
IC2
D2
C19
C5
J1001
CP1
D6
C7
R25
T0104
J0503
J0501 CN1
C20
D1
R8
TH1
S
Q2
J0502
T1
R4
C8
R7
D5
D3
J7501
1
3
J2501
C15
J7502
R9
J1501
J1502
YS2
R12
C12
R11
C13
Q3
B
R10
3B12802
J1004
Q1
C17
R21
R19
R3
J2502
C10
R20
R2
D4
R14
R13
IC1
C10
R8
R15
C11
R18
PC1
R17
J1002
J1003
Figure 2-2-8 Auxiliary power source PCB silk-screen diagram
Terminals (CN)
1-3
1-2
1-5
1-4
2-2-12
Voltage
12 V DC
5 V DC
Remarks
3B1
6
5
Machine front
Machine inside
Machine rear
Figure 2-1-1
1. Fax control PCB (FCPCB) ........................... Modulates, demodulates, compresses, decompresses and smoothes out
image data, and converts resolution of image data.
Add-on memory* ........................................ Expands memory capacity for image data and bitmap conversion.
2.NCU PCB (NCUPCB) ................................... Controls connection to the telephone line.
3.Fax operation unit PCB (FOPCB) ................. Consists of fax operation keys and display LEDs.
4.Auxiliary power source PCB (APSPCB) ....... Converts an AC input to generate 5.2 V DC and 12 V DC.
5.Backup battery (BUBAT) ............................... Saves stored image when a power-down occur.
6.Speaker (SP) ................................................ Outputs buzzer, monitoring and speaker sounds.
* Optional.
2-1-1
KYOCERA MITA AMERICA, INC.

Headquarters:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-6000
New York Show Room:
149 West 51st street,
New York, NY 10019
TEL : (212) 554-2679
FAX : (212) 554-2625
Northeastern Region:
225 Sand Road, P.O. Box 40008
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008
TEL : (973) 808-8444
FAX : (973) 882-4401
Midwestern Region:
201 Hansen Court Suite 119
Wood Dale, Illinois 60191
TEL : (630) 238-9982
FAX : (630) 238-9487
Western Region:
14101 Alton Parkway,
P.O.Box 57006, Irvine,
California 92618-7006
TEL : (949) 457-9000
FAX : (949) 457-9119
Southeastern Region:
1500 Oakbrook Drive,
Norcross, Georgia 30093
TEL : (770) 729-9786
FAX : (770) 729-9873
Southwestern Region:
2825 West Story Road,
Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 550-8987
FAX : (972) 570-4704
Dallas Parts Distribution Center
& National Training Center:
2825 West Story Road,
Irving, Texas 75038-5299
TEL : (972) 659-0055
FAX : (972) 570-5816
KYOCERA MITA CANADA, LTD.

6120 Kestrel Road,
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1S8
TEL : (905) 670-4425
FAX : (905) 670-8116
KYOCERA MITA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.

Av. 16 de Septiembre #407
Col. Santa Ins,
Delegacin Azcapotzalco
Mxico, D.F. C.P. 02130
TEL : 3-83-27-41
FAX : 3-83-78-04
2000 KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION

is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation
is a registered trademark of KYOCERA MITA CORPORATION
Printed in U.S.A.

CS1530 2030ENSMr1

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CS1530 2030ENSMr1

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

CS-1530/2030

Safety warnings and precautions

2. Precautions for Maintenance

Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety

Always use parts having the correct specifications. ..........................................................................

1-2 Handling Precautions

1-4 Maintenance Mode

The scanner does not travel. ........................................................................................................

1-6 Assembly and Disassembly

1-7 Requirements on PCB Replacement

Replacing the main PCB ......................................................................................................................

2-1 Mechanical construction

2-2 Electrical Parts Layout

2-3 Operation of the PCBs

Power source PCB ............................................................................................................................... 2-3-1

1-1-2 Parts names and their functions

1 Original cover (optional)*1

Add Toner indicator

Start key (Indicator)

* On-line/Printer key (Indicator)

1-1-3 Machine cross section

Machine cross section

Paper feed section

1-1-4 Drive system

As viewed from machine front

Scanner motor gear

As viewed from machine rear

Drive motor gear

Upper paper feed clutch gear

* Optional for the 15 cpm copier/standard for the 20 cpm copier.

1-2-2 Developer and toner

1-2-3 Installation environment

Figure 1-2-1a Installation dimensions

Figure 1-2-1b Installation dimensions

1-3-1 Unpacking and installation

Remove the tapes.

Make test copies.

Completion of the machine installation.

Light source unit 1 pins

Light source unit 2 pin

*The diagram shows the 20 cpm copier.

Figure 1-3-2a Unpacking

# Bar code labels

Figure 1-3-2b Unpacking

Light source unit 1 pins

Paper conveying unit

6. Remove the tape covering the original detection

Original detection switch

Fulcrum of the drawer lift

9. Remove the tape holding each of the front and

10. Remove the tape holding each of the drawer claw

Drawer claw spacers

Light source unit 2 pin

Install optional devices.

Image formation unit

Magnet roller gear

Release the cleaning blade.

Install a waste toner tank.

Waste toner tank

1.While holding the waste toner tank release lever

Waste toner tank

2. Close the front cover.

Adjust the fixing pressure.